Bose's Hearphones - Blurring the Boundaries Between Hearing Aids and Headphones Read more
Consumer Electronics

    “Hearphones have truly changed my life” claims one review of Bose’s new generation of fashionable, customisable, ‘conversation-enhancing’ hearing aids. Thanks to a recent FDA approval for marketing the over-the-counter hearing aids, consumers both young and old are now able to purchase, program and control Bose’s ‘Hearphones’ on their own without the assistance from a healthcare provider. This represents a major shift in hearing health regulation and one which could see a drastic change in both awareness and solutions to an age-old problem.

    The WHO (World Healthcare Organisation) estimates that by 2050 over 900 million people will have disabling hearing loss, and this is no longer an issue just for the elderly. It’s claimed 1.1 billion young people under 35 are currently classified ‘at risk’, mostly due to preventable causes such as listening to loud music and being exposed to noisy environments. For many, the thought of having to wear a hearing aid is unpopular, as the cost, complexity and social stigma surrounding hearing aids present significant barriers. However, as the FDA, Bose and other consumer electronics manufacturers are now starting to discover, the potential for headphones to prevent, restore and enhance our hearing health in ways that were previously inaccessible is becoming ever-more prevalent, especially with the convergence of these two once divided industries.

    Rechargeable batteries, phone-calls, music streaming, smartphone app connectivity via Bluetooth and digital noise reduction via directional microphone systems are all features which could easily be mistaken for describing a wireless headphone. However, these features are that of one of the largest hearing aid producers Oticon’s new offering -
    the Opn 3.

    The analogy works both ways, with headphones themselves beginning to adopt similar form-factors as of hearing aids, such as with the growing popularity of truly wireless products and its subtlety of placement within the ear canal. Through true wireless, vendors are attempting to create products which can remain in the ears throughout day-to-day activities, particularly as headphones are being increasingly used for communication, smart home control via voice assistants and other 24/7 use cases. Furthermore, some noise cancellation features in headphones are loosely based on the same multiple-microphone principles as with digital noise-reduction in hearing aids, as well as incorporation of ‘Hear Through’ or ‘Ambient Aware’ technologies. For headphone manufacturers then, following Bose’s steps of transitioning into the market for hearing health, this presents a significant opportunity to capitalise on these synergies and branch into this now attainable space.

    The market potential for over-the-counter ‘hearphones’ is huge. Recent conservative estimates by the WHO put the worldwide hearing aid market at around 15 million units a year. We figure that many people currently in the market for a hearing aid would seriously explore the option of buying ‘hearphones’ in the knowledge that they are cheaper (e.g. Bose Hearphones cost $499) than prescribed hearing aids, which can range from $1,000 to $3,000 in most instances. Furthermore, the lower price of hearphones could prompt many additional people to acquire their first device to improve their hearing. For example, people with mid to low hearing loss, or audiological conditions such as tinnitus who would otherwise go untreated. Additionally, the WHO states two-thirds of people affected by hearing loss are in developing countries, often on low incomes. In such markets, it is said that less than 5% of people who need hearing aids actually have one. Over-the-counter ‘hearphones’, would provide a much cheaper and accessible alternative in such cases.

    There are a few examples, other than Bose, of both headphone and hearing aid companies that are attempting to operate in this space. GN Hearing and Starkey are two hearing health companies who have produced audio headphones for both consumer and professional use by drawing on their experience. So too have start-up companies Bragi and Nuheara’s, with their latest ‘hearables’ which promise audible enhancement developments within their products, as well as home theatre company ZVOX who have created ‘Voice Buds’, all of which operate in this grey area between headphone and hearing-aid. The FDA ruling may see many more vendors enter this space from a variety of industries in the coming years.

    Looking further forward, ‘hearing enhancement’ within so called ‘hearable’ devices opens a world of possibilities for those even without hearing issues. A browse on crowdfunding sites such as Indiegogo confirms audiological enhancement within true wireless earphones is a superpower within reach, and its popularity completely inferential. Being able to turn up, turn down and customise what you hear in the world around you, as well as incorporating additional features such as live translation, point to an exciting and more connected future.

    Hearing health is both a serious and global public health issue and now it seems regulators such as the FDA have identified that cutting the red tape and allowing different kinds of solutions and vendors from other industries may be able to contribute to tackle this problem. The effectiveness of headphones role in this sure makes logical sense, however, as another review on the Bose’s hearphones states, “Some things work well – others don’t,” there are still many complex and technological barriers for manufacturers to overcome before a well-rounded solution can prevail.

    Spot the Difference – Sony’s True Wireless Xperia Duo and Oticon Opn 3 Bluetooth Hearing Aid

Is it too soon to be talking about 8K? Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    The ongoing drive for ever-higher resolutions has been a familiar story in the world of video acquisition for many years. But, after IBC 2018, talking about the practical application of 8K is no longer taboo.

    Japan’s state broadcaster, NHK, has long been the driving force behind 8K. Manufacturers have been committed to developing an ecosystem of products that can support the 8K broadcast standard, ‘Super Hi-Vision’, in time for the Tokyo 2020 Olympics. However, with many other broadcasters still occupied with upgrading their portfolio of HD channels and the limited availability of 4K content, meaningful use of 8K technology in the wider industry can seem distant.

    Shortly before IBC, 8K held a notable presence at IFA 2018 in Berlin, as Samsung, Sharp, LG, TCL and Toshiba all dedicated space at the convention to showcase 8K consumer displays. Samsung and LG incorporated spectacular reveals of their 8K TV sets into their press conferences, whilst Sharp emphasised their development of an 8K ecosystem, which includes both their display and the 8C-B60A camcorder, which has already begun shipping in Japan and China. The continued focus on higher-resolutions by TV manufacturers at the show indicates that it won’t be long until they begin their attempts to drive 8K into the home, as they did with 4K.

    Though adoption of 4K in broadcasting has been slower than was first anticipated, 4K acquisition has been accessible for several years. 2017 was a particularly significant year for 4K adoption in the camcorder market, as it truly became mainstream. Cost effective 1” sensor camcorders brought 4K to the lower-end of the market, as sub $5,000 fixed lens camcorders have fuelled a 9% point annual increase in the worldwide market share of 4K capable camcorders sold by Sony, Panasonic, Canon and JVC, to account for a total of 32% of worldwide camcorder volumes.

    The accessibility of 4K acquisition has allowed workflows to mature and, with this, has come a greater awareness of the benefits of over sampling (acquiring video footage at a higher resolution than is necessary for the final output). It has been proven and accepted that recording video at a higher resolution and down-sampling the footage for final delivery will result in an improvement in video quality. The flexibility of having a larger canvas of pixels to work with also enables more creative options in post-production, from digital zooms and cropping in and recomposing shots to improving the accuracy of digital stabilisation and VFX tasks.

    The use of 8K in live broadcasting may be very limited for the foreseeable future on a global basis, but the benefits of 8K acquisition are already apparent due to the proven use-cases of oversampling. There is an obvious use for 8K acquisition at prestige events and in select cinematic instances to begin preparing a library of 8K content, but 8K is not just about futureproofing. The same learnings made from using 4K acquisition to create HD content can be applied with 8K, but to an even greater degree - especially in the case of using 8K for HD formats. Capturing 7680 x 4320 pixels to create a 1920 x 1080 image may sound like complete overkill, but it’s precisely that factor of 8K being 16 times bigger than HD that makes oversampling 8K footage a more perceptible step-up than 4K. 8K cameras will not immediately replace 4K or even HD cameras, but their enhanced capabilities for oversampling allow them to be used in a completely new way.

    At IBC 2018, Panasonic demonstrated a new camera that will be available next year that uses 8K acquisition as a tool to facilitate more efficient HD capture. Panasonic are calling this technique in use, “region of interest” or ROI. ROI allows up to four independent HD crops to be taken from a single 8K source camera (for instance, creating wide, mid and close shots simultaneously of a scene). In a practical application, this can reduce the number of cameras needed on a production, as multiple shots can be captured by a single camera operator. Sony’s UHC-8300 8K studio camera also enables a similar kind of flexibility, as it can simultaneously output 8K, 4K and HD signals. This facilitates more flexible workflows - for example, live feeds in 4K and HD could be sent to a video switcher for use in live coverage, whilst the 8K signal is taken directly to a recorder for archival purposes.

    As the adoption of the 4K UHD formats grows, there will be a greater need for 8K where instances of oversampling for 4K content is necessary. The reason that 8K will gain ground in acquisition in the immediate future is due to the new possibilities that it creates in production. 8K cameras will begin to see growth primarily through their use in mixed resolution production environments, deployed among an array of HD and/or 4K cameras.

    IBC marked a significant step forward in the eventual adoption of 8K. Though its use as a broadcast format will remain niche, the potential it has to enable new techniques in acquisition are abundant. With NHK set to start broadcasting their 8K content in December this year, the acceptance of 8K is already well under way.

Photokina 2018 - Why the Mirrorless Camera Format will be the Star of the Show Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Since the last Photokina two years ago, product innovation has dramatically increased, especially with regards to mirrorless cameras and lenses.  In 2016, the industry and show buzz was all about the new category launches, including the Fujifilm entrance into medium format mirrorless. Now, two years later, Nikon, Canon and Panasonic have unveiled their entrance into the full-frame mirrorless segment. The level of industry confidence in the mirrorless segment, as well as the pace of innovation, continues to grow, whereas the industry consensus is that the opportunity for further DSLR innovation has become somewhat limited.
    What are the advantages of Mirrorless v DSLR and what are the end-user benefits of making the switch?
    Size and Weight

    Mirrorless bodies are typically smaller in size, lighter in weight and mechanically simpler, compared to DSLRs, due to the lack of a mirror mechanism. A large lens combined with a smaller/lighter camera body is a limitation for some users who prefer larger DSLR-style grips, although some manufacturers have started to address this issue by marginally increasing the size of some mirrorless cameras.

    Increased Retailer Support

    Specialist channels/retailers e.g. consumer electronics and photo specialists are offering more extensive support for mirrorless. This will ultimately benefit end-users.

    Affordable Prices

    Increased competition among the mirrorless brands and the relatively fast pace at which mirrorless models/generations are updated, compared to DSLRs, often results in more significant price discounts, often between 6-9 months after launching. Sony heavily discounted its older full-frame models in early 2018, including the A7 camera body & kit with 28-70mm lens for $999 (USA) and £750 (UK).

    Full Frame Development

    The Sony A7 III launch was well received by the industry due to its impressive specification at a relatively affordable price point ($2,000 body-only). Nikon, Canon and Panasonic have all unveiled similar priced full-frame mirrorless cameras.  Consequently, feedback suggests that demand for higher priced, full-frame cameras between $3,000 - $3,500 may suffer slightly moving forwards.  

    Widening Range of Camera Bodies and Lenses

    The range of mirrorless lenses is still not as extensive as that for DSLRs, although mirrorless manufacturers are offering a growing range of camera bodies and lenses for both enthusiasts and professional end-users. Third party lens manufacturers e.g. Sigma launched new mirrorless lenses in 2018, thus increasing credibility for the mirrorless segment.  

    A Move to Video

    This functionality is appealing to both video enthusiasts and professionals e.g. videographers. In 2017, 35% of mirrorless cameras sold were equipped with 4K video resolution versus only 7% of DSLRs; this is set to rise to 51% of mirrorless cameras and only 9% of DSLRs in 2018. An interchangeable lens camera is considered an investment with at least a 2-3 year lifecycle and ‘futureproofing’ plays a role in the purchase decision; consumers and professionals will increasingly expect 4K, even if they do not immediately have a requirement to capture in 4K. 

    Improvements in Technology

    Further improvements in technology will be available to consumers, including reductions in blackout time, motion blur and rolling shutter effect, along with significant improvements in autofocus/accuracy of shooting subjects, as well as processing speed. Additionally, wireless connectivity is a standard feature (100% of mirrorless cameras offer Wi-Fi versus two thirds of DSLRs), while mirrorless digital viewfinders have improved considerably in recent years (e.g. minimal lag) – the performance is almost on par with DSLRs.

    The Futuresource Imaging and Consumer Electronics team will be attending Photokina 2018 and will be producing its annual report covering the product and technology highlights at the show.

    For more information about this and other Futuresource Consulting reports please visit our report portal

$54 Billion To Be Spent on Mobile Gaming by People who Don't Play Video Games Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Mobile is the fastest growing sector of the global video games market and this year $54 billion will be spent on buying games, downloading additional content (DLC) and subscriptions. What is most staggering about mobile gaming is that in 2018 it will account for 42% of total worldwide video gaming spend, higher than both consoles and PC, but is driven by a consumer base that in the most part wouldn’t classify themselves as a gamer.

    So, how has this market managed to capture the time and resources of a wide demographic who ‘don’t play video games’? The answer is in part the widespread adoption of the smartphone, but more importantly underpinned using psychology and microtransactions.

    At the end of 2017, there were 4.1 billion smartphones in use around the world offering an enormous addressable market. Furthermore, global tastes in terms of gaming preference is converging, therefore content no longer needs to cater specifically for one market, country or cultural group. Take Candy Crush Saga, launched in November 2012 it remains in the top 5 grossing apps each month for the US, UK, Australia, Germany and many others. It is also in the top 100 grossing apps for leading APAC markets South Korea, Singapore, China and Japan; countries with vastly different cultures to the western markets the game was launched in.

    As well as enormous reach, the mobile handset is now a powerful gaming device, with current, top end smartphones now achieving more than double the graphics performance compared to the last console generation of the PS3 and Xbox 360. However, this is peak performance and very few mobile games are developed to max out these high-end phones. Mobile games publishers need to serve a wide range of devices of various capabilities, as well as consider battery constraints and overheating.

    Mobile games are typically free at the point of downloading, firstly increasing attractiveness to the consumer, but also an excellent method of preventing games from being pirated. The secret sauce of monetisation for publishers lies in many (many) small transactions, driving significant revenue from a large scale installed base. Nowhere has this been more successful than Japan. In 2017, Japanese smartphone owners spent an average of 6,000 Yen on mobile gaming, equivalent to US$ 54.

    On a global level, in-game purchasing is targeted at the more avid gamer with a higher propensity to spend, less than half of one percent of gamers account for half of all revenue generated, which is why there are such significant discounts for spending. Taking global phenomenon Fortnite as a typical example, you get 35% more in game currency per dollar by buying the largest amount of V-Bucks possible, ($99.99) compared to the smallest ($ 9.99). The psychology behind microtransactions is certainly interesting and the plethora of different techniques have arisen, backed by scientific research. The three most common are explained below.

    In game currency is the backbone to all microtransactions providing an additional layer of isolation from real world money. This prevents mobile gamers being able to easily put a value on the items they are buying in the game and places a disconnect between in-game purchases spending real money.

    Loot boxes or random chance purchases are a more recent initiative. They are particularly effective as it has been proven that sense of reward from receiving an item via a chance is higher than purchasing the same item with in game currency.

    Loss aversion, when a gamer is in a stressful situation such as having lost all their lives, or not completed a daily challenge, using in game currency to prevent ‘losing’ is a highly successful and powerful tool. Furthermore, having spent to prevent a loss once, there is a greater incentive to continue spending as an escalation of commitment, also known as the sunk cost fallacy.

    With the global smartphone installed base expected to exceed 5 billion by 2020 and therefore a greater number of gaming ready devices, global mobile gaming spend is expected to reach $71 billion in 2022. A key market driver will be the increasing penetration of smartphones in developing countries such as India and Indonesia. With these countries, and many others adopting a mobile-first mentality, tapping into these markets and understanding their cultural norms and idiosyncrasies, could be the key to devising the next revolution of microtransactions and driving mobile gaming to an even higher level.

    To find out more about our gaming research, please click here>>

Latest Apple Event Key to Company's 2019 Strategy Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Apple’s September ‘Special’ event has once again come around, with a new line up of handsets and the Apple Watch Series 4. With the iPhone accounting for 64 cents on every dollar Apple made in revenue since its last September event, and wearables continually cited up as one of Apple’s fastest growing product segments, the event is key for the company’s 2019 strategy and central to its continued success.

    The products announced are telling of the current conditions of worldwide markets as experienced by Apple. A big focus on smartwatches and smartphones was expected, with these areas remaining key for Apple. The rumoured arrival of a new iPad Pro did not come to reality, which is perhaps not a surprise given the tablet market continues to decline in size, at -9% volume and -17% retail market value during 2017. This product category has taken a backseat at many consumer-focused Apple events, although remains a strong part of Apple’s education offering. Furthermore, some had suggested the gathering at Cupertino would also bring next generation AirPods into market, also a significant market for Apple, having held 85% market share in the true wireless headphone’s category during H1 2018, however a new edition of headphones was also absent.

    The iPhone line is always one of the most significant product launches made in September, and with this year’s event came a return to Apple’s past strategy of launching a premium and lower cost version of smartphones, a strategy used with the iPhone SE and iPhone C handsets. However, with the iPhone XR retailing from $749, it doesn’t do much to bridge the gap between aspirational Apple consumer and current Apple consumer. Apple’s dominance in many Western and other developed markets results in the only way for the company’s iPhone business to grow, which is to increase sales in lower priced markets. However, the only handsets which provide a much lower cost option for budget conscious consumers are the iPhone 7, a handset that doesn’t fair well against the offerings of Android vendors.

    On the other end of the spectrum, Apple’s iPhone XS and XS Max are set to maintain its position as the leading flagship smartphone vendor. The iPhone X has been one of the most popular handset models over the last 12 months and the revamp of the handset is expected to provide a good handset offering over the next year. While its design changes are incremental, processing hardware has been further tuned. AI (Artificial Intelligence) will be one of the key battle grounds moving forward. The inclusion of improved Neural networks as a dedicated section of a smartphone processor is only the start of Apple’s plans. AI computing is at a turning point, with developments expected in bringing machine learning tasks into the handset and out of the cloud. Apple began its journey in this realm last year, with security dedicated machine learning tasks powering FaceID being performed on the device. Further devices being shipped with Apple’s NPU will benefit from Core ML and the ability for developers to explore machine learning’s potential on a mobile device. Apple’s involvement in on-device machine learning will be a big benefit to the industry. A uniform installed base of devices, running iOS, with Apple designed SoC (System on the Chip) architecture provides an ideal learning ground for developers, rather than developing for a fragmented Android user base, with varying hardware and software installations. While Qualcomm and Huawei are developing AI capable smartphone processors, Apple has an advantage given the homogenous platform for developers to access.

    The Apple Watch Series 4 was certainly one of the most quietly impressive announcements during the show. On the face of it, innovation to the watch hardware was incremental; a next generation processor was added, screen size and utilisation was increased, and battery life remained the same. The most significant update to hardware was the inclusion of an electrocardiogram (ECG/EKG) monitor. As smartwatches have moved towards a health and fitness tracking focused piece of hardware, the next logical step in development is to target the medical sector. Close to half a billion people suffer from a diagnosed heart condition, and many more suffer unknowingly. The potential for a consumer electronics product to further diagnose unknown sufferers has huge potential for public health. While the ECG monitor is certainly a niche selling point of the Apple Watch, a discrete monitor is a huge turning point for consumer electronics; we expect the inclusion of such hardware to drive a small number of sales, but for consumers that may have not otherwise adopted wearable technology.

    Another feature that caught our interest was the fall detection software made possible through an improved gyroscope included on the watch. Wearable trackers for the elderly have been pushed as a by-product of the successful kids’ tracker market. However, these have seen a much lower level of take up. The Apple Watch offers a device which does not stigmatize age or invade privacy, while providing peace of mind for families and help where needed. While this update and similar developments do not refresh the USP for smartwatches, it is these incremental developments that opens smartwatch adoption to a variety of consumer bases, however small.

    Overall, the Apple event showed that the company was still ahead of the curve in many ways. It indicated that the days of obtaining a killer feature and USP for a device are gone. The iPhone will continue to be of the most important smartphones worldwide, though, the new handsets are unlikely to break the status quo. Away from handsets, Apple continues to focus on expanding its product range to create new revenue streams following the huge past growth of its smartphone division. Wearables as a sector is yet to fully find itself. The use-cases for smartwatches are broad, but vendors in the industry are struggling to find one clear message of why a wide consumer base should purchase the devices. It’s clear that Apple is experimenting with feature sets designed for niche demographics through its smartwatch, which will provide additional growth in the segment, however this will remain relative in comparison to its giant smartphone business.

The Convergence of AV & Pro Video Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    Alongside the usual topics of IP, 4K, HDR and IP, another trend was prevalent at NAB 2018, one that we fully expect to see explored at IBC this year: diversification.

    The realities of the traditional broadcast/pay-TV industry mean that the potential of the market is limited. The business is changing. Cord-cutting, the rise of SVOD services such as Netflix and evolving advertising spend is leading to budgets in the broadcast market tightening every year whilst, at the same time, expectations on what new products can achieve is increasing. Broadcast is all about doing more with less.

    Moore’s Law allows this: increased processing power in each generation of products allows functionality to be expanded, but this comes at a price. Unless companies are including features that do not exist in their current product line up, the inevitable outcome is the eventual rationalisation of product ranges and, as the idea is doing more with less, this can have a negative impact on revenues.

    The limited potential of the broadcast market is therefore the driver of a transformation that is manifesting itself in two interlinked ways: diversification of customer type and diversification of product ranges.

    AV and professional video have walked hand in hand for many years now in certain areas, most notably in acquisition, but now these two worlds are colliding. This is being driven by modern society’s insatiable demand for video and the emergence of IP.

    IP is revolutionising the way in which video is processed and transported in both broadcast and AV. Whereas SDI environments and accompanying skillsets are largely centred around broadcast, IP is agnostic with the technology catering to all users of video. Broadcast will still have high expectations in terms of levels of quality and service, but professional video and AV will no longer use separate technologies in the future. IP is the unifying force that ushers in huge potential to traditional “broadcast” manufacturers.

    Industries and applications such as education, the corporate world, governments, live events and houses of worship (particularly in the US) are embracing the ease with which they can create and distribute content: IP distribution of video has meant that anyone can be a “broadcaster”.

    This is not a new trend, however. The pro camcorder industry was long ago catering to this much wider range of verticals. What is different now is that companies that have historically focused on broadcast, from huge technology providers to small niche players, are starting to look at how they can position themselves to take advantage of these “new” markets.

    One of the most obvious ways this can be seen is in the number of stands at IBC 2018 that will feature PTZ cameras. Over the past two years, the range of vendors fielding products in this growth area has changed dramatically. Companies that have never been involved in content acquisition have added cameras to their line ups to take advantage of the huge growth in this part of the market; growth that is largely down to the AV industry.

    Away from PTZ cameras, some the giants of the broadcast industry are increasingly looking towards the AV market. The large amount of video being created and distributed by some organisations in end-user types outside of broadcast means there is a natural opportunity here. The move to micro-service-based software solutions that vendors are making will facilitate this. Products become are becoming scalable based on the needs of the end-user both in terms of size and complexity.

    Widening up traditional broadcast equipment portfolios to other verticals is a learning process for all involved. Although the same, or similar products can be utilised across different markets, the skillsets that exist and the ways in which products are used differ. Different end-user types mean that vendors and resellers will need to find new and innovative ways to sell and market equipment –  it is the companies that can get away from being perceived as “broadcast only” that will be able to bridge this gap most effectively.

    The convergence of the professional video and AV industries is still in its early stages, but already the potential is clear. Although Futuresource still fully expects IBC to be a “broadcast” centric show, it is likely that product offerings and marketing messages are going to be increasingly inclusive of the wider AV industry, both at IBC 2018 and beyond.

The Evolution of Professional Video Acquisition Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    Professional video acquisition is undergoing a revolution as the production industry takes advantage of the wide range of advanced camcorders and cameras at their disposal. The image quality available in contemporary products is far in excess of what was exclusive to just high-end TV and movie productions a decade ago, but the jump in quality and fall in price points are just part of the story.

    The Importance of Convergence

    The emergence of DSLRs used for professional video production is well documented, but after an initial significant spike in demand, these products became less fashionable. End-users realised that, although the image quality “bang for buck” was considerable, DSLRs simply weren’t built with video in mind and so low-end digital cinema cameras became the option of choice. The genie was out of the bottle, however, and camera manufacturers were keen to exploit this market. The next generation of DSLRs and, more recently, Compact System Cameras (CSCs or Mirrorless Cameras) were built with video in mind and have reaped the rewards, with renewed interest in the segment.

    The Rise and Rise of Large Sensors

    The background to this, of course, was the digital cinema revolution, kickstarted by Red Digital Cinema in 2007. Filmic, shallow-depth-of-field shooting was once only the preserve of high-end film makers, but now it is not just possible at lower price points, it is becoming the standard.

    In 2012, less than a tenth of global pro camcorder volumes were accounted for by products with sensors larger than 2/3". In 2017, this figure had risen to almost half.

    Key to this is the desire to give content the prestigious, cinematic look: to add value to the production. This is true of almost all genres and verticals, up to and including some news items (although not true ENG content). The pervasiveness of this look has led to a global decline of the 2/3" segment, as broadcasters opt for mid-range digital cinema cameras rather than “traditional” 2/3" sensor camcorders. ENG is now the only preserve of these 2/3" sensor cameras and, even here they’re under pressure, as quality lower-end products are being preferred in some cases, due to pressure on budgets.

    1" Sensors: The Perfect Compromise

    Digital cinema cameras typically have S35mm or larger sensors, which give a distinctive look, but are not practical in all situations. Where users may have the required experience or want more of a “run and gun” style of shooting other options are required. This is where 1" sensor camcorders have come in. First entering the market in 2014, 1" sensor cameras have grown to become the leading sensor size in the global pro camcorder market, accounting for a third of volumes in 2017.

    1" sensor pro camcorders have come to prominence at the expense of the 1/3" segment, the traditional “workhorse” sensor size. 1/3" sensor camcorders have been, and continue to be, used in a wide range of verticals because they offer what was the perfect compromise between performance and price. 1" sensor camcorders offer arguably better image quality while being less expensive in some cases.

    In addition to this, the fixed-lens nature of many 1" sensor camcorders means that the total cost of ownership is lower than even the most affordable large sensor camcorders, while maintaining the shallow depth-of-field look (albeit in more forgiving way).


    Evolution of High-end Digital cinema cameras

    At the other end of the market, top-range digital cinema cameras are also undergoing a transformation. As the quality of mid-range cameras improves at pace, vendors of high-end digital cinema cameras have been forced to innovate. The past 12 months have seen a raft of Large Format Sensor products released from Arri, Red, Sony and Canon, with rumours of more products to be released in the coming year. The aim here is to stimulate mature markets that have become saturated with S35mm cameras over the past couple of years by giving end-users (and rental houses) new reasons to purchase products.


    Live Content outside the Realm of Broadcasters

    It is not only the pre-recorded market that is undergoing significant change. While system cameras still dominate the world of live acquisition when it comes to broadcast, PTZ cameras are really making their mark across the whole spectrum of live AV. Flexible, comparatively inexpensive and not requiring the operator skills needed for more complex products, PTZ cameras are proving hugely popular in corporate, education and house of worship verticals to name a few. They are also being used to a certain extent within broadcast, competing with low-end system cameras to allow savings both in terms of CAPEX (cheaper products) and OPEX (fewer operators required). While the system camera market has remained relatively flat despite the transition to 4K, the global PTZ market is going from strength to strength, with volumes growing with a CAGR of 5.3%.

    While the priority in professional video production has remained the same – producing the best quality content that budget will allow, the ways by which this is done are changing as technology evolves and high-quality video acquisition products become more affordable. The pressures on budgets, the collision between pro video and AV worlds and the intense competition in the market means that innovation is likely to continue. It will therefore be the manufacturers that can stay ahead of the curve that will prosper.

    For more information about Futuresource broadcast and professional equipment research services please visit

Evolution, Transformation and the Modern Workplace Read more
Professional AV

    Workplace meetings have undergone a physical and cultural transformation during the past five years, both in terms of their location and the technology used to facilitate them. Modern working habits and technological advancements have contributed to the rise of the meeting room as a high growth vertical for audio visual, unified communications and collaboration technologies. Further to this, employees are increasingly meeting in other areas of the office with major implications for the vendors involved in these markets. The development of modern technologies which serve to increase teamwork, and businesses pursuing top-down policies to create collaboration focused spaces, are fundamentally altering the modern workplace. This evolution is exposed in Futuresource’s brand new 2018 Corporate Meeting Room End User Report.

    One key area of change relates to the physical makeup of meeting rooms. Here, the number of large meeting spaces has decreased during the past two years, predominantly due to the macro trend toward smaller, faster, more flexible meetings. Typically, large meeting rooms are being repurposed for smaller meeting spaces and, with over a quarter of companies looking to add additional meeting rooms over the next three years, the overall total addressable market of meeting rooms is expected to surge.  Businesses are very keen to promote top-down policies which utilise space more efficiently and promote smaller, more collaborative sessions amongst workers. Manufacturers have also been quick to respond to these changes, producing a raft of collaboration technologies designed for smaller meeting room and huddle spaces that are already seeing good traction in the market.

    Another clear indication that the traditional meeting is undergoing fundamental change is the type and variety of products that are now being used in these spaces. This development is most evident when we look at meeting room budgets, which have grown increasingly diversified across product categories. While the meeting traditionally was the mainstay of telephony and display technologies, we are now seeing that as the size of a meeting room grows, there is a significant increase in spending on goods other than displays, such as audio, collaboration devices and control products. The distribution of budgets is highest in large meeting rooms, where over 60% of funds are spent outside of display technologies. This diversification is not only evidence of the growing importance of a wider set of technologies but also the increasing complexity of the meeting room market.

    Demographic change and budget diversification are not the only significant changes happening to the meeting, with employee habits and practices also undergoing a cultural transformation. With more employees working from home, and the increased ability to work in multiple locations geographically or in different areas within an office, workers are now much more flexible with where they are working and who they are working with. Employers have been keen to develop more informal meeting spaces in step with these modern flexible working habits and, with 20% of meetings now being held in locations such as kitchens/eating areas, breakouts rooms and receptions/foyers, it is no surprise that 43% of companies surveyed as part of this research state they are investing in dedicated technology for these spaces.

    With dramatic changes happening in the corporate meeting room, technology providers are meticulously following the evolving demands of the modern workplace and how employees work with one another. This market presents both an exciting opportunity for growth but ample room for failure and, with culturally diverse variations in how employees work with one another, Futuresource’s Corporate End User Study provides the most comprehensive guide to the corporate meeting room and the nuances of this rapidly evolving marketplace.

Amazon Strengthening its Position in TV? Who's Under Threat - Sky, Samsung or Both? Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Amazon Fire OS powered TVs were made available in the USA last year and reports suggest that the online retailer is looking to push these sets outside of the USA, starting with the UK. 2017 saw Westinghouse, Seiki and Element partner with Amazon to release Fire OS sets under each of their respective names. More recently in April of this year, Amazon and Best Buy (once again just US) announced a partnership for a new line of Toshiba branded Fire TV Edition TVs, complete with HDR. This brought a new dimension to Amazon’s strategy in this space - an in-store presence. This added factor of Amazon TVs being available at retail stores (not just online) was significantly important given the overwhelming popularity of large screen sets being bought in bricks and mortar stores.

    The inclusion of the TV-set into Amazon’s hardware roster performs an important role, widening its reach amongst consumers, increasing the use and accessibility of its services and ultimately helping to drive sales of other Amazon goods. Amazon already has strong roots into the TV-screen being the number one vendor within the media streamer market worldwide, with over 20% shipment share last year - despite only officially being available in a handful of countries – and has overtaken its main rivals Apple and Google. However, the media streamer market in comparison to smart TV is relatively small, with 53 million streamers expected to ship globally this year versus 155 million smart TVs. The recently launched Fire TV Cube is another step for Amazon in pushing to become the home screen for the TV, but for Amazon the larger prize lies beyond dominance in the low-priced media streamer market. Amazon looks set to position itself within the larger and more competitive TV market going head-to-head with the likes of Samsung and LG.

    The potential release of an Amazon powered TV in international markets stems beyond just selling consumers an increasingly commoditised black box, Amazon’s ability to build out a fully-fledged content proposition combining FTA content with its own Prime Video streaming service (including exclusive original content) SVOD and la carte subscriptions through Amazon Channels makes Amazon a pseudo Pay-TV operator and pushes it into the $200 billion+ per year industry enjoyed by the likes of Sky, Liberty Global and AT&T. This position was further strengthened by its recent acquisition of a Premier League rights package from 2019. Yet, perhaps the most compelling point to raise on how this all unfolds is how Amazon’s control across hardware, platform, services and knowledge of its customers, provides it with the ability to offer potentially the most targeted advertising proposition of its kind. So, who should be more concerned – the TV set vendors or the traditional pay-TV operators?

    It doesn’t come as any surprise that reports are suggesting Amazon will opt for the UK as its next stage for TV deployment. Amazon has seen its other hardware offerings rollout successfully in the UK; the number of Echo devices, Fire Tablets and Fire TV media streamers in use approached 8 million by the end of 2017 and it has over 7 million Prime members. But Amazon will need to build more TV manufacturer partnerships to be successful, one brand is unlikely to suffice, or does it launch its own branded set? Something Apple has been rumoured to be developing for the past 5 years (but has more recently gone quiet on). Reviewing Amazon’s strategy from a geographical standpoint and retention position, releasing a Fire OS TV internationally would certainly fit in with entire home / lifestyle control, but it may take time for it to reach the same levels it has with its other devices.

Plantronics Acquires Polycom Read more
Professional AV

    Plantronic’s acquisition of Polycom late last week caused a significant stir in the Unified Communications and Collaboration (UC & C) industry, giving Polycom a much-needed boost amidst an increasingly crowded competitive landscape. In a deal purportedly valued at $2 billion in a cash and stock transaction, the announcement creates a communication and collaboration powerhouse with deep ramifications across the industry.

    Polycom is a leading vendor in the collaboration and communications space, commanding a strong position in the voice and video collaboration market. It is a leading supplier of video conferencing solutions but has faced growing competition in the past three years as the market has evolved. This evolution has largely come in the form of a move from dedicated systems towards web-based and personalised conferencing systems (such as those offered by Cisco, Microsoft, Starleaf, Zoom, etc), with Polycom facing growing competition for control of this market. The purchase by Plantronics presents an opportunity to face growing challenges with renewed financial (and technological) capital.
    While the move is overwhelmingly positive for Polycom, it presents an even greater opportunity for Plantronics.

    Plantronics is a global provider of audio solutions, with its headset business spanning business and consumer markets. It has an established and enviable B2B portfolio, offering a wide range of audio solutions for businesses with high penetration of its headsets across many Fortune 1000 companies.

    The acquisition of Polycom provides significant opportunities for the company, with its vision to deliver a comprehensive range of communication and collaboration solutions clearly central to this. In addition, the move offers a broadening of its portfolio to incorporate Polycom’s position in voice and video collaboration, an expansion of market opportunities with the potential to sell Polycom hardware to a wide range of established Plantronic’s customers, and an enhancing of its services and analytics business, an area Polycom has invested heavily in to build further.

    It remains to be seen whether this is part of a larger acquisition strategy that will take Plantronics further into the UC&C space, but the industry will certainly be keeping a close eye on these developments.

CanalPlay Closure Further Highlights Importance of Continued Original Content Investment for SVoD Success Read more
Media & Entertainment

    The announcement that CanalPlay is to close in France is another reminder of the growing requirement for major content investment to compete in the increasingly dynamic subscription video sector, particularly amongst local services. CanalPlay will join the list of high profile closures worldwide over the last couple of years, all with significant parent companies; that includes Shomi (Canada), Watchever (Germany) and KPN Play (Netherlands). Futuresource estimates that CanalPlay had approximately 600k subscribers at the end of 2017, but has struggled to maintain pace in 2018 as Netflix momentum continues to build. Netflix doubled its subscriber base in France in 2017 hitting 2.5 million, with more subscriber growth expected for 2018.

    In what was effectively a eulogy, Maxime Saada, chairman of the Canal+ board declared that “we had a French Netflix, it was killed”. But arguably, therein lies the problem, success in the SVoD sector in any country will be driven by differentiation - not trying to be the “French Netflix”. Offering content that is unique, high quality and ideally, exclusive or original. Such a strategy does not come cheap though, something that Canal+/Vivendi was seemingly not willing, or able to fund, particularly when its addressable market is more localised than the likes of Netflix or Amazon Prime Video.

    Let’s take the UK and USA, where you have a “Big 3” in the SVoD sector, Netflix, Amazon Prime Video and Hulu (USA)/Now TV (UK). In Futuresource’s opinion, in these instances the three are much more complementary than competitive, with little overlap in content across services and combined they provide a very compelling proposition, representing good value for money (typically around $30 per month for the three). Overlap of users across the services is strong. In the UK, half of Now TV subscribers also use both Netflix and Amazon Prime, in the USA, two-thirds of Hulu subscribers do the same, according to Futuresource’s Living with Digital consumer survey. 60% of CanalPlay subscribers also had Netflix.

    Original and premium/exclusive content is the key driver of viewing on these services, but clearly this requires a huge investment, This has not deterred other local French service providers and content holders from investing in the sector, but notably they have repositioned to take a slightly different route – pooling resources with similar companies to provide a much broader, compelling service. One such initiative from French commercial broadcasters TF1 and M6 Group plus public broadcaster France Televisions, seems them collectively launching a new national TV platform “Salto”, integrating free catch-up services and new SVoD options. In addition, Orange and Altice/SFR are expected to merge their premium TV and movie subscription services to improve their content offering and ultimately increase its appeal, in addition to providing an alternative to Netflix.

    Futuresource’s Video Insights: France Market Report, published today, highlights that, despite the demise of CanalPlay, the French SVoD sector continues to go from strength to strength, driven by the increasing popularity of Netflix. Amazon Prime Video has also quietly gained momentum in France – whilst Amazon doesn’t have the brand kudos or strength of customer base as it does in the UK and Germany, Futuresource estimates that there were around one million Prime Video households at the end of 2017.

    The SVoD sector in France is expected to continue its impressive momentum, fuelled by new service launches and progression of existing services, almost doubling in value between 2017 and 2019 to over €700 million. These new services will see total individual SVOD subscriptions reach almost 9 million in 2018; but with a rising number of these subscribers taking more than one service, the number of households with at least one subscription will be closer to 6 million households, equivalent to one in five French households. 

    The news of CanalPlay’s departure was perhaps widely antipcated, but it will not detract from what is becoming an increasingly dynamic and fast moving segment of the French video and TV industry.

Medical-Grade Technology Brings Renewed Excitement to the Wearables Market Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Medical-grade wearables represent an exciting and dynamic new area for wearable technology. The increasing global prevalence of chronic conditions, such as heart disease and diabetes, are expected to cost the global economy $47 trillion annually by 2030. With the total consumer wearables market estimated to be worth $20 billion by the end of 2018, there is significant opportunity for growth in clinically validated, yet user-friendly wearables to aid individuals manage such ailments or pre-emptively monitor their general health.

    Innovation in digital health technology has stimulated exciting new developments and new product releases in medical wearable hardware in recent years, with integrated biometric sensor technology capable of computing a variety of health diagnostics. Such advancements have also opened up the opportunity for such sensors to be integrated into more mass market, non-dedicated consumer products.

    Consumer brands such as Fitbit, Garmin, Apple and Samsung continue to invest in the medical wearables space, each pursuing partnerships with medical technology companies and/or within clinical research. In software, WatchOS and Android Wear have both pivoted towards health platforms. Fitbit continues to pursue its repositioning strategy towards medical wearables and healthcare tracking against a backdrop of experiencing six quarters of sales decline since Q4 2016. Fitbit’s expansion into healthcare may be indicative of attempts to offset this decline in sales, whilst building revenue within healthcare related industries such as corporate wellness.

    Conditions such as high blood pressure and respiratory disease, each claiming over a billion sufferers worldwide, represent a huge opportunity for wider consumer electronics hardware to identify and potentially manage. Wrist-worn wearables can now identify conditions such as arrythmia, epilepsy and diabetes, in addition to respiratory disorders such as sleep apnoea. Diabetes, with just under half a billion patients, is also receiving attention from wearable tech developers, with the potential for non-invasive, wrist-worn glucose monitoring, a world first. The race is on for electronics brands to bring these medical products to market, firstly by gaining approval from governmental regulatory bodies, followed by attaining trust from consumers.

    In the fitness space, infrared technology is being utilised to detect hydration levels and oxygen levels present when worn around the muscles. Pulse oximetry or the level of oxygen present in the blood and VO2 Max are also quickly becoming features within next-generation fitness wearables. We are seeing the likes of Apple take sight of markets dominated by sports focused vendors with fitness expertise. The combination of advancements in hardware sensors, in addition to the ability to process large sets of fitness metrics from the wrist, drives innovation in this sector. Whilst the existing CE giants are evolving their offerings, start-ups are developing new means of tracking our fitness metrics, which could provide significant benefits for both professional and amateur sports training.

    Medical advancements, coupled with the increased wrist-worn processing power, the advent of LTE connected wearables and new cloud-based health-care focused platforms are expected to combine to revolutionise healthcare and fitness tracking. Cloud-based healthcare API’s, such as Twine Health and Google Health, will be critical to improving the broader digital health ecosystem through improving the exchange of health information between wearable software and hardware. Such platforms also have the potential to increase interoperability between healthcare providers and patient, allowing for improved and tailored patient outcomes.

    One of the largest hurdles for vendors wishing to bring medical consumer devices to market has been the tackling of stringent government regulation. The Food and Drug Association (FDA) aims to reduce this hurdle and stimulate digital health innovation, particularly within the medical wearables space, through the introduction of its new pre-certification procedure aimed at health and medical-grade wearable technology companies. The pre-certification pilot programme, which is expected to roll out in the USA in December 2018, could reduce the time it takes for a company to attain pre-market submission approval by up to 60%.

    The future for medical wearables remains complex and uncertain. However,  significant interest will remain, with the healthcare industry inching towards implementing medical-grade wearable technology and mass market consume vendors continuing to invest in its research and development. The possibility of combining improved biometric sensor technology, the integration of AI into wearable software, API development and LTE connection into medical wearable technology offers high potential to change how consumers think about personal health and fitness, in addition to offering a potentially highly lucrative new market for CE vendors to explore.

Echo Sales Overtake Fire Tablets - But International Uptake Remains Dwarfed by the USA Read more
Consumer Electronics

    The rise of Amazon’s Echo speaker has been well documented in recent years, culminating Echo selling more units worldwide in 2017 than Amazon Fire tablets – just.  With almost 20 million units sold worldwide during 2017, Echo’s installed base stood at 28 million by the end of the year, marginally ahead of Fire tablets at 27 million, with Fire TV also close behind, at 26 million.

    The closeness of these installed bases highlights that, despite the hype surrounding Echo, Amazon isn’t focusing all its device efforts on its smart speakers. The Alexa voice assistant is now also standard on its Fire TVs and tablets and last week’s announcement of the Fire TV Cube is the latest development in the Seattle-based firm’s multi-device strategy to position itself as the key “Go-to” facilitator in the smart home. Futuresource’s Smart Speaker tracker also highlights that, whilst Amazon is the category leader globally, Echo sales are still heavily skewed towards the USA – with only 13% of its 2017 sales derived from elsewhere. As a result, Fire tablets outsold Echo speakers internationally in 2017 by a ratio of over 4 to 1. Despite its strong position therefore in the USA (with UK a distant second), Amazon has much work to do in order to become the same driving force internationally.

    Its device push is partly facilitated by the strength of Amazon Prime (over 40% of its global Prime Members are outside of the USA). We at Futuresource have been providing clients with insights into the growing influence of Amazon in the entertainment space in recent years and charting progress of its bid to become central to the living room entertainment experience in particular – through both its own-branded services and through controlling third party apps. Its boldness and risk-taking in both consumer technology and the media space is further emphasised by its recent Premier League rights deal in the UK, where there are now over 7 million Prime members. This was an expected step, but unusual for Amazon given it is a UK-only deal.

    Its wider in-home strategy continues to be more developed in the USA, recently focusing on home security through its dedicated “home services” division. This drive to create an installed base of voice activated devices around the home will not only fuel e-commerce sales and Amazon Prime subscriptions but also serve to build up use of third party smart home applications and potentially position Alexa at the core of the home entertainment hub. Amazon Alexa is now able to facilitate the control of more than 4,000 smart home devices from 1,200 unique brands.

    Amazon’s in-home influence goes well beyond the living room. The most popular location for the Echo is the kitchen, where it offers cooking assistance such as recipes and timers. Amazon’s Smart Home Skill API enables manufacturers such as Whirlpool, GE Appliances, LG, and Samsung to integrate Alexa’s capabilities into their smart kitchen appliances. Amazon is directly investing in this area with its venture capital arm, Alexa Fund, providing financing to smart oven manufacturer June Life.

    Amazon’s pace of innovation continues to impress, but it will continue to encounter challenges. According to the 2018 edition of Futuresource Consulting’s “Smart Home Devices & Appliances” consumer survey, 38% of non-adopters of smart speakers “can’t see a use for smart home devices”, with a third citing privacy concerns. While Amazon has stolen a march on the competition it needs to continue to build use cases and - perhaps more importantly - address consumers’ fear of having a device in their homes which eavesdrop upon their conversations. Apple’s focus on tackling similar issues at the WWDC event last week was telling (see separate blog). Amazon may well need to prioritise such consumer concerns if it is to ultimately achieve success in the smart home in the wider international markets.

Apple WWDC 2018: Apple Showcases its Commitment to the Wearables Market Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Apple’s recent Worldwide Developers Conference (WWDC) highlighted their software plans for the next 12 months across several product categories. While we will have to wait until September to get our hands on new Apple hardware, WatchOS 5 certainly highlights Apple’s commitment to smartwatches, especially in contrast to some others in the industry that have lost focus. Even though innovation in wearables has slowed in recent years, the industry stops and listens when key innovators, such as Apple, showcase their next-gen software or hardware.

    Apple remains the comfortable leader in the wearables category, finishing 2017 with 53% of overall revenues, thanks to a 62% unit share in smartwatches. Apple’s success is especially impressive as their market comes down to a single product SKU, which is the best-selling single product against all other smart, hybrid or mechanical timepieces, despite competition of hundreds of smartwatch designs and thousands of timepiece designs. 2018 has shown that competition in the wearables market is again becoming fierce, with fitness device giant Fitbit and wristwatch giant Fossil both posting increasing return on investment for their smart and wireless watch offerings.

    Apple showcased new workout modes including Yoga and Hiking tracking functionalities at WWDC, highlighting the growing importance of software and sports research in smartwatches today. While workout types and tracking modes are not in any sense new, the increased functionality and inclusion of a wider array of sports signals Apple’s intentions clear; it has its eyes set on the sports watch market. With the inclusion of heart rate monitoring software and GPS tracking, smartwatches can only build on what sports watches offer the consumer. With greater processing capability and internet access, real time, personalised and actionable insights are now possible. We expect this to be the next step in wearable sporting technology.

    The second announcement that caught our eye, which focuses on the communications capability of smartwatches, is the Apple Watch’s walkie talkie functionality. While voice notes have been available for some time via messaging apps, some of the user friction will be reduced through UI optimisation. This may seem like a trivial feature, but voice messaging has been a trend in China for some time. The ability to quickly and easily send voice notes between Apple watch users will no doubt be a function developed with the Chinese consumer in mind. Apple has made significant inroads into the Chinese market during 2017, with the iPhone X becoming one of the top selling models since its launch and the Apple Watch increasing shipments into China by 81% year-on-year in Q4 and 39% in Q1. Apple’s Momentum looks set to continue, with further solidification of its position in China during the rest of the year expected. Overall, as more intelligent, and to some degree localised, communications features make their way into smartwatches, the utility of smartwatches as a communications product is expected to become more apparent to consumers.

    In line with their focus on education, Apple did not shy away from the possibility of integrating their technology further into schools and universities. Several American Universities have piloted e-student identification cards loaded onto the Apple Watch, utilising NFC functionality. While by no means do we expect all schools and universities to pick up NFC and Apple Watch compatible security systems, this demonstrates a vision of the future for personal devices and identification. Although NFC authentication technology in consumer devices is not restricted to Apple products, Apple has been a catalyst of its wider use, particularly through Apple Pay. Alongside advances in biometric security, from fingerprint sensors to FaceID, NFC certainly looks set to build the next generation of personal security systems.

    Overall, the developments showcased at WWDC were not ground breaking. Nevertheless, they do have the potential to boost the Apple Watch’s appeal further. The wearables market overall has seen turbulent development, and therefore successful vendors have been somewhat cautious with new product launches. However, Apple has a proven and significant position in the smartwatch market. While the wearables announcements at WWDC 18 were incremental improvements, these will only drive further sales.

Highlights from the Apple WWDC 2018 Read more
Consumer Electronics

    This week, Futuresource attended Apple’s Worldwide Developer Conference keynote in San Jose, with a 5,000 strong group of developers and representatives of the world’s media. The event opened with a Sir David Attenborough style nature programme spoof, providing a humorous insight into the world of developers, featuring many of the attendees at the event.

    Aside from the new and innovative AR applications which included the compelling Lego demo and introduction of Memojis - cute ways to personalise your messages with images of yourself, the next step up on from the popular Animojis -  the major underlying themes in our view were addressing the growing key consumer concerns over digital health and data privacy. Although no single announcement stood out; collectively they culminated to address the many touch-points and concerns of tech-overload impacting the digital consumer.

    One announcement that struck a chord with Futuresource was the screen time activity reporting feature that monitors how much time you are using apps, including allowing parents to monitor kid’s activities and control how much time is spent on screen and on which applications. Our Kids Tech consumer survey and educational research clearly shows parents and teachers alike are concerned over tech addiction among kids and we are sure parents will welcome this feature. This coupled with new settings in the Safari browser that allows users to limit Facebook (and others) from following your journey on the web will be welcomed by many users.

    On a personal level, the enhanced ‘Do Not Disturb’ feature that enables dimming the display at night and hiding all notifications will improve my digital health at home and on the road – thanks Apple!

    The much-maligned Siri voice control became smarter with the introduction of Siri shortcuts, akin to Alexa Skills integrates with apps to build bespoke voice commands, great concept– let’s see how it works in practice.

    Apple WatchOS 5 will bring some new features such as competitions, a way to compete on fitness activities with friends, all based on points achieved by closing the activity rings and other new workout features, such as Auto workout detection, which is not unique to Apple.

    More interesting was the announcement that podcasts are coming to the watch, and support for third party content, providing shortcuts to functions along with better interactive controls available from within them.

    Student ID cards will be available on the watch too, with support from a selection of US Universities. More about the implications of these announcements in a forthcoming separate blog.

    Perhaps one of the notable announcements was Group FaceTime, allowing up to 32 participants to connect, a significant development for consumers and businesses alike. This and the fact that the CarPlay app has improved third party map support from the likes of Google Maps and Waze will be among the most popular announcements to Apple users in our view.

    As a company that also tracks the entertainment space, we watched with interest the announcement that Apple TV will incorporate Dolby Atmos/Dolby vision and offer zero sign-on. However, strategically the announcement that Charter Spectrum will be partnering with Apple TV later this year, hot on the heels of the recent Canal Plus announcement, is perhaps the more pertinent news in this space. This news is covered in a separate blog by our entertainment analysts, as the race to become the entertainment hub in the home continues.

    Overall an intriguing event, Apple announced significant user enhancements and benefits at its WWDC 2018 and continued to promote diversity – a record number of female speakers took to the stage and it was proud to support pride month.

Apple WWDC 2018: Apple TV - Small Steps to a Bigger Living Room Play? Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Heading into Apple’s WWDC 2018 event, there continued to be widespread speculation surrounding Apple’s TV and video strategy, largely because unlike Netflix, Amazon and Google – it does not yet have a video subscription streaming service.  However, announcements at the gathering were not heavily video or entertainment focussed, further dampening this speculation. But the arrival of Dolby Atmos on Apple TV, “zero sign-on”, a deal with Charter Spectrum, a new TV OS and, perhaps more tangentially, Siri support for third-party apps, all point towards an evolutionary product, rather than a revolutionary one, which we have become accustomed to from Apple over the years.

    Despite being pioneering in widening the reach of digital media streamers, Google Chromecast is the number one device in this sector worldwide in terms of installed base (~30m in use at end 2017), but Amazon Fire TV is the key growth device (>26m at end ‘17). This rapidly growing Fire TV base is largely due to persistent customer marketing and attractive, often discounted price points – plus the obvious link with Amazon Prime. Futuresource estimates that there were approximately 21 million Apple TVs in use worldwide at the end of 2017 (similar to Roku) with approaching half of these in the USA.

    But Apple TV continues to add features, build partnerships and is clearly striving to offer the best quality digital streamer experience there is – albeit at a higher price than its competitors. Service partnerships will therefore be key to driving the attractiveness of the product and a channels approach, akin or better than Amazon Channels & Roku’s equivalent, will also be hugely important if Apple still wants to become the main entertainment hub in the home – something which Amazon arguably has gained a lead in.

    The Charter Spectrum partnership, hot on the heels of its Canal Plus joint venture, is likely to be followed by other similar deals over the coming year. A subsidised Apple TV play, with leading Pay-TV providers worldwide would undoubtedly boost its international installed base; but such an initiative is more likely to attract (and perhaps more likely, retain) existing Pay-TV subscribers than converting free-to-air homes. However, motivating these customers to switch to an alternative Pay-TV service centred around the Apple TV box may require further incentives given that only 13% of US and 11% of French Pay-TV customers are likely to cancel their current service in 2018, according to Futuresource’s Living With Digital consumer survey.

    Migrating existing STB customers to the Apple TV solution is not likely to appeal to all Pay-TV providers. Best in class operators such as Sky and Comcast Xfinity continue to push hard on their own leading-edge boxes (Sky Q & X1 respectively), providing further lock-in for customers and ultimately increasing ARPU. Sky’s breakthrough announcement that Sky Q customers will be able to access Netflix via the box with single billing, essentially means that rather than treat them as a direct competitor, it can now at least keep them close and monitor viewing behaviour.

    Gradually, the sum of Apple’s TV and video offerings may start to see it become recognised as a viable contender in the battle for the living room, but the likes of Amazon and the larger Pay-TV conglomerates will also continue to innovate, meaning Apple may need to accelerate its evolution in this space if it is to become a serious challenger.

GDPR and the Impact on Local Data Storage Read more
Storage Media

    General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), which the EU adopted on 14 April 2016, comes into force today (25th May 2018). GDPR is the new regulatory law on data protection and privacy for all individuals within the European Union, replacing the 20+ year-old Data Protection Directive from 1995. It will also impact businesses outside of Europe that control or process personal data from individuals within the EU. How businesses control and process data will undergo significant change, due to the stricter data protection standards and fines associated with the new law.

    Many actions are being taken by businesses to comply with GDPR, with several likely to influence usage and demand for data storage, as regulation to what and how information is stored comes into effect. 

    “Data protection by design and by default” is one of the obligations introduced by GDPR. It states that data protection should be considered from the start and throughout the design process of a system. However, many businesses are running legacy IT systems which are not “data protection by design and by default”, such systems are often grown organically with many patches to address additional needs and issues arising over time. Such systems typically carry lower data security measures and can be a huge challenge for SMEs to redesign from a time, cost and resource perspective. With the introduction of GDPR there is a notable rise in SMEs transitioning to cloud-hosted service providers, which have the benefit of rapidly aligning business systems to accommodate the new regulation. Consequently, the requirement for local storage in both employee laptops and local servers reduces dramatically. 

    Additionally, personal data breach from loss or theft of an employee’s laptop can result in serious fines, with businesses now recommended to not store any personal data locally on an employee’s device. The convenience and benefit of local data storage however is still clear, carrying significant value for businesses. Encryption therefore will be essential for compliance, allowing protection from unauthorised access but continued usage of local storage capacity. The standard software encryption (e.g. bitlocker) slows down the read and write speed of a drive, this effect is less noticeable for solid state drives (SSD) than hard disc drives (HDD) - especially for IOPS intensive applications. This slower performance of encrypted HDD is expected to see businesses that are still using HDD based PCs to switch to SSD devices and SSD contained devices, resulting in an upturn in demand in the channel as well as from PC OEMs.

    Portable drives such as USBs have been hugely popular due to their small profile and relatively large capacity, but these points are also a security risk, with such devices easily misplaced or stolen. There have been several high-profile cases where personal information was breached due to employees losing USBs. Two compliance recommendations are to restrict use of portable drives like USBs and/or add encryption to the device. More extreme action has already been taken by IBM, where employees have been prohibited from using USB sticks in the interest of data protection. Although it is unclear if other companies will follow IBM’s lead, the use of portable drives, especially USBs in the business environment, will certainly decrease under GDPR.

    Self-encrypting drives using hardware-based encryption, on which every file is automatically encrypted, will see a lift in popularity because of GDPR. These devices also tend to have better performance than software-based encryption devices and are generally easier to operate, with encryption being transparent to the user. In addition, they require minimal set-up and deploy time which makes it ideal for both B2B and B2C use.

    Overall, demand for local B2B storage products will inevitably reduce as storage continues to move to cloud based storage solutions, ultimately data-centres. There will however be the continued requirement for storage products given the obvious benefits related to them, notably benefitting the SSD and self-encrypted market segments.

    Looking at the wider landscape for storage, the expected reduction in local storage product demand will inevitably translate into higher demand for data centres. As the industry mantra goes…the only certainties in life are Death, Taxes and Data Storage Growth.

The 5 Pro Video Acquisition Trends that Defined NAB 2018 Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    April marked the annual return of the National Association of Broadcasters’ Show to Las Vegas, Nevada. The show is an opportunity to see the latest innovations in broadcasting technology and learn from thought-leaders and content creators on how they will use the developments to move the industry forward.  Looking back at the show, we’ve picked out five central trends in the advancement of professional image acquisition that characterised NAB 2018.

    Full Frame Cinema Camera Competition Increases

    The realm of high-end cinematography could be undergoing its most significant shift in years, as digital motion picture cameras move towards larger image sensors. Digital S35, the longstanding industry standard sensor size, equivalent to Super 35mm film, has been challenged by the latest flagship products all boasting larger format sensors with coverage of ‘full frame’ image circles. Since last year, the market has been hit with a flurry of camera announcements as each manufacturer brought their offering to the table. For many, NAB was the first opportunity to get hands-on with the latest and greatest in the field of acquisition, as the Sony Venice, Red Monstro, Arri Alexa LF, and Canon C700 FF were all on display.

    Low-cost Multicamera Live Setups are on the Rise

    The increasing demand for online video content means that many companies outside of the traditional broadcast market are investing in producing video content for the web. A diverse range of all-in-one solutions, entry level switchers, affordably priced camcorders and PTZ cameras are enabling more companies to bring such video production in-house. YouTube, Facebook, and Instagram have all upped their live video hosting capabilities over the past year, and live formats have quickly proven to be a popular tool to drive online engagement on social platforms. NAB saw several manufacturers demonstrating products that would appeal to organisations from a non-broadcasting background. This is not a new trend, but what we are witnessing now is that many of these organisations are looking to up their production value beyond a static single camera point and shoot setup and take on more ambitious multicamera productions in an intuitive and accessible way.

    8K Broadcasting and Workflows have Arrived

    The pursuit of ever higher resolution is often a divisive topic. However, the demonstrations on offer at NAB this year certainly made a compelling case that bigger is in fact better. Sharp have fully committed to the 8K ecosystem and were demonstrating a full pipeline at the show from acquisition on their new 8K camcorder through to richly detailed video broadcast on their displays. The longstanding force driving the development of 8K has been the Japanese broadcaster NHK, in anticipation of the Tokyo 2020 Olympics. However, Sharp were also able to showcase key applications for the technology beyond broadcast, including digital archiving and display of fine art as well as enhancing the accuracy of medical imaging and remote surgery.

    One of the main arguments against 8K is that unless viewed on an extremely large screen, it offers very little visible improvement on 4K. Nevertheless, Astro Design were able to showcase how increased resolution can benefit your viewing experience on smaller screens too. Astro have created a way to use this extra resolution to enable viewers to interact and personalise their viewing experience in real time. Touch screen devices have made us accustomed to using the ‘pinch to zoom’ gesture to focus in on detail in an image and 8K provides enough resolution to allow us up to a 16x digital zoom on an FHD (1080p) display. This is especially appealing for sports fans, allowing them to zoom, follow, and track their favourite players throughout a game.

    HDR Production is Gaining Momentum

    High dynamic range was a popular topic at NAB 2018. The opportunity to capture imagery that is closer to that seen by the human eye and take advantage of a wider colour palette is an exciting prospect and throughout the show there were many stunning examples of HDR in action. Most vendors featured a host of readily available products that will support HDR workflows, with the emphasis shifting from what HDR can do to providing education about how to practically implement the technology. This was a prevalent theme, as many manufacturers used NAB as an opportunity to demonstrate the products and workflows that will make HDR accessible to all types of content producers.

    Convergence in Professional and Consumer Imaging Continues

    The use of consumer imaging devices for professional acquisition is certainly not a new story, but a decade on from the landmark release of the Canon 5D Mark II, consumer products continue to compete with and influence their professional counterparts. This cannot be more plainly seen than with the reveal of the Blackmagic Pocket Cinema Camera 4K. This is a professional camcorder but unmistakably designed with the ergonomics and form factor of a DSLR/mirrorless camera in mind. Furthermore, it boasts an impressive feature set with a price tag that will compete directly with consumer rivals such as the Panasonic GH5. Despite early signs that convergence in professional and consumer equipment would be a short-lived trend, the fast-paced advancement of video functionality in mirrorless cameras, coupled with the abundance of exhibitors showcasing peripheral equipment to rig up your DSLR or mirrorless camera of choice for professional use, demonstrates that convergence continues to be as prevalent as ever.

China: A Hotbed of Smart Speaker Activity Read more
Consumer Electronics

    A trip to China last week, which involved numerous meetings with audio ODMs, brands and technology partners, culminated in Futuresource making a presentation at the Alexa summit in Shenzhen on the outlook for smart speakers and voice assistants. China is an appropriate location for such events because the smart speaker market there has ballooned in the past six months. It is clear that Chinese AI platforms have been striving to replicate Amazon Alexa’s success (in the US) in their domestic market. Smart speakers made their debut in China in 2016 and recent acceleration of activity has led Futuresource to raise its forecast to 10 million units for 2018, equivalent to 20% of worldwide demand. 

    Who has been driving this growth and why are these devices so popular? Online retail giant, in partnership with voice platform iFlyTek, was first to market with DingDong in 2016, but awareness and uptake remained relatively low in the first year. However, the debut of e-commerce giant Alibaba’s Tmall Genie product, competitively priced at RMB 499 ($75), has taken the market to a new level. The product was heavily discounted during Single’s Day promotions and Futuresource’s quarterly analysis shows it clocked up sales of c.1 million units in its first quarter of launch. Similar to Amazon, Alibaba can sell its speaker direct to consumers, backed by AliPay and the Taobao ecosystem.

    In addition, Xiaomi in Q4 2017 launched a speaker priced at RMB199 ($30), much cheaper than its competitors. The hardware and services company, which also offers PCs, Laptops and Smartphones, is rolling out a smart home and entertainment control ecosystem that will benefit greatly from a widespread adoption of the speaker.

    The buzz around smart speakers continued in Q1 2018, when the category sold over 1.5 million units. CE retail chain Suning and a range of smaller Chinese brands and third-party players weighed in with devices. Baidu, the biggest search engine in China has also been closely watching this space. It introduced a smart speaker with a screen (called Little Fish) at CES earlier this year, priced at RMB 599 ($95). Baidu has also partnered with other speaker vendors, similar to LingLong’s strategy, to expand its ecosystem in consumer homes.

    Whilst the music listening population is huge in China, most consumers stream for free and listen on the go (using headphones). The concept of sharing music and in-home listening has not traditionally been popular, which has translated into low penetration of home audio devices historically. With smart speakers, initial feedback suggests that growth is driven by high levels of curiosity and non-audio features at least as much as audio/music, in contrast to the US and Europe. Whilst demand for smart speakers in China is clearly triggered by a wide range of functionality, their rapid adoption might also positively impact in-home music listening.

    Chinese brands are keen to explore the potential of the domestic market where they have expertise, ecosystems and local language skills. Whilst we were in China, it was evident even on the streets that pedestrians and drivers were giving voice commands to their devices, often for navigation services. Some said they used the Baidu platform, whilst others mentioned a variety of other local services. The growing use of voice-based services puts Chinese AI platforms at a significant advantage in terms of sheer volume of users; close to a billion across mobiles and other hardware. This scale of use will ensure the platforms quickly become far more sophisticated and extend beyond smart speakers to penetrate the home, car, mobile and B2B ecosystem.

    Voice integration beyond speakers has been slow as there are challenges with adding mic arrays in a TV set or voice pick-up when the home theatre system is on full sound. Practical issues around installing these systems, who trains the consumers to use them, costs associated with installations and maintenance are also key factors that have hindered rapid integration in other hardware. Technology companies are reviewing solutions to overcome these issues but as with any new tech, these are teething issues for which solutions are being sought out and tested.

NetDragon, Edmodo and the Impact of This Week's Acquisition Read more
Education Technology

    This week, Chinese online games company, NetDragon Websoft, announced its agreement to acquire US-based Edmodo, the global education network. The deal will likely present growth opportunities for NetDragon’s broader portfolio of education solutions and could have competitive ramifications for companies operating across the breadth of the education technology sector.

    NetDragon’s New Triple Threat

    In a deal worth $137.5 million USD, Edmodo joins Promethean and Jumpstart in NetDragon’s stable of ed tech companies, completing the triple threat of hardware, content and community platform.

    With Promethean, bought in 2015, NetDragon acquired an install base of more than one million classrooms across the globe which use Promethean interactive displays. Jumpstart, acquired in July 2017, provides NetDragon with a portfolio of educational games, workbooks, videos and apps. Now, Edmodo’s education network, with more than 90 million users across 194 countries, is paving the way for a consolidated offering that reflects what’s been happening in the entertainment space.

    Lessons From Beyond the School Gates

    For the entertainment technology and ecommerce giants it all begins with the eyeballs. If you don’t have people engaging with your products and services, then they’ll be looking at somebody else’s instead. Get the eyeballs away from your competitors. Worry about the monetisation at a later date. Many of the major players in entertainment technology are now offering free tools and content to build out their user bases, converting them to paying customers further down the line; preferably via regular subscription payments.

    The freemium business model is a little trickier to implement in the education market where the ability to generate income via advertising is largely prohibited. As such, Edmodo has struggled to generate sustainable revenue streams and a definitive strategy to monetise its 90 million users remains unclear.  This week’s acquisition will offer NetDragon opportunities to do this by upselling a broader portfolio of solutions across the Edmodo user base.

    Social Networks, Privacy and Profit

    In the world of social networks, where Facebook can generate billions through ads, the nature of Edmodo’s user base (around 90% are students in K-12 education), as well as its sector and its position as a secure platform in which users can connect and share resources, makes advertising a difficult proposition.

    An alternative is to take the upsell route, which Edmodo has pushed with a basic free version that teaching staff can improve upon by paying for additional functionality. Then there are app stores and a marketplace. All of these strategies have failed to generate significant sustainable revenues for Edmodo.

    All those millions of subscribers could represent a potential data goldmine, but it’s a locked gate. Edmodo is a signatory to the Student Privacy Pledge, a legally enforceable statement by ed tech companies to safeguard student privacy. In a world where the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is about to come into force in the EU and the Facebook boss is being questioned by US senators on the exploitation of users’ personal data, leveraging student data is a risky business.

    Putting It Together

    However, introducing Edmodo into NetDragon’s brace of ed tech companies creates a synergetic whole. The broader portfolio of interactive displays, gaming content and a social media platform starts to present opportunities for revenue. For example, the student management features of Edmodo could be used to complement the collaboration functionality of Promethean’s interactive displays. It could also be linked to Jumpstart’s games, which focus on teaching specific skills that are integral to the curriculum. Think Facebook and its foray into gaming content and micropayments, with revenue streams from publishers and associated tie-ins. The ability to link an in-class solution to a social network used at home will provide NetDragon access to the consumer market which Futuresource research shows has increasing demand for education focused entertainment content for children.

    Futuresource Research

    NetDragon’s recent string of acquisitions provides the company with access to three key areas of the Edtech market. Here at Futuresource, our research shows that sales of interactive displays into the education market reached over 1.5 million units last year. Promethean is a key provider in the category, with a foothold in North American and Western European markets that are crucial to the acceleration of ed tech adoption. According to the company, more than 50,000 schools in 154 countries are using its products.

    The rising adoption of computing devices in the classroom is creating increased demand for digital content and educational games from providers like JumpStart. Futuresource’s mobile PC report shows that the adoption of mobile PC devices in K-12 education is on a growth curve. In 2017, worldwide, over 29 million devices were sold into K-12 schools, with volumes largely driven by sales in North America, Western Europe and Australasia, where Promethean operates a strong display business.

    Acquisition of the Edmodo platform gives NetDragon a large freemium user base to market its paid for solutions to. Conversely, the integration of premium content and features from its portfolio into the Edmodo platform could provide incentives for schools and districts to implement an enterprise version of the platform for institution wide use. These opportunities are set against a backdrop of significant upheaval in the school management platforms sector. This highly fragmented market is being transformed by a growing number of freemium platforms, Edmodo, among them. Despite this, the $ value of the market will continue to rise with premium features like security, data management and platform interoperability creating opportunities for premium feature upsell. Futuresource projects revenues of $1.7 billion in the US K-12 platforms and tools market this year, with revenues expected to increase annually through to 2021.

    NetDragon’s Mixed Financial Performance

    The seismic shift won’t happen overnight. For NetDragon to align its brands and define a sustainable strategy it’s going to take both time and resource, but it does have the financial reserves to play the long game. In 2017, according to its financial reporting, education earned the company revenues of ¥2.1 billion Chinese Yuan ($333 million USD), equating to over half of its total revenues, the remainder coming from games.

    Yet, it’s only when we drill into the profits of each division that we get the full picture. The games division contributed a profit of ¥675 million Chinese Yuan ($107 million USD), whereas the education division suffered a loss of ¥423 million Chinese Yuan ($67 million USD). The figures show that it’s completely plausible that NetDragon will use revenue from games to support education until it can be self-sustaining.

    Digital Natives, VR and the Classroom of Tomorrow

    So, what does the future hold for education and education technology? As the concepts of the flipped classroom and active learning find their feet, the way information is provided to students is changing. There’s more emphasis on how lesson content is communicated, how students interact with it, understand it and come up with their own solutions. K-12 students have grown up with the internet, they expect a multi-layered world where communication is instantaneous. They expect to be placed at the heart of information and entertainment; communicating instead of absorbing, interacting with data and shaping their surroundings.

    NetDragon has a handle on the new generation of digital natives, and just a matter of months ago opened a subsidiary that will explore the use of augmented reality and virtual reality in the education market. It’s been running VR trials in schools since 2016, but this new subsidiary, Elernity Thailand, focuses on integrating data analytics with VR and AR to create a fully-immersive educational experience.

    Meanwhile, Google has partnered with hundreds of content creators, developing over 600 free to access learning-focused virtual tours. Google resells all-in-one mobile VR hardware kits for classrooms through its channel partners and our Futuresource forecasts show that hundreds of thousands of these low-end VR devices will be in use in schools by 2021. Leading educational publisher Pearson is also currently developing over 200 VR experiences for incorporation into its robust range of higher education and K-12 courseware and has partnered with Microsoft to offer Mixed Reality solutions. Apple is also investing in the segment with AR experiences for education taking center stage at it’s March 2018 press conference.

    The Future Begins Here

    Due to the dynamic, collaborative environment that they’ve grown up in, today’s students are often uncomfortable with the more traditional methods of learning. To appeal to the children of today and tomorrow, forward-looking companies like NetDragon are bringing visual communications, dialogue and active learning into the classroom, transporting students to different places, times and planets, allowing them to squeeze the maximum amount of value out of learning experience. Watch out for virtual school trips, digital lab experiments, the exploration of anatomy to enrich the sciences and the transportation of students to restaurants and markets in foreign lands to provide more authentic language learning experiences.

    Although the future of immersive technologies in education is yet to be determined, the rapid investment from prominent players against the backdrop of a tech-savvy, digitally-advanced new generation is enough to create a lucrative spark.
    Whichever way it plays out, it’s still all about getting those eyeballs on your product, and this week’s acquisition of Edmodo has afforded NetDragon an enviable position within the future education landscape. There’s a good chance there may be upheaval ahead.

2018 UHD Content Rollout to Improve Once Technicalities are Resolved Read more
Media & Entertainment

    The UHD sector has continued its steady evolution over the last year; from a consumer perspective UHD is becoming commonplace with a variety of devices and distribution platforms now available. However, from an industry perspective there is still a significant amount of ongoing grappling with the technology, more specifically, justifying and providing the return on investment (across both hardware and content). The recent ratification of AV1 and the possible decision to break away from MPEG further highlights this.

    A New Kid on the Block

    Video compression has been dominated for decades by the Motion Pictures Experts Group (MPEG) in association with others, whilst in 2013, High Efficiency Video Codec (h.265 / HEVC) was published with an expectation of superseding MPEG4 with a 50% reduction on previous generation bandwidth requirements.

    However, associated high royalty payments for HEVC and the coinciding of the tech giants invading the video space have resulted in the forming of the Alliance for Open Media (AOM). The roster includes Netflix, Google, Amazon, Facebook, Cisco, Microsoft, Nvidia, AMD and Apple. Collectively they have created AV1, a low-cost competitor to HEVC. Despite the combined force of these companies, HEVC momentum is building. At the end of 2017, there was a global installed base of over 225 million HEVC consumer devices, 175 million of which are TV-sets which alone will rise to 280 million by the end of this year.

    So how and why will AV1 impact the sector? Is it deemed as an appropriate and sufficiently capable replacement for HEVC, or is it a strongarm tactic to force down to cost of existing patents?

    Adding it Up

    HEVC’s make-up from several patent pools, including those beyond MPEG, have resulted in a disparate and in some instances, non-established licencing and royalty positions. This boils down to a wide set of parties seeking payment for their IP; causing an expensive, and uncertain roadmap of future costs. When combining this with the current inconclusive business case for broadcast UHD, it has led to limited industry investment and consequently limited availability of content for consumers.

    The added competition of AV1 does appear to be having an impact, with the HEVC Advance patent pool dropping its royalty fee for non-physical streams, meaning Netflix, Amazon, Apple, Google and Co. can all stream 4K content without a per stream cost, making use of those 200 million+ devices with HEVC already inside. Furthermore, all cable, satellite, OTA broadcasters etc. all come under this too, that’s a lot of interested parties happy about this move. However, each of the 14.4 million UHD Blu-ray discs expected to be sold throughout 2018, are liable for royalty payments to other patent holders.

    Is the HEVC snowball too far down the hill?

    With HEVC already being adopted by the majority of the CE industry and close to de-facto feature of UHD TV-sets, displacement of the technology will be a significant challenge for any party – even with the power of the aforementioned FAANG & Co. behind it. And with an ever-rising installed base of hardware, royalties are sure to fall as patent pools can collect less from more. So, a more realistic scenario is one of cohabitation of HEVC and AV1 in devices, enabling operators to utilise whichever one is fit for purpose. Moreover, the threat of AV1 being used exclusively by the AOM giants is perhaps sufficient to encourage royalties to fall faster.

    But more significant than all of this is the rate of consumer uptake and service roll-out of the technology. Without widespread deployment and without industry agreement, as we have seen on countless occasions before, the bubble can unfortunately be quick to burst.

Smart Speakers Drive Music Consumption, Key Takeaways from Insightful BPI and ERA Event Read more
Media & Entertainment

    It could be argued that the proliferation of smart speakers in the last 2 years has heralded the biggest evolution of music consumption we have seen since the launch of the iPod, iPhone or even CD. The BPI and ERA held an event in London on Tuesday 20th March 2018, that tackled the smart speaker impact on music consumption. Futuresource was proud to be on the bill, alongside several esteemed industry leaders and experts.

    Consumer spend on music in the UK has grown by over 30% over the last 3 years after a torrid decade prior to this. This audio renaissance has been driven largely by 2 factors – the three-fold increase in streaming music subscription in this period (with total subscriptions exceeding 9 million in 2017) and more recently, the quadrupling in the installed base of wireless speakers, with 16 million units now in UK homes.

    Spending on dedicated audio hardware is back in vogue after playing second fiddle to tablets, smartphones and TVs for many years. But it is the smart speaker segment that is truly driving digital music consumption to another level entirely. Back in the home, after iPods and smartphones provided a 10 year+ resurgence in personal audio; this is continuing with the booming headphones market.

    It is the voice assistant feature of smart speakers that is providing most excitement. Amazon’s Echo speaker range has been embraced by many, providing seamless music listening and discovery, along with providing access to other Alexa skills. Paul Firth from Amazon spoke at the event of user testimonials claiming that they were in love with Alexa, they were part of the family or she was their best friend. It is these emotive feelings for the product that have made it very much a part of people’s lives.

    2017 proved be a breakthrough year for voice control in the home – as smart speakers became mass market, with a plethora of launches spilling over into 2018, with Apple’s belated HomePod launch. As such, UK smart speakers in use are set to double once more in 2018, to reach nearly 8 million units.

    Futuresouce’s consumer research suggests that, whilst music streaming and selection is unsurprisingly the most commonly used feature, 30% of smart speaker owners use it to discover new music and over three-quarters of these do so every day. However, this new way to discover music was tempered by the panellists at the event, highlighting that voice commands were causing headache for some labels, managers and artists. Many artists and their music titles are not being recognised through voice commands, or commands are too ambiguous. For example, which version of Beethoven’s fifth will Alexa choose to play with dozens of versions available? Some artists simply have too quirky names, or use slang terms which are just not recognised, leaving their music isolated outside of this exploding ecosystem; discovering music is clearly not the same as being discoverable. This is a problem which is requiring improved and potentially new strands of metadata to help resolve the issue.

    Scott Cohen from the Orchard also highlighted that this rate of streaming subscription growth will predictably slow, so what can the industry do now to prepare and ultimately empower potential future experiences? Pete Downton of 7Digital added further context to this, saying that there is a big opportunity to add value beyond the music and audio, bringing artist stories to life and providing context to a musical piece.

    The rate of change in the last 2-3 years has been staggering and will continue as voice pervades many other devices in the home such as TV’s, set-top boxes and fridges! We are just scratching the surface of what could be possible in driving music engagement and consumption.

Apple's March 2018 Education Press Conference - What to Expect Read more
Education Technology

    Apple has announced an education focused press event, scheduled to take place on the 27th March 2018. The announcement raises two questions - what will Apple announce and how will these announcements impact its position in the education market?

    As a company, Apple has maintained a strong brand in education for decades. When 1:1 computing was first recognised as an emerging trend in schools, Apple was at the forefront of this development, holding a 50%> market share in sales of mobile computing devices* to US K-12 schools during 2012. More recently, competition in the sector has intensified with both Google and Microsoft increasing their focus on the education vertical, working in partnership with OEM’s like HP, Dell, Acer, Asus and Lenovo to offer compelling education focused solutions.

    A review of where Apple has seen increasing competition in the school’s market offers some indication of what to expect from Tuesdays event.

    Anybody familiar with Apple’s product line will know it is famed for its premium solutions and associated price points. Anybody familiar with the education sector will know budgets are an ongoing concern and increasingly pressured. Reconciling these two polarities has been a struggle for Apple and a challenge that has been compounded by increasing price competition from low cost Chromebook and Windows devices. With device adoption rising rapidly in recent years, it has not been uncommon for the price of Chromebooks in large US school district deployments to be discounted to $150 per unit. The lowest cost Apple devices start at nearly double that figure.  The comparatively high cost of MacBooks (typically $1000>) means Apple’s K-12 education proposition has focused primarily on tablets, with sales of iPad’s outstripping MacBooks by approximately 3 to 1. The introduction of a $299 iPad in 2017 saw some short term increases in demand amongst schools, and the rumoured introduction of a $259 iPad in 2018 may well be one of the key announcements at Tuesdays event. A lower cost Apple Pencil to compete with cheaper inking solutions offered by Microsoft and Google is also to be expected. When considering these reduced prices and the higher rate of residual value Apple devices hold VS competitor solutions, concerns around pricing are somewhat reduced.

    But what about use case? One of the key drivers for device investment in the US market has been online testing. Low cost Chromebooks with their high level of manageability and clamshell design have enabled low cost and scalable deployments, as districts have scrambled to meet deadlines for digital assessment. Looking globally, similar trends can be seen in key markets like the Nordics and Australasia. Without an integrated keyboard, the iPad has struggled to compete with customers for whom online assessment has been a primary driver for investment.

    Moves toward online testing put the tablet form factor increasingly in jeopardy. This threat is accelerated by the recent introduction of low cost convertible devices, notebooks with 360-degree hinges that offer the touch capabilities of a tablet and the keyboarding capabilities of a notebook. Windows and Chrome OS convertible solutions, specifically targeting the education vertical and priced at <$300, are already widely available and gaining an increasing share of the market. But what about MacBook? A sizeable proportion of Windows notebook business in the segment still sits in the $400-$600 category, largely servicing the secondary school market. Could a $600-$700 MacBook Air designed for education have an impact here? An announcement of this nature is possible, but more likely is a reinforced focus on the use cases for iPad in the classroom. This is where the richness of content within Apple’s App store provides the company some competitive advantages. Google’s moves to provide Android App’s for Chromebooks have been slowed down by technical issues, and the comparatively small size of the Windows phone market has limited investment in the Windows store by 3rd party content developers. Apple has invested heavily in promoting the use of iPad in coding and other STEAM (Science, Technology, Engineering, Arts & Math) related activities and working with content providers to develop creative use cases for computing in the classroom. Announcements concerning further partnerships in this area are something to look for on Tuesday.

    Learning analytics and the role of data to inform personalised learning is another area where Apple has made early investments. Learning analytics is a hot topic and buzz word within K-12 education, but the adoption of dedicated platforms to support this at present is minimal. Apple is ahead of the competitive curve here, partnering with IBM to deliver the Watson Element App exclusively for iPad. The platform essentially works as a content recommendation platform for digital curriculum, considering a student’s learning style, academic goals and interests. In addition, Apple acquired institutional analytics provider Learn Sprout in early 2016. Institutional analytics solutions provide dashboards and reporting concerning the performance of a school, identify solutions to problems like dropout prevention and student intervention. Platforms of this type have been a high area of growth in the US market in recent years. Could we see a combined analytics solution evaluating both student and institution wide performance on Tuesday?

    A discussion surrounding analytics feeds into a broader discussion about digital workflows in the classroom, Virtual Learning Environments and learning management. This is an area where Google, with Google Classroom and subsequently Microsoft, with an education focused version of Microsoft Teams have made significant investments. These platforms facilitate elements of classroom management, the distribution and collection of content and provide a digital interface for group collaboration between teachers and students. With its classroom App, Apple has focused on classroom control and device management and while the platform allows the sharing of links and content between students and teachers, group collaboration has not been a core focus of the platform. An updated Apple Classroom interface with advanced collaboration features and integrated with a learning analytics offering is something worth watching for on Tuesday.

    Finally, Augmented Reality (AR) is another area of development that Apple is expected to discuss during Tuesdays event. Applications built using the companies AR Kit have been widely available since September 2017, and while a number of these are Education related, Apple is yet to communicate a clear strategy for the adoption of its AR Tech in classrooms. Contrastingly, both Google and Microsoft have set out stalls for the adoption of alternative reality technologies, Google through its VR and AR compatible virtual tour platform - Expeditions, and Microsoft, with its mixed reality solutions in partnership with leading educational publisher Pearson, amongst others.

    So, to our second question. Could introductions such as these have an impact on Apple’s K-12 education market share? Theoretically, as the education technology market matures and the use case for devices in classrooms diversifies this should benefit Apples proposition. As the adoption of coding, digital tools for art and design and use of AR and Robotics becomes more common place, schools will be willing to pay for the richer feature sets that higher-end devices can offer. Conversely, as school infrastructure evolves, and schools gradually adopt cloud services, we could see the technical requirements for devices in the sector diminish, as the processing power sits increasingly within the cloud. Both Microsoft and Google are well positioned to take advantage of this development and are expected to promote further cloud adoption in future education strategies. In the long term, the rates of adoption for both digital curriculum and cloud services will heavily influence Apple’s position in the education market. In the short term, Futuresource believes that announcements like those outlined above will help Apple retain existing customers in the segment, and may bring some new schools to its stable, but it remains to be seen if these developments could create an immediate and significant shift in its competitive situation.

    *Data included as part of report – K-12 market only, institutional sales not including 'Bring your Own'. Mobile devices only, (Notebook/Mac, Netbook, Tablet, Chromebook) not including Desktops. Please note, the term 'device shipments' refers to sales of devices at a certain point in time. It is not and should not be used as an installed based data point. 

Sky & Netflix Partnership is a Win-Win for All Read more
Media & Entertainment

    It has certainly been a busy week for Sky. Hot on the heels of the proposed $22 billion bid from Comcast, Sky has announced its plan to offer Netflix as part of its subscription packages in its European markets.

    The integration will first occur in the UK later in 2018, with Germany and Italy to follow. Sky’s Pay-TV footprint in these three markets (excl. Now TV) hit 19 million Pay-TV at the end of 2017, compared with 12 million for Netflix.

    Many other Pay-TV operators in Europe and beyond have partnered with Netflix (including Sky’s main Pay-TV competitors such as Virgin Media). However, Sky has long had a comparatively closed ecosystem, but this is now changing. The benefits to Sky integrating Netflix outweigh any potential concerns; mainly that it can keep viewers within its platform, rather than them having to leave the Sky domain to access Netflix via a third-party platform, whether on a smart TV, streaming box/stick or games console. This also adds value and can ultimately help reduce churn.

    According to Futuresource’s recent ‘Living with Digital’ consumer research, over 40% of Sky subscribers already use Netflix in the UK, which will skew even higher amongst Sky Q customers (the partnership covers only Sky Q customers, which is likely due to technical reasons rather than commercial ones). This provides Sky Q customers with an improved method for accessing a third-party service that many of them already have.

    Given Netflix’s changing strategy in recent years, with its focus on becoming a premium original content producer, it could be argued that Netflix is now more like HBO’s premium service in the USA, whereby all Pay-TV operators and cable companies carry the service, rather than treat it as a competitive distribution platform.

    Additionally, there is little content overlap between Sky and Netflix. In the UK, where the integration will first occur later in 2018, Sky has first pay-window deals with all the major Hollywood studios. Netflix’s main third-party movie deal in the UK is with Lionsgate. Plus, it is aggressively pushing its own Netflix exclusive movies such as Bright and The Cloverfield Paradox. It also has selected library movie content from most of the major studios.

    On the TV side, where both excel, a large proportion of content is available exclusively on one platform compared to the other, including Netflix’s 120 original TV series franchises and Sky’s 50+ shows it says it will have by the end of 2018. Sky also has its exclusive licensing agreement with HBO and others, creating a pretty impressive combined roster.

    Netflix has always been quick to introduce the latest viewing technology to its platform, with Sky also announcing it will introduce HDR support as part of its drive to continually improve viewing experiences.

    The announcement follows the one from a few days previous, with Sky firming up its plans to launch Sky over IP service to reach more households, without the need for a satellite dish – which has many additional implications worthy of separate discussion. A similar deal with Spotify has also been announced, again, arguably a long overdue no-brainer. 

    When Netflix launched in the UK, it stated it was not competing with Sky, which some disputed at the time. Although cord-cutting is starting to make some small inroads in Europe, Netflix is more complementary to Sky and other Pay-TV operators than it is cannibalistic. Sky’s Now TV service also provides an alternative for those less keen on being tied to a Pay-TV contact. As consumers become savvier to the different video subscriptions on offer, this move shows that Sky wants to complement these other services to enhance its own, rather than compete against them.

Comcast Outbids Disney for Sky, Increasing International Ambition Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Comcast’s entry into the bidding to become the new owner of Sky is more evidence of the world’s leading media giants continuing to build out their portfolios across content production, distribution and platforms, on a global basis.

    If Comcast succeeds with its bid – a 16% increase on Disney’s initial offering - it would bring together two of the globes best in class pay-TV platforms and provide increased competitiveness for the new entity against both traditional operators and the new era of competition led by Netflix and Amazon.

    The inclusion of Sky would provide Comcast with a significant proportion of Europe’s premium pay-TV subscriber base. Its TV operations in UK/Ireland, Germany/Austria and Italy, with a collective subscriber base of 19 million, command some of Europe’s highest pay-TV ARPUs (approx. USD55 per month in the UK), driven from its continued investment in premium content strands across sports, movies and entertainment; a strategy that will be strengthened by NBC Universal’s strong and evolving content division. Also, let’s not overlook Sky’s own increasing investment in original content, which would benefit from Comcast’s international distribution capabilities.

    Comcast and Sky have continued to invest and diversify their operations, meaning both aren’t solely reliant on the pay-TV cash-cow for the future growth of the company. Broadband is representing an ever-rising proportion of revenue and profit across both organisations and recent expansions into mobile (Sky in Dec-16 and Comcast in May-17) ensures the continued provision of multiplay beyond the demise of fixed telephony.

    With broadband increasingly important, both operators are primed to drive up data consumption through more IP-delivered services. Sky is set to soon roll out a full IPTV service, but remains relatively water tight to the inclusion of third party services (although Spotify will soon be popping up on the Q box), whereas Comcast’s Xfinity platform offers Netflix, satisfying the 55% of its subscriber base which also take the SVoD service. Sky’s established OTT Pay-TV Light platform, Now TV, is successfully building out Sky’s international footprint, currently extending to Spain and Switzerland, and retaining otherwise lost customers in its traditional markets in the advent of increased pricing pressure from alternative video platforms.

    Beyond the content, Comcast’s X1 and Sky’s Q hardware are widely considered industry leading platforms, breaking previous ceilings when it comes to consumer Pay-TV experiences. The drawing together and potential standardising of these platforms provides further opportunity to improve the cost savings outlined by Sky of £40 million per year and offers the ability to extend the success Comcast has already had with leveraging international licencing opportunities.

    While such a move would result in Europe’s two largest pay-TV companies being under US ownership, there are obvious synergies that would enrich Sky’s proposition both in the UK and internationally. From Comcast’s perspective it represents a timely opportunity to build international scale with a like-minded and respected media company. 

Beyond the Handset: Mobile World Congress in the Age of 5G Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Over recent years, smartphone innovation has slowed. Developments from major vendors have trickled in, with refinement of functionality being brought to handsets, rather than leaps of innovation. Smartphones have no sign of disappearing; they remain one of the most widely used devices. However, there is certainly a lull in terms of market growth and buzz surrounding the products.

    Mobile World Congress (MWC), the largest wireless tradeshow of the year, has been the launchpad of many innovative handsets. Vendors have continually used Barcelona as a meeting point industry wide to market new technologies and capabilities. Despite its continued prominence in the smartphone yearly calendar, MWC has become more than a destination for mobile phones. The event now hosts members of the wider IoT industry, exhibiting companies from network infrastructure vendors to car manufacturers. It is safe to say, that if a product in any way connects to the internet, it will be under the roof of Barcelona’s Gran Via.

    While advancements in mobile handsets may have slowed, there is certainly a lot of up and coming technology that will be found within MWC’s halls. With AI, 5G and autonomous driving on the edge of commercialisation, and Voice Personal Assistants (VPAs), bezelless displays and computational photography all becoming increasingly important developing technologies, there will be a lot to talk about.

    Voice Personal Assistants integrated into home electronics have been the standout feature of 2017. The last year of market development has shown the technology has firmly found a place in our homes; the focus for Siri, Google Assistant and Alexa has been as part of smart home devices, rather than as a smartphone functionality. Products such as the Pixel Ear Buds and Apple AirPods have tried to revitalise Siri and Google Assistant’s importance on mobile devices. However, excitement remains stuck in the home electronics segment. Following the launch of the HomePod, and with a Samsung Bixby Wireless speaker on the horizon, we may see a more aggressive approach to locking consumers into a VPA ecosystem within the four billion smartphones in use. There is a huge potential to engage consumers in VPA ecosystems through smartphones, laying the foundations for next generation voice interaction. 

    Artificial Intelligence (AI) promises huge potential. However, due to limitations of processing power in consumer devices, AI has largely been resigned to the cloud. Qualcomm, Huawei and Apple have all touted dedicated neural cores and processor optimisation for AI applications. Though, full use of these technologies is yet to be harnessed. Mainstream application and software developers are yet to make the leap to utilise the on-board AI processing power; in some cases, open access to the hardware is not granted, and in others it does not make sense to take the transition from the cloud. 2018 could be the year we see vendors recognise the importance of building a smartphone handset base with AI optimised processors on-board. A number of new handsets using Huawei’s Kirin 970 and Qualcomm’s 845 processor are expected to be announced, while other SoC vendors will announce further plans for AI integration for next generation products. While these chips coming to market in handsets is important, equally as vital is how smartphone manufacturers will use the processing power. For vendors to take advantage of new AI processor technology, these themes will need to have a clear focus this year.

    Since the launch of 4G networks in 2009, 5G has been a talking point at any communications trade show. The forward-looking nature of this technology development is certainly testament to the commitment to innovation found in the industry. Alongside AI, 5G promises to open the flood gates to new technologies that have been in development over the last ten years but require bandwidth unobtainable with current network technologies. Much of the development behind 5G is ready, but a lag between development and infrastructure creation has meant we will be waiting until 2019-2020 until 5G is operational. 5G is expected to dominate MWC in terms of near-commercially ready products in anticipation of network roll-out over the next two years. We expect to see a plethora of industrial based networking and IoT products hit the market, from gigabit car connectivity, live VR streaming networking devices and 5G smartphone chipsets.

    Futuresource will be on the ground providing updates on innovations within the industry, alongside analysis and contextualisation of developments. MWC will be so much more than an opportunity for handset vendors to promote their next product line. We are at the turning point for network connectivity, connected car, wearables, cloud technologies, AI, operator services and digital currency, plus many other advancements that will be discussed during the event. With over 2,300 exhibitors from across the industry attending, the event will showcase innovations that will impact technology for years to come. 

The Silicon Labs' Z-Wave Deal May Herald New Dawn for Smart Homes Read more
Consumer Electronics

    2018 could bring a breakthrough in smart home device interoperability. Silicon Labs - a Texas based manufacturer of ZigBee, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth chips - is set to buy the Z-Wave operations of Sigma Designs for $240 million. The deal could boost the $6 billion Smart Home industry*, which is already expected to grow strongly in the coming years. 

    Silicon Labs originally hoped to acquire Sigma Designs in its entirety for $282 million or $7.05 per share. Those plans fell through at the end of last week, when Sigma failed to divest its Smart TV and Set-Top Box business.

    Assuming the revised deal goes through, this is good news for the smart home industry. The list of standard protocols used in the industry is long: ZigBee, Z-Wave, Thread, DECT-ULE. In addition, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are present in everyone’s pockets and on wrists via smartphones and smartwatches, but increasingly also in smart home devices. One of the obstacles that the industry has faced on its path to becoming mainstream, is the lack of interoperability that results from this proliferation of standard protocols. No protocol has managed to stand above the rest because each has strengths in particular use cases.

    Integration and multifunctionality have become increasingly key in home-automation. For example, lighting and even audio might be used as part of the home security system to simulate presence. This type of seamless configuration of multiple devices though has been impeded by the protocol issue.

    Both Z-Wave and ZigBee are low power and low range chips. Z-Wave technology is easier to install but comes at higher price points. It has established itself as the main standard protocol of security and monitoring systems and is used by manufacturers and service providers such as Yale and ADT. The protocol has also been adopted by telcos and pay-TV providers that bundle smart home services/devices with their services (e.g. Comcast’s xFi, previously Xfinity).

    ZigBee, meanwhile, is a lower cost technology, but can present more technical challenges. It is prevalent in other areas of home automation such as lighting and can be found in brands including Philips Hue and Sengled.

    The trend towards linking devices to maximise use cases or even create new ones is the main reason the acquisition of Z-Wave by Silicon Labs may be a defining moment for the smart home industry. Silicon Labs is already one of the leading ZigBee manufacturers, albeit not the only one, as ZigBee is - unlike Z-Wave - an open source standard. If Silicon Labs starts churning out Z-Wave chips along with the ZigBee systems that it already produces, a few interesting possibilities emerge.

    The most exciting scenario is for Silicon Labs to invest in the production of chips combining both Z-Wave and ZigBee. This is not unlikely, as Silicon Labs already produces multiple protocol chips (e.g. chips that come with Bluetooth, Thread and ZigBee). A combined Z-Wave and ZigBee chip would shake the industry, as the two protocols have a combined share in the smart home industry of over 60%. Such a move could also bring closer together areas such as monitoring, lighting and climate control; substantially increasing interoperability in the smart home industry. Security and monitoring are currently Z-Wave’s turf, whilst ZigBee is commonly used in lighting. Climate control is shared territory with important brands on both sides of the Z-Wave/ZigBee divide. A combined chip could end turf wars to the benefit of the whole industry.

    Another possible, but less likely, scenario is for Silicon Labs to scale down activity in one of the two protocols and then leverage its presence as a large chip manufacturer to persuade its clients to adopt the other one. This would potentially mean convincing OEMs that currently use Z-Wave to switch to ZigBee. In this scenario, ZigBee would be an improved protocol. By acquiring Z-Wave, Silicon Labs will be taking in Sigma’s Z-Wave workforce and expertise. If these resources were used on ZigBee, a much-improved standard protocol could result.

    Assuming Silicon Labs maintains research and development in both protocols after the acquisition of the Z-Wave assets from Sigma, (a more likely scenario) the result would be the concentration of resources focused upon improving the two market leading protocols, potentially to the benefit of the whole industry.

    It’s worth bearing in mind that a growing number of smart home start-ups use Bluetooth or even Wi-Fi connectivity in their devices. These two forms of connectivity are present everywhere, and Bluetooth Mesh and 5G can address challenges such as range and overcrowding. Bluetooth and especially Wi-Fi involve high power consumption when compared to Z-Wave and ZigBee, but future improvements in this field could ultimately challenge the relevance of low data transmission protocols such as Z-Wave and ZigBee.

    For the foreseeable future, though, low power chips such as Z-Wave and ZigBee remain the best solutions for most of the smart home use cases and any movements to bring them closer - as the Silicon Labs/Sigma deal can do - will benefit the industry.

    *See Smart Home Market update, issued by Futuresource Consulting in Sept 2017, for more details. This figure relates to worldwide trade value of Smart Home devices in 2017.

Collaboration: The Future of Workplace Technology Read more
Education Technology

    A buzzword which you’ll often hear over the coming months (with ISE 2018 just around the corner) is collaboration, and the increasing interconnectedness of the spaces in which we work and the technology through which we co-operate. Collaboration is a theme at the heart of the modern workplace, and the technology that supports this seeks to enable new and more efficient ways of working together. With more people working from home, the growth of huddle spaces, high demand for BYOD in meeting rooms, and the requirement for platforms that support a multi-channel integrated communications environment, the market for meeting room collaboration solutions is expanding rapidly.

    Defining this industry can be difficult. Vendors across AV are all using collaboration as an umbrella term for the increasing connectivity of products, and as a means through which to grow sales. The collaboration market includes a variety of products such as: interactive displays, audio systems, wireless presentation solutions (WPS), video conferencing and collaboration hubs (which generally combine a number of these areas). What is clear however, is the growing level of interest that we have witnessed in these technologies over the past 24 months.

    As detailed in our corporate end user study, the average employee is spending 5.4 hours a week in meeting rooms and 3.1 hours a week joining meetings remotely via audio, web or video conferencing solutions. With over 20% of meetings hosting a remote participant, the demand for collaborative solutions which make these meetings more efficient is very high.  In addition to this, the survey also highlighted the number of physical meeting rooms is forecast to rise, with 24% of companies surveyed expecting to add additional meeting spaces in the next 5 years. With the target market growing, it is unsurprising that vendors are placing such an emphasis on collaboration technologies.

    A good example of this growing interest and investment, is the rising investment in interactive displays in the meeting room; a market rejuvenated by the development of Team Collaboration Displays (TCDs) with major unified communication players like Cisco launching the Spark Board and Microsoft launching the Surface Hub. TCDs have brought the power of their respective platforms, namely Cisco Spark, Microsoft Skype for Business, and Google Hangouts, as well as content sharing, interactivity and a host of other functionalities into a consolidated package, servicing a range of meeting room needs. This has not only brought tech giants to the displays industry, it has acted as a spotlight for collaborative technologies of all kinds and has helped grow overall interest in the market. In addition to the TCDs covered here, network connected displays (allowing content sharing between locations) have performed well, with brands such as Sharp and Ricoh leading this segment. Fuelled by these developments, the market for collaboration displays grew over 30% year-on-year in Q3 2017, with 2018 expected to be another solid year. 

    The buzz around collaboration technologies in the corporate market is unlikely to abate any time soon, particularly with ISE under a month away. Moreover, as the workplace continually evolves, and technology continues to influence and support our working habits, growth and innovation in this eclectic market is forecast to accelerate. To keep up with these developments, Futuresource’s latest reports, including our 2017 Wireless Presentation Solutions Market Tracker and our upcoming Corporate Meeting Room Technology End User Survey, aim to provide invaluable insights into these rapidly developing markets.

Realising the Potential of Cloud in the Pro Video Industry Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    IT, software, Cloud, IP: these words have been at the forefront of the marketing messages of vendors at tradeshows for years now. There has been much talk about the potential of such technologies and about how they will revolutionise the broadcast industry in terms of the way content is created and delivered.

    There have been case studies and testimonials showing that these technologies are of today, not just tomorrow, but by and large most of these have focused on the bread and butter of the industry: broadcasters, large content creators/aggregators and associated companies.

    This is the tip of the iceberg, though. As has been documented in my last few blogs, the democratisation of video is spreading fast, bringing myriad new end user types to the world of professional video. This is most obvious when it comes to acquisition, but more and more solutions are being targeted at these growing markets with every passing tradeshow.

    There are some hardware companies that were early to embrace these new markets, but hardware has its limitations. To appeal to non-broadcast applications, price points often have to be kept low with the consequence of compromised feature set functionality. This means that vendors are frequently fielding ranges of equipment catering to the lower-end (often non-broadcast), to the higher-end (often broadcast) and everywhere in between. Not only does this increase R&D and marketing budgets for vendors it also means that if a small organisation grows and wants to upgrade it must buy a new, bigger, more sophisticated hardware solution. This in a time when margins are tight and much of the industry is moving away from CAPEX business models.

    One of the much-vaunted benefits of cloud-centric, software-based solutions is its scalability. If an organisation grows or shrinks its requirements, the software solution can be scaled accordingly; that’s the traditional way of looking at scalability. Another way of looking at this, is that vendors only have to field one product to cater to end users at the low-end and at the high-end – functionality is simply scaled according to budget and feature requirements.

    And it is with this in mind that Amazon Web Services’ announcement of their new family of AWS Elemental Media Services last Monday was particularly interesting.

    These are essentially an integrated set of cloud-based tools that allow end users to build a video delivery workflow complete with storage, encoding, transcoding, DRM and ad-insertion.

    Being purely cloud-based, no specialist hardware is needed and so the same solution can be used for small non-broadcast and huge broadcast organisations alike. On top of this, no specialist expertise is needed – as long as operators have worked with cloud services like S3, EC2 or CloudFront and have a background in video they should have no problem.

    This is one cloud-based service (or suite of modules to be more precise) that can be used across the industry, from the smallest companies wanting to stream videos to multinational broadcast and OTT giants.

    The change this embodies has been happening for a while, but this is one of the clearest signs yet of the future of our industry. Hardware still has its place of course, but the need for the traditional hardware vendors to look to the future is becoming more pressing, as those who don’t or who are slow off the mark may fade into the background in the years to come.

    Please contact Adam Cox at for more details about this or Futuresource's other research.

What's Ricoh Up to in the Workplace Collaboration Market? Read more
Professional AV

    Ricoh recently held its 2017 EMEA Industry Analyst Summit in Paris. Providing a strategy update on company plans for the next three years. The summit welcomed analysts covering office printing, IT services and Unified Communications & Collaboration.

    Ricoh’s Communication Services division manages its workplace collaboration products, including lines of projectors, interactive whiteboards (IWB’s) and video conferencing equipment. The division is a relatively young but emergent segment of Ricoh’s business, with significant investment taking place in the last three years.

    A look at developments and strategy in Ricoh’s other business units can shed some light on what we may expect to see, as Ricoh increases its focus on the communications services market.

    Ricoh’s core business is office printing. This is a mature market with declining margins. Ricoh is a leading player with a global customer base composed of large and mid-size enterprises. With growth in the print market uncertain, Ricoh has focused on developing new opportunities to service its existing customer base. IT convergence is a theme that many in the AV world will be familiar with and a similar story can be found in the office printing industry. In recent years, the management and procurement of printing services has increasingly shifted from facilities managers to IT managers. Seeking to address this new customer profile, Ricoh has built an IT services business which now accounts for approximately 10% of the company’s revenue globally. This growth has been achieved primarily through acquisition. The last five years has seen Ricoh make in excess of 15 acquisitions of companies with IT service capabilities, providing a workforce of over 9000 specialists globally.

    Ricoh is now looking to apply the same methodology of growth through acquisition to its Communication Services business. The first acquisition on its books was Techno Trends in Spain, which was acquired in July 2017. Techno Trends is a UC&C reseller and audio-visual integrator. The company maintains existing relationships with leading UC&C players like Cisco and Microsoft. Acquisitions of this nature highlight Ricoh’s strategy for partnership and interoperability in the communication services market. It’s video conferencing end points and IWB’s are compatible with third party platforms like Skype for Business. This is increasingly common in the broader market, as a growing number of vendor’s position video solutions for the meeting room. Vendors like Logitech and NEC have adopted the same strategy with comparable products. These platform agnostic solutions offer an alternative, (typically lower in cost and specification) to platform optimised hardware from platform owners like Cisco and Microsoft. Interoperability of communications platforms is another industry trend where Ricoh has made investments. Partnering with Videxio to offer a virtual meeting room platform with similar capabilities, to solutions from providers like Pexip and Acano; these solutions provide a virtual space to host users of multiple different conferencing platforms. During the Analyst Summit, Ricoh hinted that further channel acquisitions with a broadening geographic focus may be in the pipeline, following a similar blueprint employed by the company’s IT services division.

    Beyond influencing Ricoh’s future acquisition strategy, the IT services division may have broader implications for the company’s development in the AV and communications services markets. To date, Ricoh’s IT services business has focused on three key areas, mobility & workplace, data centre & infrastructure and information management & analytics. In an increasingly connected and interoperable workplace, each of these areas has the capacity to impact AV deployments and as such, the ability of vendors to influence a customer’s IT services strategy will increase a vendor’s capability to influence that customers AV strategy. This trend is observed in the broader market, with IT integrators becoming increasingly involved in AV deployment, either through the development of AV skill sets in-house or through outsourcing integration to AV specialists on a white labelling basis.

    Perhaps most interesting from a solutions perspective is the role data analytics and machine learning will have in the form of Virtual Personal Assistants (VPAs). VPAs are already widely available in the home audio market; a similar trend is now emerging in commercial markets. Ricoh is an early adopter and has partnered with IBM to integrate an IBM Watson based virtual assistant into its IWB’s. This assistant can capture meeting proceedings, monitor meeting room usage & scheduling and integrate with other third-party applications for meeting room control and additional services. More recently, Cisco has announced a similar solution; the Cisco Spark Assistant will be deployed in phases from early 2018. Building out from the meeting room, these VPA’s will have the ability to support additional areas of office ICT; digital signage, office security, imaging solutions and desk based communications products are each potential areas of adoption with vertical specific solutions expected to emerge in the longer term. The ability to centralise and increasingly automate workflow management through these platforms may be a key competitive differentiator for workplace technology suppliers moving forwards. 

    With a large existing customer base to address, an evolving portfolio of IT and AV solutions and an appetite for acquisition that will give Ricoh a greater influence over the AV channel, Futuresource will be keenly watching Ricoh’s further investment in the communication services sector.

The Continuing Democratisation of Video Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    As price points of what were once referred to as “broadcast” products continue to fall, manufacturers of professional video equipment are starting to cater more and more to the wider “AV” market. This market, with its myriad verticals, is growing globally and is only just starting to embrace professional grade video on a large scale.

    There are a number of reasons for this, but the unifying factor is simply that society is demanding more and more video content, particularly on social media. Think about how much video we see these days. No longer is video limited to television screens: with digital signage, social media and content embedded in websites, video is now inescapable and is an integral part of our society. This is especially true with today’s mobile technology, as smartphones allow us to have video in our pockets at all times. 

    In addition to this, the availability of professional video tools at low price points and a distribution platform open to anyone, the Internet, means that the production and distribution of video has never been easier.

    Video is therefore becoming increasingly important to a huge range of verticals beyond the traditional broadcast markets. Video conferencing in the corporate world, distance learning and lecture capture in education, medical training, visual radio, houses of worship, bars and nightclubs, sports clubs, gyms – these are just some of the verticals and applications where significant growth in demand for video is being seen.

    Over the past ten years, where these markets have required improved levels of quality in their video production they have mostly turned to pro camcorders, which is one of the reasons why the sub $2,500 segment has been so important. In H1 2017, this segment accounted for 63% of global pro camcorder volumes.

    While video acquisition has been democratised in terms of price, producing good quality content with pro camcorders still requires skill and a level of technical competence. For some applications this cannot be avoided, but for many, particularly where cameras do not need to be moved within or between locations, professional PTZ cameras* are being favoured. PTZ cameras are comparatively easy to use; they require a one-time set up (they are often mounted out of the way on ceilings and walls) and limited, simple input from an operator. In fact, the level of input can be so limited that in some cases one operator could control tens of cameras at one time in certain applications.

    Price points of PTZ cameras are also comparatively low, with the vast majority of volumes shipped at price points below $3,500 and just under half of the market being sold at sub $2,000.

    In FY2016, 108,800 professional PTZ cameras were shipped worldwide, with continued strong growth expected for the foreseeable future. By FY2021 the market will have grown to 149,400 units, a 37% increase from FY2016.

    While broadcast is likely to remain the industry’s staple industry for the foreseeable future, falling price points and margins means that competition is only going to intensify. Many vendors will have to diversify in to these newer, emerging verticals in order to secure their futures.

    Futuresource’s new Professional PTZ Camera Market Report is now available while the pro camcorder research is updated on a quarterly basis. Please contact Adam Cox at for more details about this or about Futuresource’s other research.

    *Futuresource classifies professional PTZ cameras as costing over $700, and including at least one of the following connectivity types: HDMI, SDI, IP, HDBaseT, DVI, Composite or S-Video. Please note that Futuresource excludes security and surveillance cameras as well as dedicated videoconferencing solutions from its report.

Increased Bundling of Premium Headphones By Mobile Handset Vendors Could Impact Audio Retailers' Bottom Line Read more
Consumer Electronics

    This year at IFA 2017, LG announced that it will bundle its flagship V30 smartphone with B&O Play headphones. LG’s smartphone audio is tuned by B&O and the headphones are made specifically to produce optimum playback with the V30 handset. This follows Samsung bundling AKG headphones (which it now owns via its Harman acquisition) exclusively with its S8 model. These headphones are claimed to be worth $100, although this model is not available to purchase at retail. There are also rumours Apple will push AirPods more aggressively with the new iPhone X, perhaps via the mobile channel (a ‘Soft’ bundle as opposed to in the box ‘hard’ bundle).

    A trend is emerging of handset vendors bundling premium headphones ‘in the box’ as a point of differentiation, in what is an increasingly homogeneous handset market. Headphones have become an important accessory – from both a wearable fashion and technology perspective. Earphones have become a visible point of differentiation, as phone designs have become standardised and are in pockets and bags as opposed to a visible, wearable accessory. With this in mind, the incentive for mobile vendors is pretty clear, especially when one considers that consumers are spending $13billion at retail on headphones, more than ten times what they were a decade ago.

    Since Apple’s iconic white EarPods were included with the iPod and later with iPhones, they have become the world’s top selling SKU in the retail aftermarket for headphones (so additional to those bundled with phones). They accounted for 6.4% of unit sales in H1 2017, generating revenues of $533 million off volumes of 22 million units. A further 214 million EarPods were bundled with iPhones over the same period. Some might think that bundling headphones with a device which is replaced every two years might impact the aftermarket negatively…in fact, due to the shorter life of bundled headphones (approximately one year) – the net effect on the aftermarket has actually been positive. People use them and want to replace them when they break or are misplaced.

    A key value driver of headphones in the aftermarket stems from consumers’ desires to own a ‘better’ pair. If handset vendors start bundling premium headphones, this might satisfy the need for that ‘better’ pair and consequently, replacements for bundled headphones could potentially lengthen beyond one year, negatively impacting the aftermarket. The handset market is worth over $330 billion in trade value and the cost to bundle headphones - even premium models - is negligible. Retail margin on premium headphones is more than 50%, whilst the bill of materials (BOM) cost is relatively small. 

    However, the headphones aftermarket is much smaller ($9 billion at trade level this year), so there is the real prospect that bundling strategies in the mobile handset market (which shifts 1 billion pairs of headphones per year) could adversely affect the retail aftermarket, which shifts barely a third of this total.

    Bundling of premium headphones with mobiles could be hugely beneficial to headphone vendors savvy enough to partner with smartphone companies for ‘in the box’ bundling, as it would drive up volumes significantly. Flagship phone models from LG and Samsung ship on average 3-5 million and 55-60 million units per year respectively. Consumers would also get a good deal from this strategy.  However, those retailers who deal in high-end headphones but are not involved in selling smartphones, will need to keep an eye out for this trend, as it could deprive them of a lucrative business.

CEDIA Expo 2017: Where High-End Audio Met Smart Home, Whilst Amazon Extended Its Reach into Both Sectors Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Anyone who doubts the existence of the inextricable link between custom installation (CI) and high-end audio in the US would have been quickly convinced by a visit to CEDIA in San Diego, held on 7-9 September. Futuresource Consulting sent analysts who are focused on both audio and smart home to the event, which attracted a large number of delegates to the 470 plus booths. At least 70% of the exhibitors were showing audio equipment, several of whom were high-end international brands who had chosen not to exhibit at IFA Berlin the previous week. All exhibitors that Futuresource spoke with were hugely positive about the state of the sector and the volume of business being generated by the show. 

    One factor common to both shows though, was the growing influence of Amazon, both in audio and in smart home more broadly.

    Futuresource estimates that mainstream audio brands such as Yamaha, Pioneer/Onkyo and Sound United might expect 10% of volume and perhaps 20-25% of value of their US audio business to be transacted through the CI channel. But when one looks to the really high-end brands such as Wisdom Audio, Pro-Audio, Storm Audio, Martin Logan and Datasat, the reliance on the CI channel is much heavier, with anything north of 50% of volumes going via custom install.

    One factor that makes the CI channel so lucrative is the profile of some of the brands that are available here. Many vendors have brands targeted specifically at CI, often with much higher price tags and offering substantial margins. Integra is one such brand, offered by the Pioneer/Onkyo group exclusively via CI. Whilst Pioneer/Onkyo branded AVRs start at $200 at retail, Integra starts at $800. One high-end brand of architectural loudspeakers (PRO Audio) tells its resellers that an advantage of dealing with PRO Audio is that there are 'no published prices.' In other words, the end-user will be hard pressed to discover whether or not they are getting bargain from their installer. This contrasts sharply with the one-size-fits-all transparent pricing available from, which of course is more focused on lower ticket items. At the other end of the scale, Snap A/V (which owns several brands and specialises in supplying the CI channel), labelled its products at CEDIA EXPO with dealer price and MSRP. These revealed substantial margins, for example the ES-AW-360-6-BRN landscape speaker was advertised as $159.95 dealer price, but $459.95 MSRP. Another in the landscape series was $549.95 at dealer level, versus $1499.95 MSRP. 

    At the Luxury end of the market, the end-user is cash rich and generally expects to pay premium prices.

    In order to make their products attractive to the CI Channel, audio manufacturers have to ensure that their devices are compatible with the three-big hitting smart whole home control systems, Crestron, Contol4 and Savant. Ease of use and integration with other devices within the home is the very raison d'etre of the CI channel. Which takes us on to the company that was most discussed at CEDIA - Amazon. The online retailer has managed to spread its influence into both audio and smart home by selling millions of devices that come with Alexa, its voice personal assistant (VPA). Perhaps reluctantly given that VPA technology brings to the average home the sort of automation that used to be exclusive to the CI industry, custom installers and high-end audio manufacturers alike have embraced Alexa. Virtually every exhibitor at CEDIA showed products that work with Alexa (and occasionally also with Siri and the Google Assistant).

    Following the success of Amazon Echo, Dot and the rest of the Alexa family, Amazon wants to partner with custom installers to launch "Amazon Home Services". At Amazon's CEDIA keynote, custom installers were invited to partner with Amazon to provide technical support and custom installations to Amazon's clients. Amazon appears to be seeking to establish itself as the market place through which consumers seek advice, support and custom installation services. With this move, Amazon could add to its platform a large pool of engineers and technical staff that can be booked into appointments at consumers' homes.

    The move though raises suspicions among custom installers requiring reassurance that Amazon wants to partner with them rather than deprive them of their business. The CI channel has until recently been the exclusive supplier of smart home products, so understandably fears that Amazon's Alexa products - most notably its Echo, Dot and Tap - are bringing DIY smart home to the mass market without the participation of professional installers. However, research conducted by Futuresource with installers indicates that the likelihood is that the industry could actually benefit from the move to so-called DIY smart home devices, which are purchased at retail. This is for three reasons. Primarily, it is educating the mass market about the possibilities that hooking up a range of devices in the home can offer in terms of comfort, convenience, security and entertainment. Secondly, it is quite likely that lower-end installers will be called in by consumers unable to competently set-up the range of devices they have bought, but failed to self-install, so that they work together effectively. (Retail brands such as Ring, Igloo and August had booths at the show and one installer recently advertised installations from as little as $500). Thirdly, there is the possibility that those who have learned for the first time about smart home thanks to Alexa and its many skills (ranging from audio, to lighting, climate and appliance control), may make the leap to a full-on custom installation involving the likes of Crestron, Control4 or Savant. 

    It is also probable that Amazon is seeking a foothold for Alexa products in Crestron and Control4 households in order to target these high net-worth homes, with its retail and content services. That said, it seems unlikely that – at least in the short term – Amazon would try to compete with the CI channel by retailing like-for-like smart home products at knockdown prices.

    CI would be well advised to embrace voice assistants in the same way as the audio hardware industry is doing. Not far down the line too of course will be a much greater push from the providers of alternative voice personal assistant technologies such as Google, Apple, Microsoft, Samsung and others. The challenge for CI hardware and software vendors and installers will be to know which platforms to support, as Amazon is just the early mover in this story whose plot is yet to fully unfold.

Voice as an Interface, is it the Next Big Battle Ground in Education for Tech Giants? Read more
Education Technology

    Virtual Personal Assistants (VPA’s) are one of this year’s hottest trends in consumer tech, with giants like Amazon and Google pushing the agenda of voice into the home. Platforms like Siri, Cortana and Google Assistant have been in our pockets for years and are now finding new homes across a range of home electronics. Amazon, with its Alexa interface has made the most running to date. The Echo portfolio started with smart speakers but has quickly expanded to include a smart display which can provide supporting images alongside audio feedback, and the Echo Show. The Show is a connected camera that takes pictures of you in various outfits and makes fashion recommendations; these recommendations can then translate to purchases and be fulfilled by Amazon.

    So what can we learn from the VPA’s market recent past and what implications could these developments have for the education market?

    Amazon’s product line suggests VPA’s are an interface which will be adapted for specific applications and vertical markets, including education. Amazon itself is already making a play in the higher education market, the company’s Alexa Fund Fellowship is supporting Universities with the intention of encouraging advances in voice communications between people and machines. The company recently donated 1,600 Echo Dot speakers to engineer students at Arizona State University with students able to opt into courses which teach Alexa Skills development. We can think of skills as apps for VPA’s and the number of skills available for Alexa to utilise is growing rapidly. Go to the Amazon website and you can find thousands of skills under the Education & Reference category, including those from developers like the History Channel and NASA. So, what could this mean for K-12 schooling?

    The potential applications for VPA’s in the classroom are numerous. VPA’s can answer questions, tell stories and translate languages. In addition, the smart control features of VPA’s can be used to control lighting, AV and act as an intercom between classrooms. If we look back to the consumer market, we can see that VPA’s are being integrated into lots of different products. VPA’s in the home took off with the introduction of smart speakers, but the technology is now being integrated into TV’s, white goods, security and HVAC equipment. When thinking about education, there are a few starting points where the integration of voice control could make sense. Interactive displays are found in over 70% of US K-12 classrooms. These products are often supplied with a host of curated content. Perhaps voice would be a more effective way to search for assets instead of scrolling through lists and search bars. Maybe the same is true when pausing a video or moving to the next slide of a presentation. Ricoh, in partnership with IBM, has already developed an IBM Watson enabled interactive display to support ideation in the meeting room. So, can a similar use case be found in education? The concept of the flipped classroom offers opportunities for small group learning and discussion. Leading web filtering company LightSpeed Systems recently introduced Activate. The product utilises microphone pods, allowing teachers to monitor group discussions. Would the integration of a VPA into these devices, acting as a teaching assistant, offer value? These are questions the product and marketing companies of EdTech suppliers will need to address in the coming years.

    The use of VPA technology for learning at home has been around for some time, thanks to connected toys. These often-cute looking companion robots have found an instructional role in the home study markets of countries like China and South Korea, teaching children to count, spell and speak foreign languages. Several of these skills are already available for Alexa. Looking a little further down the line, will VPA’s become an interface for adaptive learning platforms? Adaptive learning platforms are taking in and analysing an increasingly sophisticated data set to personalise content and learning actions. Will Amazon link Alexa to its education content discovery engine, Inspire?  Would the sharing of data between these platforms offer value to the learner, and if so, how much data is it prudent or legal to share? With potential usage models being so widespread, spanning both at home/personal use and in school/formal learning there are likely to be complexities in implementation. Data privacy is a very sensitive area already in the EdTech industry and the potential use of VPA’s in schools will likely bring new challenges, as well as additional complexity to this debate.

    But why consider the impact of VPA’s on the classroom at all?  Well, the short answer is because the major tech companies will. The major OS providers (Google, Apple and Microsoft) are already engaged in a major strategic battle, fighting for share in K-12 school computing market (View the Press Release here>>). Apple especially has strategically focused on the education space for years, with a view that students used to using Apple products at an early age are more likely to choose Apple devices in the work environment and at home. Both Microsoft and Apple have been stung by the rapid emergence of Google with its Chromebook devices (Chromebooks reached 58% share of US K-12 sales in 2016) and this has resulted in major investments in the sector from both companies. 

    It’s important to remember the primary motivator for the likes of Amazon and Google to introduce smart speakers is not to develop a strong home audio business, but to cement their VPA’s as the consumer interface for voice control. As the number of third party products integrating Alexa, Cortana and Google assistant increases, the role of the platform providers in hardware provision will decrease and these companies will focus on platform development. Therefore, we expect the battle to playout in the education sector with voice control another key aspect of the ongoing OS competition.

Importance of Data Analytics in Schools Read more
Education Technology

    The role of data in the education environment is evolving and has the potential to effect institutions, students and suppliers. Schools collect large amounts of data, gleaning information on student attendance, grades and learning styles alongside operational and financial statistics.

    Traditionally, data has been siloed within the tens of management systems and hundreds of learning applications which schools use on a daily basis. As the number of platforms and applications has increased, so have both the volume of data generated and the potential value of analysing this information.

    Increasingly, both schools and technology suppliers are seeking opportunities to consolidate and leverage this data for administrative and instructional gains. Consequently, the market for education focused data analytic technologies shows significant potential. Products servicing the sector typically fall into three broad categories, as below.

    It’s important to remember that these dedicated analytic solutions are not the only tools leveraging data in schools. Capitalising on the increasing thirst for evidence based decision making, software companies servicing all corners of the institution are incorporating sophisticated data visualisation into products. Everything from the student information systems to transport management platforms are now utilising data to provide insights.

    Analytic platforms feed on data; in a campus of data silos accessing and aggregating information can be a challenge. Supporting data integration is creating a growing need for middleware and standards, enabling interoperability between platforms. Leading providers include IMS Global, Authentica Solutions and Clever. The initial driver for this market has been administrative efficiency, enabling the transfer of class rosters and grades and facilitating single sign on, reducing the need for students and teachers to remember multiple passwords. Supporting data integration for analytics has been a secondary priority for most institutions to date, but one which vendors will seek to exploit going forwards. In addition to platform interoperability, data standards allowing schools to organise and store data is another important contributor to analytics usage. Perhaps most important of late has been the Ed-Fi standard, which is based on Common Education Data Standards and is free to licence for schools. The Ed-Fi Alliance is a non-profit group, offering a free to license data standard which is now used by most US schools.

    Against this background of evolving requirements, use cases and technologies, vendors are competing to retain customer mind share, influence purchasing and prove the efficacy of solutions via data.

    Platforms which were previously siloes of information are increasingly exchanging data with competing and complimentary products. Schools are demanding interoperability between solutions and the rationalisation of platforms in use, looking to leverage analytics to inform decision making for both school management and student learning.
    Data analytics has the potential to influence the institution and the student at every level. As such, developments in this area have competitive implications for EdTech suppliers across a range of products and services.

    The ability for data to add value to a vendor’s proposition is substantial and data analytics will have important implications for the competitive landscape. In the fragmented market of administrative technologies, schools are looking for more holistic solutions. This is creating a divergence in strategy between major providers seeking to achieve this. Some are expanding influence through acquisition and the internal development of complimentary features; others are looking at partnership and integration strategies to make platforms more open and interoperable.

    Content publishers face a similar challenge. The use of data to personalise learning strategies threatens traditional business models within the industry, placing demands on learning platforms to provide an increasingly diverse and flexible array of learning assets which support individual learning paths and styles. Navigating this transition, providers will seek both consolidation and cooperation as the requirement to co-exist alongside competitor and OER content becomes increasingly common. Data will help dictate the shape of these relationships and inform strategies going forwards. Companies which can influence schools adoption and utilisation of analytics tools stand to gain.

    Futuresource’s upcoming report – The Role of Data Analytics in US Education will seek to demystify the market for data analytics technologies, looking at both the K-12 and higher education markets and providing a perspective on the impact these technologies will have on the vendor community.  Drawing on interviews with both industry leaders and end-users, the report will provide a timeline for adoption of data analytic tools and explore the competitive implications analytic technologies will have across key product categories in the Ed-Tech market.

Smart Speaker Market Grows 843% in Units in Q2 2017, While Q3 is on Course to Break More Records (Year-on-Year) Read more
Consumer Electronics

    4.2 million Smart Speakers shipped in Q2, with sales dominated by the US and UK markets despite availability extending to Germany, China and South Korea during the quarter. Adoption in the US and UK has been relatively swift, with penetration standing at 6% and 3% respectively and with each home owning a little over two speakers per home, on average.

    The market continues to witness strong growth and its performance remains particularly impressive when considered within the wider market it is most closely associated with – home audio; 38% of home audio devices were voice-enabled in the first half of 2017 in the US.

    While Amazon maintain over 90% of installed units, the potential for VPAs to be the next-generation interface, particularly in the smart home, has created a platform race with Amazon, Apple, Google and Microsoft all launching new products (including via 3rd party vendors) to drive penetration of their platforms. Between IFA and CES, Futuresource anticipates several audio hardware vendors to introduce products with VPA support, in most cases supporting one of the aforementioned platforms.

    The smart speakers market is driven by a degree of novelty, which is expected to dissipate over time. However, Futuresource consumer research shows usage and satisfaction with smart speakers is high, with 46% of owners using them daily in the US. Usage is heavily focused around controlling media with voice, with a negligible share of Echo’s 15,000+ skills used on a regular and ongoing basis.

    In terms of integration of VPA’s into devices, the focus has been on smart speakers as they provide the optimum combination of features, functionality, affordability and market growth to introduce the concept of VPAs to consumers. However, future growth of smart speaker demand will be affected by integration of VPAs in to other device categories. Successful deployment in a broader portfolio of devices will limit the requirement for smart speakers and multiple device ownership. Various levels of VPA functionality will appear in devices throughout the home as well as cars, public places and in mobile devices.

    As VPAs start to be integrated into devices beyond smart speakers, Futuresource forecasts that adoption will ramp up to exceed 25% of sales of CE ‘home’ devices by 2021.

Retailers, Service Providers and Custom Installers Drive Smart Home Growth Read more
Consumer Electronics

    41 million smart home devices will ship in 2017 globally, representing a retail value of $7.9 billion. Revenues are expected to triple by 2021, making this category one of the strongest growth categories within consumer electronics. This will be helped by added store space dedicated to smart home, the bundling of smart home devices with services and continued good performance of custom installations.

    Across hubs & control devices, security and monitoring systems, climate control, lighting, and other disparate smart home categories prices are expected to decline across all categories as smart home devices make their journey into more homes. 

    North America continues to account for just over 60% of shipments worldwide, but is expected to decline to 44% by 2021 as parts of Europe and also China, where penetration rates are currently on low single digits, are expected to be the fastest growing markets.

    Security and monitoring generates both the largest volume and value in the smart home. However, lighting is the fastest growing category. Smart lighting systems have comparatively low unit prices, and there is a wide range of DIY, easy-to-install options. Growing sales of smart lighting is being witnessed beyond high street stores, as custom installers also report fast growing demand in smart lighting. 

    Penetration rates of climate control are currently higher in North America than anywhere else in the world. However, Western Europe is expected to overtake North America in climate control before 2021. Energy costs are lower in the US than in Europe where consumers have a high appetite for devices that can help them manage energy use more efficiently.

    Service providers such as utility companies, telcos and paid-TV providers are betting on smart home to increase the loyalty of their customers. By offering smart home packages, they aim at reducing churn. However, with margins that are higher than other consumer electronics (eg smartphones), smart home is also a strategy to increase revenue per customer. Whereas smart home seems to be an adequate strategy to meet the first goal, service providers struggle to meet the second. Despite relative high margins per device, smart home services mean cost increases in areas such as customer and technical support. Moreover, and unlike what Amazon has done with Alexa enabled devices, most service providers have yet to invest in marketing their smart home offer in a meaningful way.

    Less than 20% of all smart home devices currently in use are brought in by the custom installer industry. In volume terms, the smart home is growing by stealth through easy-to-install DIY devices acquired through retail. Custom installation continues to punch above its weight in value terms. Though, retailers and service providers are better placed than custom installers to bring about connectivity and automation to households of all income levels.

    Chip manufacturers are experiencing a boost in orders caused by the increase in demand for smart home, as some connected devices require multiple chips and sensors. The Z-Wave standard protocol, produced by Sigma, has an edge in the smart home. Nevertheless, Bluetooth is enjoying momentum due to the release of Bluetooth Mesh, which is lighter and allows for devices to use each other’s connection to reach the central hub or the control device, hence increasing the usually short range of Bluetooth.

    The proliferation of different protocols is seen as an obstacle to smart home adoption as it impedes interoperability. Yet, as each protocol has advantages and strengths in particular use cases, multiple standards are bound to co-exist in the medium term. As chips become more powerful and increasingly become able to carry more than one protocol, multiple protocols might not necessarily mean less interoperability in the future.

Making Sense of 10G Versus 1G in AV Over IP Read more
Professional AV

    During the past 24 months, AV over IP has risen from relative obscurity to become the hot topic in the Pro AV world. Advances in compression technologies and network infrastructure capacities have helped drive this development. And we are now beginning to see significant volumes of encoders and decoders being sold into low-latency Pro AV applications; an industry generally considered to be the last hold-out to IP technology.

    Whether a product is designed for use on a 1G or 10G network is an important (and contentious) issue within the market. The issue has gained increased relevance in the past 12 months with a clear split in the market between high-efficiency compression 1G solutions, typically based on JPEG2000 or H.264 encryption, and lightly compressed 10G solutions. With 1G network switches already widespread and heavily commoditised, some vendors see the future of the market sitting squarely with 1G AV over IP solutions. Whereas, others remain unconvinced and believe the ubiquity of 10G network infrastructure (and products requiring much higher bandwidths) is just around the corner.

    Unsurprisingly, each vendor expresses very different opinions (typically aligned to its product portfolio) regarding the current and future market outlook of the varying success of 1G and 10G products. Some brands are better placed in this debate and offer both solutions – strategising to let the market decide which technology will eventually win out. In reality, there are many considerations that must be taken into account with respect to each solution with applications and use cases often winning the much-discussed debate. 

    As the market develops, Futuresource expects the number of 1G and 10G solutions to see significant growth. 2017 has thus far seen significant technological developments in 1G solutions capable of distributing content at very low latency, increasing the competitiveness of these products in traditional switching environments. Futuresource’s upcoming report, which quantifies the opportunity of the AV over IP market and is available late September, analyses this debate further. It includes a vertical and application review for each solution, product and brand analyses and shipment volumes (including five-year forecasts) for low-latency 1G and 10G AV over IP encoders and decoders.

Sony Shows a New Direction for Smart Devices in the Home, with the Xperia Touch Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Sony’s Xperia Touch is a short throw projector with Bluetooth, Wi-Fi and NFC connectivity for easy pairing and streaming. It has 3GB of RAM, 32GB of built-in (and expandable) storage and is driven by a Snapdragon 650 processor. The device also includes a 13MP camera, speakers and a microphone. So far it doesn’t sound too dis-similar to a smartphone or tablet (bar the projector); where the Touch differs is in its combination of sensors and the user interface (UI).

    The Touch’s UI is a combination of touch and voice. User can interact with the projected image by touching the surface upon which it projects. Although, this is currently limited to the horizontal ‘table-top’ 23” display and not the vertical ‘wall’ 80” display, not that this is an issue as the natural surface for touch is horizontal rather than vertical.

    We tested a number of standard Android apps and the response was more than quick enough for general control and command functions, including fast moving games like Fruit Ninja and fine control apps like edjing Mix. The voice interaction is via one of two VPAs, as Sony recognises that consumers will want to use their preferred VPA rather than be dictated to by the manufacturer. As such, it offers its own Sony Voice Technology or Google Assistant, which the user can install if they wish. A firmware update due later this year will add to this with the introduction of ‘Minority Report style’ gesture controls. The user will no longer have to touch the surface to interact, they could wave, swipe, flick or click in the air and this will work in both table-top and wall modes, adding a new dimension to the UI.

    One of the challenges facing Sony will be how it is positioned and how it is perceived by consumers; especially given its price point of €1,500. As a new type of device, offering new features and a unique combination of capabilities, it certainly has the wow factor; but is it enough to attract buyers away from alternative devices? Sony thinks so and we agree that there will be high-end buyers to which it will appeal, both consumers and businesses. The ability to ‘skin’ the interface and tailor it to dedicated applications for a given setting, e.g. a hotel, or another public space like a school or airport, would expand this further.

    It’s not a private device as it is too visible/audible, and it’s not as personal as a smartphone. We see it as more of a shared device, offering collaborative and interactive use, whether video, audio, chat, gaming or for ad-hoc searches, reminders, information and instructions. The coming updates will add a new dimension and we could see app developers start to tailor apps for the Touch, which should increase its appeal. As a new type of CE product, it remains difficult to categorise but once you use it you can see clear benefits. As an analyst who gets to see a lot of products it certainly offers a unique experience and shows a potential direction for the integration of sensors and UI in new form factors for the smart home. And you don’t get to say that too often.

    So where and how does the Xperia Touch fit into or alongside existing devices and will it impact them in any way? The easy answer is to say that because it is effectively unique that it is an all-new device category and will sell in its own right. However, with our market coverage we do not believe that it is as simple as that.

    There are use cases outside of consumer electronics where Futuresource can certainly see it as having potential without minimal impact or cannibalisation of other devices. The clearest example is as an enterprise device where it can be used for interactive presentations and viewing, either in a meeting room or boardroom. It is not highly portable but it is portable to some extent and does feature a one hour battery-life, although most uses would see it plugged in to a main power source. In this use case, the Xperia Touch could affect enterprise tablets and projectors where portability is not a primary requirement. It also opens up new applications and offers an interactive control point but this would require the ability to add a customised ‘skin’ and possibly a dedicated app tailored to allow check-in, enquiries, information search, placing of food and drink orders, etc.

    In the home, there is certainly an overlap with other devices. Although not a music-centric device, its speakers and audio quality are good and the Xperia Touch could be used in place of a smart speaker such as Amazon’s Echo or Google’s Home. We would assume Touch’s development roadmap would leverage Sony’s strong heritage in audio, to exploit this device’s potential as an infotainment hub.

    Similarly, it offers almost all the functionality of a tablet with additional enhancements to how it is used (the fact that you interact with the projected image rather than a screen means it is well suited to being in the kitchen), but the lack of portability and battery life do present some limitations. However, it can offer much of that with the addition of a large screen.

    So, whilst it is unlikely to replace a dedicated TV it could well offer that capability in another room along with the other functions of a tablet, smart speaker, projector, etc.

    Generally, Futuresource believes that the Xperia Touch will have a limited impact on the other devices. Instead, we believe that it is more likely to be a centre-piece for the smart home, operating in a fixed ‘hub’ central location in the home, such as the kitchen or lounge, where it can be used by multiple people for common/shared applications within the house. Due to its relatively high price point it, will appeal to those wanting something new and different or with a need to offer multiple device capabilities and functions in one. Particularly in the early days, it will likely be used alongside those other devices rather than in their place. Over time this may change with less need to replace the other devices.

    Overall though, we see this as a halo device for the smart home and with its clever packaging of sensors and multiple user interfaces, it neatly demonstrates Sony’s new direction for its smart products. We would not be surprised if much of this evolves or is replicated over time (as the cost of the technology and components declines) with it being integrated into other smart home appliances and devices.

Pro AV Installation Opportunities - The Future for Laser Read more
Professional AV

    Following a detailed review of Solid State Illumination (SSI) 3 years ago, the opportunities identified in the installation segment have closely followed the path Futuresource predicted in terms of its strong momentum and general acceptance. 

    The versatility of the technology has created new possibilities dependent on light source longevity and projector orientation, which have built the foundation for its recent growth. However, the current and continued success of laser is dependent on its price in relation to lamp-based projection and other display technologies. 

    The practical benefits of laser have remained fairly consistent against lamp. However, the awareness of these benefits, including the realisation of TCO, remain somewhat hidden behind upfront CAPEX in mainstream applications. In Futuresource’s most recent channel research report (QRI - March 2017), 52% of the reseller base chose price as the paramount factor in SSI adoption, up from 32% in 2015. As well as this, 21% of respondents chose TCO as the main contributor to growth in Laser sales, demonstrating the disproportionate focus on upfront CAPEX, whilst solidifying the competitive dynamic between illumination types.

    In Q1 2017, laser projection volumes grew by well over 100% year-on-year in the installation and large venue segment, whilst nearly every individual brightness category experienced double digit ASP decline. However, this is not an indication of a declining value/volume ratio overall, and is actually offset by a shift towards higher brightness across the entirety of laser installation.

    Solid State Illumination was the only light source segment to experience positive growth in Q1 2017 year-on-year, whilst lamp-based installation declined well in excess of 10% year-on-year.

    A large contribution to these developments has been the range of models made available by vendors. In 2015 Q1, just over 20 SKUs were available above 6,000 lumens. However, in Q1 2017 the number exceeded 100 SKUs. Laser products now take more than 20% share of total SKUs in this segment, whilst over three quarters of all new product releases first shipped in Q1 2017 used a laser light source, indicating the potential for high volume shares moving forward.

    All of these factors are expected to harshen as laser phosphor enters the mainstream B2B segment. Significant volumes are expected here by 2018, a path which is confirmed by market entry from large brands such as Epson, which released its 4,000-lumen laser UST projector at InfoComm 2017 in June. Benefiting from mainstream economies of scale, laser technology will continue its downward pricing trend as both component suppliers and vendors invest heavily in the area. This is reflected by the sheer number of new product releases, and is also evident in reported upstream expansion plans.

    Futuresource expects that at least two leading vendors will convert their entire installation fleet to laser in the next 5 years.

    For more information regarding the development of Solid State Illumination, displays market dynamics or any Futuresource publications, please contact one of the team.

Pay-TV Companies Offering Soundbars New Routes to Market Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Sky’s decision to offer a discounted soundbar to its subscribers is another example of how the Pay-TV giant is exploring every avenue to offer a high quality A/V experience that will reduce subscriber churn and possibly attract new viewers.

    However, it also comes at an interesting time for the soundbar, sales of which have lost momentum in the UK.
    Soundbars first emerged over a decade ago and have sold over 56 million units worldwide to date. Nearly 16 million units shipped last year, clocking up trade value of $2.7 billion. Many TV owners have bought soundbars as a simple way to enhance the sound of their TV sets, whose speakers have often been below par since the days of CRT. Compared to competing solutions such as A/V receiver-based home theatre systems and home theatre-in-a-box, both of which can involve multiple speakers and wiring, soundbars involve only a few wires and take up relatively little space.

    They have proved so popular that fully fledged home theatre systems have suffered in comparison, whilst some theatre in-a-box demand is in rapid decline (6 million units worldwide last year, down 36% Vs 2015 and from 150 million units at its height in 2006). The major selling point of these was that they offer DVD/Blu-ray playback, a feature which is no longer a great attraction in the era of Netflix and Amazon video streaming.

    Futuresource estimates that around 10% of TV sets in use worldwide sized 32”+ are hooked up to soundbars, A/V receivers or home theatres in-a-box. Unsurprisingly, the ratio is much higher in N America (20%) and Western Europe (15%) due to the generally higher interest in movie watching and high quality audio in the home in these markets. 

    However, this leaves a further 90% of consumers who appear not to desire enhanced sound. In most markets, soundbar sales continued to grow last year, but this was not so in the UK, where sales fell by 7% in 2016. This is partly explained by the fallout from the decision to exit the European Union, resulting in economic uncertainty and raised prices due to falling value of sterling. But it does bring into focus the question of whether the market is in terminal decline and – if so – whether any categories will emerge to replace it. 

    Soundbar sales have often been boosted by discounts offered by retailers when buying a large screen TV. However, sales of soundbars are now trending to higher-end devices, less likely to be appropriate for bundling with regular TVs. Features such as Dolby Atmos, Hi-Res audio and HDMI ARC are increasingly appearing in soundbars, providing an excellent audio experience. A quarter of soundbars sold in Q1 cost €300+ in Western Europe. The average price paid was €265, up 6% year-on-year, so prices in this relatively mature product are being maintained by packing in additional features.

    The soundbar being offered by Sky is designed by Devialet, a French high-end audio firm which has only a low profile in the UK.  With a nominal price tag of £799 (€894/$1,043), the soundbar, which is called ‘Soundbox’, is a high-end device with six woofers and three full-range speakers and incorporating Devialet’s proprietary spatial surround sound (rather than Atmos). Sky subscribers will qualify to buy the ‘Soundbox’ for £299 (€335/$390) or £249 (€279/$325) if a Sky Q customer.

    The concept of Pay-TV operators offering soundbars is not altogether new. SK Telecom in South Korea began two years ago, by offering a set-top box/soundbar hybrid device to its high-end TV subscribers. Instead of paying ~$9 for basic UHD STB, subscribers could pay double in order to receive the soundbar hybrid box, saving them the need to buy a dedicated soundbar (assuming they did not already possess one) whilst economising on the space/wiring that an additional device would involve.

    Last February at Mobile World Congress, French entertainment services firm Netgem, unveiled its own product – also called ‘Soundbox.’ Netgem hopes this soundbar, which features integrated set-top box technology, will be adopted by telco TV operators. As with the Sky and SK Telecom devices, the aim is to reduce churn and maintain ARPU (Average Revenue Per User). Sky’s device though is different because it functions as a standalone soundbar and does not perform the role of a STB. Amongst other things, this avoids the difficulty of contrasting replacement rates – typically speakers have a longer life cycle than a STB. However, Sky’s decision to sell the device outright rather than rent it indicates that the company does not believe there is a potential ongoing revenue stream in tying the device to the subscription payment. Consumer research recently conducted by Futuresource Consulting indicates that 23% of Sky subscribers in the UK already have a soundbar. Whilst this is relatively high compared to the general population, it still leaves a sizeable number (~7 million) of Sky TV households as a target market for its highly effective marketing machine. It is reasonable to assume that the offer of this high-end device at a bargain price will encourage more subscribers to buy into the soundbar concept, helping Sky subscribers to better enjoy the service they receive and feel that they have benefited from an exclusive deal by virtue of being a Sky customer. In addition, Sky will no doubt still make some profit on the devices, which will be contract manufactured in China, although this is unlikely to be the primary aim. The company itself says that it does not currently plan to sell a wider range of devices and confirms that their priority target market for the soundbar is their current customer base.

    No doubt other operators will be tempted to offer soundbars to their subscribers, so the traditional brand leaders such as Samsung, Bose and LG will be scrutinising the success of these innovations. But they will also be considering how to extend the life of the soundbar concept now that the market growth is becoming tougher to find in Western markets.


Through the Looking Glass Read more
Media & Entertainment

    2016 was the year that virtual reality finally launched amid much fanfare but modest consumer uptake. But what about augmented reality/mixed reality? If 2016 opened the door for us to explore virtual worlds, then is 2017 the time that we step through the looking glass into augmented reality?

    Wittingly, and unwittingly, we have been dipping into the world of AR for the best part of a decade. The big headlines have been garnered by Microsoft with its HoloLens, currently at expensive developer kit stage, Magic Leap with its mysterious technology that is reportedly so good that it has persuaded a number of the world’s leading corporations including Warner, Qualcomm and Alibaba to reach into their pockets to the tune of US$1.39 billion. Not to mention Google, which led the series B round of funding, a mere three months before it canned the Google Glass AR headset. 
    The mobile phone based AR sector has not been standing still either. There have been an increasing number of trials, initiatives and applications emerging within the consumer market in recent years.

    This is helping to raise consumer awareness of the concept of augmented reality as well driving adoption. In addition, smartphone based AR will be a catalyst to the development of increasingly sophisticated applications as the consumer market moves towards smart glasses and headset based AR/MR.

    Retail has pioneered experimentation in augmented reality, notably Lowes, Alibaba and IKEA using mobile phone based AR to allow consumers to visualise products in their home, while UK supermarket Tesco has used AR markers embedded in the pages of its instore magazine. 

    Gaming has also driven mobile phone based AR. Pokémon Go generated global revenues of US$950 million in its first six months of activity from in-app purchases and businesses, e.g. restaurants, using their premises as PokéStops and Pokémon Gyms to drive footfall. 

    Social Media has not been quiet either. Snapchat has been innovative in developing AR applications with its filter and lens apps, now being replicated by Facebook. 

    In addition, there are over 250 AR games and apps in the Android and iOS app stores of varying sophistication and quality. 

    2017 sees mobile phone based augmented/mixed reality begin to take significant strides towards being something more than novelty game play and becoming altogether more impressive and, more significantly, something actually useful. 
    Apple has made a series of technology company acquisitions, which have augmented its in-house R&D capabilities for AR/MR. This will bear fruit this autumn with the launch of ARKit which, in tandem with iOS11, will enable millions of recent generation iPhones and iPads to become AR compatible.

    This gives Apple a huge reach advantage over Google, which launched its Tango Virtual Positioning Service earlier this year. However, this is limited to two larger phablet devices from Lenovo and Asus.  It is likely to be some time before a more widespread roll out across Android devices occurs, as the sensors are currently too large to allow the implementation of Tango on smaller handsets.

    In addition, mobile phone manufacturers are upgrading the specifications of their next high-end devices to be AR capable, e.g. twin rear cameras.

    The leading social media networks view AR/MR as the next evolution in mobile computing and are also making major investment in their own content creation platforms. Their long term ambitions extend beyond social media applications to AR/MR ecosystems encompassing social media, e-commerce, advertising, gaming, utilities and communication etc. This will bring increased innovation from Facebook, Snapchat, Tencent, in competition with Baidu, Apple, Google and Microsoft to establish the dominant AR/MR platform.

    Cardboard viewers will have a less significant role in AR than they did with VR. Where Google Cardboard offered users a first glimpse of mobile VR, in the AR space this first basic experience already exists, without a viewer. Card based viewers can play a part, however, only in allowing users to access more sophisticated smartphone based AR/MR apps, particularly with the move towards hands free applications.  Although, the viewers themselves are a “dumb” device and ultimately the quality of the experience depends on the capability of the handset, as this will do the heavy lifting.   

    Looking forward, in addition to consumer personal use, it is expected that cardboard AR viewers may find a role in the education sector, where the headsets would endure some wear and tear but could be replaced relatively inexpensively. The inclusion of AR content as part of the Google Expeditions education program may help drive uptake, albeit on a low level. Use of “dumb” viewers for location based applications e.g. museums and retailing may see adoption of plastic based mobile viewers as a more hygienic alternative to card based devices.

    The content ecosystem and creative toolkit developments from Apple and Google, the leading social media platforms and the roll out of AR technology beyond the high-end handsets will be a catalyst to the creation of more sophisticated content and applications in the mobile AR/MR sector.  This will drive consumer adoption of AR as an evolution of their mobile computing needs over the next few years as the market moves towards affordable and more technologically sophisticated smart glasses.

    This is taken from the forthcoming Mobile Augmented and Mixed Reality Market Update Report by Futuresource Consulting. 

RED: The Next Step in Smartphone Imaging, or the Next Step in Digital Cinema Cameras? Read more
Consumer Electronics

    One of the leading digital cinema camera vendors will be joining the battle for smartphone brand share in Q1 2018. RED, known for initiating the digital revolution in the cinema camera market, has launched limited details of HYDROGEN ONE, a RED smartphone.

    Details are limited, leaving the small, but highly loyal RED customer base, and other spectators to only imagine the technology found in this phone and its purpose as part of the wider RED offering. We know the smartphone will have a modular design, allowing integration to the wider RED camera range. The handset will also feature RED’s ‘HYDROGEN’ screen, a holographic display poised to offer 2D and 3D content, potentially bringing more realism to augmented reality content. The handset’s sound quality has also been a focus for RED development, claiming to bring ‘multi-dimensional’ sound to the handheld device. While less is known about HYDROGEN One’s on board imaging capabilities, the camera has become one of the most important battlegrounds in the smartphone market. Native AR capability is quickly becoming a more central part to smartphone camera functionality as well. With RED’s reputation in the imaging and content creation industries at stake, it is unlikely that we will see half measures with this device. 

    High-end application specific smartphone products are not a new phenomenon, several companies have taken aim at developing products with specific features in mind. A prevalent example is found with premium portable audio players being included into a smartphone device; such as Onkyo’s smartphones. Lenovo’s PHAB 2 Pro was created with only one application in mind – Google’s AR system, Project Tango. And now RED, with a smartphone to fill the pockets of those who want to go above and beyond the already high standard of mobile photography. There is room in the giant smartphone market for specialist products to find revenue, but competition is rife, especially when a standard handset offers almost everything the everyday consumer would demand. 
    The timing of these products is key; we are at a point where smartphones can handle the intensity of these applications. Smartphone processors now allow for so much more than was imaginable 10 years ago; streaming lossless audio files would have been impossible, never mind the real-time processing of 360° VR worlds. The handling of incredibly large and complex files can now be done with a handheld device, and increasingly the mobile bandwidth required for these demanding applications on-the-go, which 5G will only accelerate. Thus, it is making more and more sense to bundle demanding features into one device. For RED, any earlier entry to the smartphone market would have resulted in serious compromise on quality, given the lacking technology at the time.

    Despite imaging’s importance in smartphones, camera vendors have not always transitioned well to the smartphone form-factor. Hasselblad, a high-end digital camera vendor, created a camera module for Motorola’s Z smartphone range, but was received with mixed reviews and overall was not considered an upgrade compared to other smartphone cameras. Furthermore, Hasselblad’s positioning of the camera module was questionable. The ultra-high-end imaging brand, and its partnership with Motorola, a middle market smartphone vendor, was a mismatch in terms of product positioning. Why would a sub $300 camera attachment, made for a middle market phone, attract the discerning customer base of Hasselblad owners away from their $10,000 cameras? 

    However, looking at RED’s smartphone as an extension of their existing, professional targeted line of products, the HYDROGEN One becomes an even more interesting case. In a market where a large proportion of the cameras in use are rented, RED has seen a greater personal ownership of cameras than other brands at the higher end of the market. RED has marketed what are traditionally B2B products, as B2C products, creating a personal demand for RED cameras not solely based on their imaging quality, but also the character of the brand. What exactly RED’s smartphone will bring to their ecosystem in terms of technology, or its value proposition to the average consumer, is not yet clear. As more details about the phone are released, we will better understand its targeted position in the smartphone market and just how revolutionary the technology found in the phone will be, either as an extension of an already high-tech camera ecosystem, or as a product that will add significant improvements on blossoming mobile content technology. 


1" Sensor Pro Camcorders Take Centre Stage in 2017 Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    The global pro camcorder market is currently undergoing the largest shift in dynamic since the introduction of the large sensor product in 2010. The 1" sensor segment is gathering momentum in the global pro camcorder market. Pitched at the low end of the market with models ranging in price from roughly $2000- $3500, this relatively new category of camcorder offers the benefits of a larger image sensor alongside the robust capabilities of a traditional fixed lens camcorder.

    Sony pioneered the 1" sensor category with the launch of the PXW-X70 in the latter half of 2014, and has followed this by introducing the HXR-NEX100 in 2015, and the 4K capable PXW-Z150 in early 2016. 

    Sony isn’t the only brand to try and capitalise on this market, with Panasonic entering the segment with its HC-X1 and UX series camcorders, and Canon unveiling its second XC series camera, as both manufacturers increase their offerings of 4K capable products. The bolstered range of camcorders has only served to invigorate this new product category, with worldwide volumes in 2016 up by 129% on 2015.

    When considered against professional camcorders of different sensor sizes at comparable price points (less than $5000), the 1" sensor category has quickly risen in popularity in under three years to hold 26% volume share in this price band in 2016 and is set to overtake 1/3" as the most popular sensor size at this price point in 2017. 

    Tied into this is the transition to 4K. Only image sensors of ½" and greater are currently used in 4K camcorders, as larger sensor sizes are necessary to deliver the higher resolution of 4K video. 1/3" cameras are limited to offering HD as a maximum resolution at present, making them a less desirable option compared to a 4K model at the same price point for anyone looking to futureproof their purchase.

    However, the main reason for the 1" sensor segment’s success is that it is able to offer many of the desirable benefits of a large sensor (4/3" or larger), at a more affordable cost. Large sensor camcorders have become increasingly popular in recent years due to their improved performance in low light over smaller sensor camcorders and the ability to achieve a desirable shallow depth of field, commonly associated with a high-end cinematic aesthetic. 

    This trend has also affected the low-end of the market. In recent years, sub $5000 camcorders have faced increasing competition from interchangeable lens cameras due to the advancing video capabilities of DSLRs and mirrorless cameras. Whilst interchangeable lens cameras have thrived with independent filmmakers, and as a low-cost way of adding additional cameras into pre-recorded TV productions, they are not well suited for all applications and often require additional peripheral equipment to optimise them for particular types of shoot, increasing their overall cost of ownership.

    The increasing prevalence of web video in marketing and customer engagement is creating more opportunities for companies that do not come from a traditional broadcast or production background to use video in their business. These companies are often looking for a simple solution that is ready to use.

    This is where the current range of 1" sensor cameras excels. They are able to cater to the demand for bigger sensors, whilst providing all the benefits of a traditional camcorder: superior autofocus, dedicated buttons, XLR audio inputs, longer recording times and ND filters out-of-the-box. 

    Crucially, the current range of 1" sensor camcorders are also fixed lens, meaning that the total cost of ownership is kept low (no additional lenses needed) and they can be used in a run-and-gun style while offering a shallow depth-of-field: the best of both worlds for some at the lower end of the market where flexibility is a key requirement.

    It is clear that the emergence of the 1" sensor category of camcorders is an exciting new development in the overall market. These relatively low-cost camcorders have been able to satisfy two crucial trends, the desire for 4K acquisition and demand for bigger sensors in fixed lens camcorders. Such has been their success, Futuresource forecasts that in 2017 1" sensor camcorders will become the most popular sensor size, accounting for 27% of worldwide volumes of all professional camcorders tracked. 

VR in Schools and Why Educational Content Suppliers Should Care? Read more
Education Technology

    Major educational ICT providers are promoting VR solutions to K-12 education, typically partnering short form, supplementary content experiences with low grade hardware. This strategy is expected to result in significant levels of VR headset ownership in the school systems of markets including the US & China. This install base will serve up potential users for publishers seeking to provide VR content but while many potential use cases exist the model for deploying paid for VR content to schools at scale remains unproven with usage expected to be limited to freemium content in most instances. Despite this, the inclusion of VR experiences within courseware will provide a point of differentiation for publishers and an early mover advantage for those quick to embrace the new technology.

    It’s no secret that the performance of VR technology in consumer markets has fallen below expectations. As with many new technologies, the possibility of what could be achieved has a habit of taking precedence over the realities of utilisation and deployment, inflating projected adoption curves. In these cases, providers heavily invested in the space are quick to explore opportunities in vertical markets, forging partnerships with sector focused suppliers and investing in content development to raise awareness and create use-cases. For the VR industry, K-12 education is just one of the vertical markets on which suppliers are now betting, but one that offers a large potential audience and real opportunities for the technology to cut costs, increase student safety and improve learning outcomes.

    There are two major players (both with a hand in the consumer VR space) heavily investing in K-12 focused VR programs.  

    Google has partnered with hundreds of content creators, developing over 600 free to access Expeditions (learning focused virtual tours). Google resells low-end all-in-one mobile VR hardware kits for classrooms through its channel partners. Increasingly, these kits will be offered as additional value adds to school districts buying mobile PC devices and used as loss leaders to support larger ICT product and service deployments. This is expected to boost adoption in the US (Google Chromebooks account for close to 60% of US K-12 education PC shipments) where Futuresource forecasts 100’s of thousands of these low-end VR devices will be in use in schools by 2021.

    In China, games developer Net Dragon is heavily investing in VR technologies for both gaming and education. Following its acquisition of interactive whiteboard manufacturer Promethean, the company has increased focus on the education market and has been running VR trials in schools since 2016. With special funding made available for schools to support the deployment of “innovative technologies” and a use it or lose it attitude to these programs adoption is forecast to be significant in the mid to long-term. While Net Dragons business model for deployment remains unclear at this time, a combined hardware/content proposition seems likely.

    This development poses a number of questions for content publishers servicing the education market. What threats and opportunities will this growing install base of VR hardware present?  What percentage of schools that invest in a VR hardware package will then seek additional content, and will this create a revenue opportunity?   

    The use cases for VR technology in education are as varied as the curriculum. Virtual school trips to enhance learning in subjects like history and geography, digital lab experiments, the exploration of anatomy to enrich the sciences and the transportation of students to restaurants and markets in foreign lands to provide more authentic language learning experiences. Despite a wealth of potential applications concerns around the management and extended usage of VR hardware is expected to limit the adoption of VR to short form supplementary experiences in most education settings, restricting the ability of publishers to directly monetise VR content.  

    Futuresource’s latest report on immersive technologies in the education market provides analysis of trends and forecasts for five core VR content categories, assessing the business models supporting the deployment of this content to students. As the categorisation below highlights, the majority of VR content will be provided to schools either without charge or as part of broader courseware offerings, without differentiation in pricing at the point of sale to end-users.

    So, while user numbers of VR in K-12 education environments are expected to rise, the majority of users will only be exposed to content that is not directly monetised. Most users may only access a 10 minute VR experience, no more than a few times a year.  Schools will not seek to purchase additional premium content, relying solely on freemium solutions that are typically provided with the VR hardware or as a value add to core curriculum courseware.

    For educational content suppliers, the revenue opportunities from VR in the mid-term are likely to be limited. What VR will present is an opportunity to differentiate products through the inclusion of VR and 360 video content. As an example, leading educational publisher Pearson is currently developing over 200 VR experiences for incorporation into its robust range of courseware’s.  Other providers across areas like STEM, language learning and subscription video on demand are following suit, creating an early mover advantage and a clear point of differentiation in established product categories. While the value future end-users will place in VR enabled solutions is yet to be determined, there is enough investment in the space for educational publishers and content providers across a spectrum of categories to take note of these developments.

Evolution of the Classroom & Meeting Space Having Substantial Impact on Display Market Dynamics Read more
Professional AV

    The displays industry has entered a phase of flux – several factors are contributing to a period of unparalleled product convergence across multiple applications. This shift is leading to discernible uncertainty among market players up and down the channel. However, change does not necessarily mean decline – in fact, it often generates opportunity. The question is: where is this opportunity?

    Futuresource has been tracking the displays market for over 15 years. Its tracking of projection, LCD and LED technologies means that it is capable of analysing how & where these categories are competing and therefore, able to predict dynamics moving forward.

    In the meeting room, the rise of remote communications and device connectivity/collaboration is redefining display needs – leading vendors to embed such tools in their solutions. This trend is occurring at a time when the meeting room itself is changing as ‘huddle spaces’ become increasingly popular and are driving adoption of consumer TVs in this space, therefore limiting the demand for large format displays such as projection. 

    The classroom is also evolving – new learning styles based around digital content is not only diverting funds away from front-of-classroom displays, but changing the structure of the classroom itself. Schools across the world are increasingly moving away from the ‘Eyes Front’ structure in favour of a ‘Group/Collaborative’ arrangement using personal computing devices. This trend is eroding not only the relevance of interactive solutions, but akin to the corporate space, limiting the TAM for large format displays. 

    The higher-value public display application is also not immune to change - product dynamics here are also shifting as advances in NPP LED is driving developments in other display technologies as they each battle to defend their relevance across numerous sub-verticals.

    But that does not mean that there aren’t exciting opportunities for large format displays moving forward: conference rooms; lecture theatres; retail; leisure/hospitality all present areas of potential growth – whilst replacement demand in corporate/education should not be overlooked. 

    Utilising its 15 years’ experience of tracking the global display market, Futuresource intends to thoroughly answer this question of opportunity by providing a comprehensive outline of current and future market dynamics in a new report available at the end of July: ‘Professional Display Strategic Market Overview’.

The Age of Digital First Talent Read more
Media & Entertainment

    At Futuresource’s recent New Content Horizons event in London, the closing keynote was presented by Gleam Futures CEO Dominic Smales. Gleam is the talent management behind the likes of Zoella, Marcus Butler, Jim Chapman and Victoria McGrath from IntheFrow, names perhaps not instantly recognisable to everyone but certainly to the digital-first generation around the world and with fan engagement larger (and more measurable) than some more widely recognised A-list celebrities.

    Like more traditional celebrities, they are the stars of videos; however, ones that are self-produced, generally at home, about their hobbies and interests and uploaded to YouTube. A simple proposition, yet each of the above names has a following in excess of 1 million with talent like Zoella racking up northwards of 18 million followers on YouTube, in addition to continually rising coverage across all platforms.

    Dominic illustrated the incredible influence and power these people/brands have with content potentially more valuable than what is usually thought. Consumer brands are already taking advantage of this reach, and the entertainment world is beginning to recognise this as a valuable medium too.

    So, what’s behind all the fuss? 
    Authenticity has been fundamental to the ever-expanding reach of these individuals. A relationship is built with the audience, enabled by the two-way connection social media allows. In figures, the recognition these new-found celebrities garner is similar to Hollywood A-listers, but perhaps still not considered to have the same level of respect. However, as this industry grows, that is sure to change. When leading e-tail sites run out of stock of an outfit promoted by Victoria McGrath or bookstores are shut down due to overcrowding for a book signing of Zoella, how could it not?

    And whilst these stars aren’t in high budget action films or dramatic TV shows, the honesty and simplicity of their videos are still resonating and having a different impact. These videos are relatively low budget, still have high quality visuals, but don’t require expensive props and settings. What this allows for is quick and frequent content, responding to the demands of a highly tech savvy, on-demand audience that can’t wait for the production schedule of a network.

    Then there’s the factor that these bloggers are just themselves. For a marketer, this is incredibly valuable as audiences trust in a product that is either sponsored in a video, or just casually used. From a traditional content perspective, notable characters such as this can help to expand the lifetime engagement of new TV shows and films if utilised in the right way.

    But increasingly this “digital first talent” is seeking to reach beyond the containment of YouTube and social media, with many now opting to release their own product lines and books.  In the US, there is further progression occurring, with video moving away from just ad-funded content to stars producing films with the likes of Lionsgate, creating content as part of social content creator Fullscreen Media’s SVoD service and now increasingly venturing into linear TV shows.

    There are many parallels between this industry and the traditional talent that we are used to. Going back to the 1960s, soap operas came into the public eye primarily to showcase cleaning products to housewives - an initiative driven by Procter and Gamble. However, since then, these daytime shows (I’m sure you’ve all heard of ‘Days of our Lives’) have moved to prime-time slots and command some of the highest audience figures for linear TV. They are creating content people want to see, networks are forming around them, and different forms of monetisation are emerging aside from advertisements/sponsorships. With these foundations in place, this generation of talent are creating a new entertainment ecosystem - perhaps just more reachable.

What to Expect from ISTE 2017 Read more
Education Technology

    With the ISTE show a few days away, Futuresource will be scouting the show floor for the latest news and product releases from immersive technology providers. This is what we expect to see.

    VR/AR a Supply Side Push from The Big Tech Companies
    The early progress of Virtual Reality (VR) technologies in the consumer market has been moderate at best and poor, in many eyes. Large technology companies that have made significant investments in head mounted display (HMD) hardware are now partnering with vertical specific providers in B2B market verticals, funding initiatives to promote the use case and adoption of headsets.

    Google is working with hundreds of content partners and has produced over 600 free to access ‘VR’ Expeditions. As part of its pioneer program, over 2 million students globally have taken a headset based expedition in a classroom setting and education ICT resellers in the US and beyond have started selling ‘Expeditions Kits’ to schools. Expanding the Expeditions platform, Google recently announced AR Expeditions allowing students to overlay the real world with virtual objects on their mobile devices.

    Microsoft has been working closely with Pearson amongst other companies, to develop content for its HoloLens AR headset. Solutions trialled to date focus largely on STEM subjects with medical sciences expected to be an early front runner for adoption. While high costs mean large scale deployments of AR headsets to K-12 education, it will likely be many years off before we can expect the technology to draw significant attention on the show floor.

    The majority of OEM’s selling PC devices to schools have now launched VR headsets and are expected to demo these wares at the show. With price competition in the bottom end of the PC market accelerating, we can expect to see major PC OEM’s and channel partners bundling VR headsets with large deployments of PC products as a value add to secure district roll outs.

    Coding Robots Leading the Maker Market
    ‘Marker’ technologies have accounted for a growing proportion of EdTech show floors in recent years, with robotics a leading category in the space. Notable providers including Wonder Workshops, Sphero, Lego Education & Vex Robotics will inhabit significant booth space at this year’s Expo. Sales of robotics and coding solutions have the potential to grow rapidly on the back of global demand for STEM based learning but the market is currently underdeveloped. The ‘Coding Bots’ segment is a relatively new segment to the robotics market, with providers typically targeting elementary school children. These entry level, all-in-one, solutions like Dash & Dot and Sphero are providing a simple play based solution, targeting younger grades than the more complex ‘build orientated’ solutions from providers like Lego Education & Vex. Comparable to 3D printing, while there are some great applications for these technologies, the market is saturated with small players struggling to achieve scale. The commercial reality of the market today is that where schools are investing in the technology they are typically only purchasing a small number of robots, often to support extracurricular activities. Large deployments at a district level are rare. The requirement to demo these products is high, with the benefits of these hands-on learning technologies not immediately obvious to all. For providers, the challenge therefore is how to scale these innovative solutions when schools are unlikely to buy in bulk, but products require demonstration.

    The First Signs of VPA Technology in Classrooms?
    Virtual Personal Assistant (VPA) technologies have been mainstream for over five years, with smart phone manufacturers integrating virtual assistants into their products since early in the decade.  Making the jump from the mobile device to the home, major technology providers like Amazon & Google are now offering speakers with these assistants integrated, other devices are expected to follow. VPA’s have the potential to become the primary interface for consumer electronic devices.  Will ISTE set the stage for manufacturers to position these solutions for education environments? In the classroom, VPA enabled speakers could be used to answer questions, control AV and other connected equipment, act as a school intercom and in time, a range of applications will expand the group led exercise and instruction capacity of these platforms.

    While the applications for virtual assistant technologies are numerous, there are significant challenges when bringing these solutions into the classroom. Questions around privacy, security, content restrictions and classroom management will likely inhibit market adoption in the short term. Longer term, the potential for virtual assistant adoption in the classroom is significant. Further, these platforms have the potential to compliment robotic tutors now being integrated into adaptive learning platforms. Where these adaptive platforms are typically designed to service the individual, the initial use case of classroom VPA’s will likely be to service the group. Will we see cross over of use case and data sharing between the two, will the individual and group virtual assistant merge into a single coherent interface for student interaction?  Will the virtual assistant I interface with at home also be my aide in the classroom? These questions are a long way from being answered. Perhaps ISTE’s Expo floor will help shape our thinking on these questions going forwards.

    Futuresource’s latest report covering immersive technologies in the education market is now available. The report assesses the market opportunity for both virtual and augmented reality technologies and the use of humanoid and programmable robots in education, providing a detailed analysis of current market sizing and provision and an outlook to 2021, in both K-12 and higher education markets. For more information, please click here>>

Optoma Offers Two Disruptive 4K UHD Home Projectors - How will other manufacturers react? Read more
Professional AV

    For the past few years, 4K projection has been the reserve of digital cinema, high-end Pro AV and premium home cinema applications, primarily due to high cost of the light engines. However, key component supplier Texas Instruments (producing around half of the world’s front projector light engines) demonstrated a lower-cost 4K UHD DLP chip at CEDIA 2015. This new chip was be suited for B2B and consumer applications up to around 5,000 lumens brightness; such versatility offered significant economies of scale. DLP-powered vendors such as Acer, BenQ released home cinema projectors at the end of 2016, powered by these 4K UHD chips. While these projectors were competitively priced against 75”+ 4K televisions, with a lower “dollar per inch” cost, the ~$6,000 price tag for these projectors presented a significant investment for a prospective buyer. However, it was anticipated by Futuresource that this price would decline to a more affordable price point in the short-medium term and this was realised earlier in the week when Optoma confirmed the price of its latest 4K home cinema offerings. The HDR-ready UHD60 and UHD65 models, priced at $1,999 and $2,499 respectively, are the least expensive 4K UHD projectors to date, undercutting other DLP-powered 4K solutions as well as those using Sony’s SXRD chip and even 4K pixel shift alternatives from Epson and JVC.

    It had been expected that more lower-cost 4K solutions will enter the market, already evidenced with Acer having showcased a less expensive 4K solution at ISE 2017. Though pricing has yet to be confirmed, it is expected that this solution will be priced competitively against Optoma’s offering. While there is still a considerable pricing delta between 1080p and 4K, the latter resolution will almost certainly gain a pronounced increase in sales volume. Though bill-of-material costs for projectors are closely-guarded secrets in the industry, Futuresource believes that the greatest contributing factor in this decline in price was a reduced cost of the DLP chip, motivated by a wish to increase 4K sales figures more rapidly. 

    As observed with the lower-cost 1080p offerings witnessed since 2014, more affordable 4K solutions from Optoma and Acer will likely be extremely disruptive in not only the home cinema projector market but the projector market as a whole with 4K having the potential to preserve market value in both B2B and consumer applications as unit sales are on the decline. With 75”+ 4K UHD TVs retailing at more than $6,000, the sub-$3,000 models available from Optoma give a more favourable “dollar per inch” ratio, giving potential to attract interest from home cinema enthusiasts seeking a large screen display in the home, particularly when their budget is limited or the logistics of installing a large-format TV are difficult. However, TVs are still expected to clearly remain the most dominant home display worldwide.

    While naysayers may dismiss projectors using TI's 4K UHD DLP chip, claiming they are not “true 4K” due there being half as many micromirrors as specified by 4K UHD resolution (i.e. 3840x2160), each mirror can produce two distinct pixels, thus the chip can meet the native pixel count of 4K UHD. Furthermore, according to Projector Central, the 4K UHD DLP chip can be scientifically measured on a par with existing 4K chips (with one pixel per mirror/reflective element). Over the upcoming months, it will be interesting to see the reactions of competitors in the market, not only from the perspective of projector vendors but also from component suppliers, namely responses from manufacturers of LCD and LCoS chips.

Apple Continues Music Push, but Not Closing Gap on Spotify Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Along with its anticipated HomePod speaker announcement on Monday, Apple also announced that it now has 27 million Apple Music subscribers worldwide, meaning it has added 7 million subscribers in 12 months. This consolidates Apple Music as the number two paid-for on-demand music subscription service worldwide. Spotify has approximately twice as many subscribers as Apple Music, announcing 50 million paying subscribers in March, an additional 10 million from 6 months previous. In addition, Spotify has approaching 100 million free users worldwide.

    Spotify’s resilience is impressive – many expected a slowdown in growth after Apple Music launched halfway through 2016. At that time, Spotify had just announced 20 million subscribers worldwide. However, it added approximately 30 million more subscribers in the same period Apple Music has accrued its 27 million. 

    Spotify and Apple Music combined account for almost 60% of the current approximate 150m total worldwide streaming music subscribers (with the share rising significantly when excluding Asia). Yet, differentiation remains challenging for all services, Apple Music continues to push into original music videos, however, Spotify’s allure continues, as it prepares itself for its inevitable IPO.  

    But in this race, you must also consider Amazon’s push for the digital home, as it gathers pace and expands both its service and hardware ecosystem. Uptake of its standalone paid-for music service uptake remains comparatively low, however, its approximate 60 million Prime members across USA, UK, Germany and Japan all have access to a limited selection of ad-free streaming tracks, likely to stimulate a degree of interest in its paid for service, as too will its growing base of Alexa powered speakers.

    So, Apple Music’s growth should be applauded, but it is Spotify, which, despite the challenging finances, contract negotiations, increased competition and continued criticism by some in the industry of its free tier, that continues to lead the way, as the go-to music streaming subscription service in many countries worldwide. 


Apple Unveils its HomePod Smart Speaker Read more
Consumer Electronics

    On Monday Apple launched its Smart Speaker which it called HomePod. Costing $349 it won’t be available until December 2017 and will launch initially only in the US, UK and Australia (which combined represent around half of Apple’s consumer revenues and are important launchpads for new Apple categories). Unlike its competition in the Smart Speaker category, Apple is pitching this first and foremost as a music playback device, with powerful and intelligent bass-optimising software, and multiroom capability. Gimmicks like ordering pizzas or telling jokes were not mentioned in Apple’s pitch, perhaps aware of the increasingly formidable capabilities of Amazon and - particularly Google’s - voice interfaces.

    Like other Smart Speakers it will act as a hub to control compatible hardware with a Voice Personal Assistant (VPA) – in this case Apple’s HomeKit compatible devices, controlled with Apple’s Siri. It uses Apple’s custom A8 chip, which reportedly gives it the ability to better predict when it hears the trigger word and be able to perform real-time acoustic modelling that will shape the sound to fit the room it's in.

    Apple has resisted releasing a wireless speaker under its own brand name for several years, but like many other audio and platform vendors – the arrival of Smart Speakers has forced it to react. Competitors are stealing the march in to people’s kitchens, bedroom and living rooms with their own VPA (Virtual Personal Assistants), while Siri has been confined to smartphones where engagement, particularly within the home, is relatively low, despite there being around 0.5 billion Siri-enabled iPhones in use. 

    The Smart Speaker market has seen dramatic growth:

    • Worth $1.2billion in 2016 and on course to achieve $2.5billion this year. 
    • Products now available include Echo (and derivatives), Google Home, Nugu, JamAudio, and DingDong.
    • Smart Speakers comprised 30% of total home audio* units in Q1 in the US, compared with just 5% one year earlier. Considering the audio market is relatively mature, and the brands that sell Smart Speakers have never played any part in audio hardware prior to this category, this represents incredible impact.

    While much of the growth appears to be additive, the category has eaten into existing audio market growth. Prior to the category launching the home audio market was on course to grow 15% in North America in 2016, ultimately it grew 3% (when Smart Speakers are stripped out).  

    Perhaps most staggering is the fact that Amazon, with no previous experience in audio hardware prior to 2015, became the largest audio brand in Q1 2017 by volume, despite being available in only three countries (USA, UK and Germany). 

    A new platform battle has emerged - VPAs, as a window to the cloud used independently from mobile devices. Echo’s success has demonstrated that the mobile does not need to be the only device consumers will use to interface with other devices and cloud services, in the home. This has created a platform race almost overnight, as the likes of Google, Amazon, Apple and Microsoft seek to room-grab people’s homes with their standalone voice platforms.  

    Amazon’s Alexa is already being used in 8% of US homes after launching in 2015. Google meanwhile has been relatively slow out of the blocks since its US launch in November, with only 7% unit share of worldwide Smart Speaker sales in Q1 2017. 

    The early success of Smart Speakers does not guarantee that Smart Speakers, Voice or VPAs have a long term role to play in the home. The current market is driven by fairly aggressive price-points coupled with a high degree of novelty appeal. There are many failed CE devices which shared these characteristics early in the market’s life - ultimately they were markets which witnessed dramatic growth and decline over a matter of a few years - digital photoframes, multimedia camcorders, compact photo printers, among others. Usage of the 10,000 skills which support Alexa is extremely low, beyond listening to music, setting timers and reminders, and checking basic news and information. The amount and variety of usage also drops off fairly quickly after the initial period of use.  It is the view of Futuresource Consulting  that improvements to the voice engines will help broaden usage, along with the integration of graphical user interfaces such as touchscreens, EPGs (on TVs) and integrated short-throw interactive projectors. 

    VPAs are well positioned to be the next-generation interface, crossing over many verticals and applications.  In a VPA-enabled world we are going to use it to search online, to compile our shopping lists and make those purchases, manage our calendars, control our home automation systems and our smart devices, command our autonomous vehicles and more; plus all the services that go with them. In short, the company that controls the user interface has an opportunity to influence our behaviour, choice of services and products as well as access user data that can be worth so much in so many ways (whether better understanding and personalisation of services, packaging of content, internal analytics, advertising and marketing or being anonymised and packaged for re-sale for B2B partners).  VPAs will give companies the chance to enhance their relationship with the consumer and establish leading brand positioning. In terms of integration into devices, VPAs have very much been focussed on Smart Speakers as they provide the optimum combination of features, functionality and affordability to introduce VPAs to consumers. Future growth will involve integration of VPAs into other device categories.  Successful deployment in a broader portfolio of devices will limit the requirement for Smart Speakers and multiple device ownership.

    History suggests Apple’s entry in to the market will lift overall Smart Speaker market volumes and revenues, and it will also take share from incumbents. Although HomePod will be available in only three countries for the [all important] month of December this year, Apple uniquely can depend on big numbers at launch, and it also enjoys price inelasticity meaning it can charge a significant premium and a portion of its loyal customer won’t flinch. In recent launches of new products Apple shipped 10million Watches in its launch-year (2015), and 16million iPads in its launch-year (2010). In both cases it immediately became #1 brand with prices 2-3x that of incumbent brands/products. As a point of comparison with those figures - Smart Speakers (almost entirely Amazon Echo) sold 1 million in its launch year and 8million in its second year. It would be surprising if Apple sold any less than 3million this year, although many potential buyers will be hoping for announcements nearer launch related to the inclusion of third party music apps into HomePod, - particularly Spotify - which has around twice as many paying subscribers as Apple Music’s 27m subscribers.

    *Wireless Speakers, Hi-Fi Systems, Soundbars combined.

AV Over IP Set for Record InfoComm Show Read more
Professional AV

    Signal distribution companies have been gearing up in preparation for Infocomm 2017, with AV over IP set to take centre stage at the show. ISE 2017 saw record levels of interest and exciting product launches from a large number of vendors. Infocomm is another exciting opportunity for companies to talk about the latest technology on offer and demonstrate the potential that products have in a world where video is everywhere and so is the demand for content. With major players entering the market (think Crestron) and competition heating up, expect to see companies pushing their solution more than ever and finding unique ways to set themselves apart from the array of products on offer.

    Expectations surrounding signal distribution have grown exponentially over the last couple of years, with those in the AV over IP market convinced that they offer the future of video and content distribution. Vendors will be making this case at Infocomm 2017 and we will likely see many claims surrounding what the technology currently offers as was witnessed at ISE. Futuresource will be sending a team out to Florida to see the latest solutions on offer and discuss ongoing trends in the ever evolving industry. Notable examples of these latest solutions being unveiled in Orlando are WyreStorm’s new NetworkHD600 Series 4K AV over IP designed for 10G networks and the launch of ZyPerUHD from ZeeVee to name but a few. 

    While the market witnessed unprecedented interest at ISE 2017 and growing acceptance that the technology can deliver exciting new opportunities, it still suffers from inexperience in the channel. To combat this there will be a number of training sessions at Infocomm from, amongst others, the Software Defined Video over Ethernet (SDVOE) Alliance and Matrox, who will be offering training specifically related to Higher Education. These training sessions are likely to educate, but also be used as a further proof of concept to those that remain unconvinced. Training is very important in this space as vendor’s report that while integrators were much more open to discuss AV over IP at ISE 2017 than previous trade shows, they are still cautious to incorporate these products in installations given the new areas of expertise and skillsets that are required when doing so. 

    While barriers have continued to disappear over the last year, there remain some challenges that continue to hold back the market. Futuresource expects to see those in the industry attempting to tackle some of these issues at Infocomm 2017 and convince the broader AV industry that AV over IP is finally ready for wider adoption.

Where Next for Personal Electronics? Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Since launching with the Walkman in the early 80’s, the personal electronics market has grown to reach $540 billion in retail value in 2016 and supports a market of accessories worth a further $60 billion. The market is characterised by many failed, forgotten or fading products, such as the mini-disc player, ebook and pager, but ultimately is a market that has grown to account for 55% of total consumer electronics revenues. The mobile phone is one of the greatest success stories in consumer electronics, but at the cost of many products it later came to cannibalise.

    Feature convergence saw camera phones, and recently smartphones, almost completely envelop discrete categories within the personal electronics market through the period 2005-2013. The budding categories of personal audio/video and imaging particularly suffered. In 2007, the products out-shipped smartphones, but just three years later, smartphone demand had more than doubled. Digital cameras and MP3 players both had lost their relevance. In just one year, two progressive categories had gone from respectable demand growth to a 10% fall in shipments.

    Since 2011, the personal electronics market has almost entirely converged around the smartphone. In 2017, we expect 2.6 billion personal device shipments, of which smartphones will account for 68% of all devices, versus 1.3% of standalone cameras and personal AV products, which at their peak accounted for almost 20% of the personal electronics market volume.

    Manipulated by demand, mobile phones have been kneaded in terms of shape, size and feature-set. Initial pressure pushed smaller form-factors. The feature phone was something we needed, but its bulkiness was off-putting – we were not willing to give up pocket space for a device that could merely send and receive calls and texts. The emergence of smartphones, alongside YouTube, Facebook and Instagram, expanded the content we could consume from a handheld device, demanding a greater screen size for a more immerse experience and convenient use.

    In addition to screen size, there is a view that tangible advances to smartphones have slowed in the last few years. High-end or flagship smartphones are almost homogeneous. Competition in both hardware and software is difficult when the ‘ultimate’ smartphone design, use-case and feature-set have been found. So, are we at the end point of the smartphone? Have vendors created the ‘perfect’ consumer portable device? Has portable electronics reached its pinnacle, from both an industry and user perspective?

    New products and technologies are emerging which have the potential to reduce consumers’ reliance on smartphones; those which offer new windows into the Internet, and potentially more convenient and/or secure ways to interface with it. E-sim, flexible displays, voice UI, next generation wearables are all beginning to show their potential to influence, or even derail, the smartphone’s dominance.

    Certain smartphone functions are already transferring to other discreet ‘devices’. One example is virtual personal assistants in the home and the car. The early popularity of these devices in the home suggests that the mobile handset is not the only way consumers want to access and control cloud-based services and hardware.

    Through flexible displays, we expect to see a resurgence of the clamshell form factor, and later fully malleable smartphones. In a recent Futuresource survey of the flexible display industry, it emerged that an expected 17% of phones will include a curved or malleable display by 2021. Flexible technology will also lend itself to head-mounted displays, an important emerging personal entertainment device. Virtual reality is already a promising segment, and is the catalyst for a growing personal entertainment market using dedicated devices, moving away from smartphones, tablets and PCs.

    While the smartwatch market has stalled, the longer-term opportunity for wrist-bound devices with a range of smartphone features remains an opportunity. Already, there are clear benefits for some smart functionality, for example, greater security from a payment device being attached to the body, opposed to being loose in our pockets. As technology facilitates better smartwatch designs and the inclusion of features consumers demand from smart devices, the question of do we need larger form factor devices is raised. While it is uncertain which device will fill the content consumption gap left by the smartphone, for communication and on-the-go use, the smartwatch will soon be a rival standalone product.

    eSim is set to remove the need for a physical sim card and allow multiple device registrations under one network identity. In the distant future, our connected world could manifest itself in a series of more convenient and application specific devices and ‘connected accessories’. A market of tethered eye-wear, watches, wearable-cameras and other independent screens or devices could take the smartphone’s place, resemble the more diverse standalone personal electronics model from 20 years ago. The fluidity, and ability, to move between devices eSim could bring may provide greater consumer choice and more advanced individual technologies than are available or possible when limited to the smartphone. As the consumer IoT and smart home market progresses, we will see less and less reliance on the smartphone.

    Ultimately, we could be deconstructing aspects of the mobile phone as usage of certain functions transfer to more appropriate form factors, based on convenience, security and improved experience.

    The smartphone will, most probably, remain the most important personal electronics device for consumers for the foreseeable future, but as technology progresses, we will not rely, or be limited to the smartphone forever. The smartphone market will eventually fall. New standalone devices will come to market, and inevitably, another product will again push these from relevance.

5G - Living Life in the Fast Lane of Data Delivery Read more
Media & Entertainment

    As the 5G industry begins to move from the theory to practice, we take a closer look at some of the markets likely to be impacted.

    Why do we need 5G?
    5G is designed to deliver much greater capacity and bandwidth, which will be a fundamental part of supporting new use cases and changing the way we communicate, consume media and construct the IoT, which will be here any day now, so they keep saying. The targeted download rate of 20Gbps and upload of 10Gbps means we will have fibre-like performance available on the go, opening the possibility of greater incorporation of multiple technologies and hand-off between cellular, Wi-Fi and other LPWAN solutions. However, 5G isn’t solely about throughput, it’s also about lower latency which opens up a different set of opportunities.

    Industry association GSMA predicts over 1.1 billion 5G connections by 2025 following the first consumer roll outs by 2019 or even as early as late 2018, despite international standards possibly not being ratified at this point. Japan and South Korea are two of the most advanced in terms of real world testing, which has been ongoing since 2015 and therefore we will likely see them amongst the first movers.

    5G has the potential to enhance or disrupt many industries:

    Content Types, Access and Sharing:
    From a content perspective, we will see greater content accessibility for mobile users as well as higher quality file formats such as super high-quality audio & 4K Ultra HD video, with more live sharing and streaming across multiple devices. The way in which we use devices and interact with our content will shift – just as it has previously with 3G and 4G.

    Virtual and Augmented Reality:
    VR requires circa double the bandwidth compared to a similar resolution video steam (as well as significant local processing power to display). 5G will certainly ease that, making VR possible on the go and allowing for cloud based processing too, taking some of the burden off the local device. While many consumers on the go are reluctant to shut themselves off with a VR headset and therefore making VR on the go a moot point for some, MR/AR overcomes this hurdle, offering immersion without the isolation.

    The Internet of Things:
    Many of the planned IoT uses require low latency and improved reliability rather than higher bandwidth, so being reactive in real-time is key. This will allow for smarter transport networks, cities, factories and workplaces; and for the consumer, greater control and management of the home as well as a higher degree of automation.

    For those already with it, how it gets to you is irrelevant if it’s fast and reliable. For those without, 5G could well be the answer.

    5G can be a competitor to fixed networks in certain situations where the cost of delivering via 5G is actually lower than that of fixed, particularly for companies upgrading/laying the “last mile” of a connection. Competitive forces in India have led to a limited fixed broadband network in favour of a 3G/4G mobile broadband one. There are an estimated 21 million households (as of end 2016) with fixed broadband connection, yet over 300 million cellular subscriptions, and many more prepaid. 5G can broaden that appeal, not just in India, but in many developing countries. 

    The Automotive Industry:
    Short term, automotive manufacturers and their partners are looking at expanding the internet connected capabilities of vehicles and including features such as Navigation, Insurance, Safety, Traffic, Emergency Services, Diagnostics, Social Media, Productivity, Media/Entertainment, Web Browsing, Commerce/Payment and Communication.

    Longer term, 5G will be essential to fully-autonomous cars and the future of our road systems. However, Futuresource believes that this will take time to come to fruition as there are many different elements and stages to be developed, tested and implemented. Already, companies including Google and Tesla are active in this space but wider roll out requires infrastructure and more advanced connectivity for fully-autonomous vehicles, and therefore they remain a longer-term goal that will take 10 years to realise.

    In Summary
    Initially, many of these uses for 5G may seem unnecessary to our current technology and way of thinking but connected devices will change with the roll out of 5G, just as they have with terabytes of storage, development of the cloud, LTE and more. Networks will adapt to demand and capacity which will introduce new business models for consumers, B2B and mission critical offerings. Throw quantum computing into the mix and the speeds of command and control and data processing that could be made possible then it is not just human behaviour but also devices that will dramatically change.

    Ahead of 5G, major infrastructure vendors are pushing what can be delivered with 4G (whether termed 4.5G, pre-5G or a similar term) as they look to pave the way for 5G’s introduction.  These advances in network bandwidth, flexibility and capacity will see Mobile Network Operators (MNOs) able to provide faster services to more people and devices,
     which Futuresource expects will lead to companies gearing up to monetise many of the above use cases, providing an early indication of what is in store when full fat 5G arrives in earnest.

    This report provides an insight into the issues which will be investigated in more detail in the upcoming Futuresource Report –Connected Consumers: The Ever Increasing Importance of Internet.

VR - What's Going on Beyond the Hardware Read more
Media & Entertainment

    When taking stock of the VR ecosystem, it is clear that the commitment to driving the sector towards eventual success is as strong as ever. From a hardware perspective, continued innovation combined with price erosion is grabbing consumers’ attention whilst the big investors in VR such as Facebook are providing clear evidence of their ongoing VR push. At its recent F8 conference, Facebook outlined a VR strategy that spanned from social media through to 360 video capture (we’ll discuss its closure of Oculus Studios in a second).

    And this push is paying dividends, Futuresource’s consumer research panel ‘Living with Digital’ reported 9% of consumers across the UK, the US, France and Germany have tried VR as of December 2016, 3% percentage points in the right direction from six months previous. So, hardware is rolling out but if consumers don’t have any content to engage with on these devices, the longevity of this segment will be short-lived. 

    Gaming has been the early consumer win for VR, immediately monetised through a core demographic that is typically less price sensitive than most and having paid hundreds of dollars for a headset, are keen to put it to good use. Growth of Vive and Oculus, coupled with the success of the PSVR, which finished 2016 with around 1 million unit sales (plus additional revenue from games software) are ensuring that the VR headset market is rapidly becoming established. And when you add in mobile VR and the installed base of close to a billion smartphones (rising to 1.2 billion by the end of the decade) combined with ever rising title availability across all platforms, global VR games software value of USD 3.7 billion by 2020 becomes possible. 

    So, what about video, is there a future for VR video and experiences? Are alarm bells now ringing following Facebook’s decision to shut down Oculus Story Studio (5th May) and its array of talent which included several key hires from Pixar? Futuresource’s current opinion is there is indeed an opportunity, with the independent community and industry big hitters now having sufficient toes in the water to confirm a vested interest and commitment to success. 

    But the content industry now needs to jump into paid-for content. Awareness and consumption has been fuelled by the wide availability of free, good quality content but more experimentation with paid for models and getting consumers to put money back into the industry is now required. The trials that have taken place across the early to launch genres of music, sport (and adult!) need to be expanded and replicated across a wide spectrum, but what will give it that push? 

    Pay-Per-View/Video-On-demand: Experimentation with one-off premium pieces of content, improving familiarity of the concept without ongoing commitment is already underway and set to be one of the early money spinners for the sector. Key sports events for example… imagine Klitschko vs Joshua the rematch in VR, or concerts offering front row or on-stage 360 views.

    Use of Major Brand/Franchises: Studios have already indicated the intended use of VR to promote forthcoming cinema titles but the opportunity is there to extend the promotional content to become new standalone revenue streams. For brands such as Star Wars and Marvel, with whom fans will pay hundreds of dollars for collectibles, surely exclusive premium VR video content is an easy sell?

    Bundling with Traditional Content: Bundling additional VR materials such as featurettes with the main title, or providing exclusive content and behind the scenes footage, allows possible upsell while retaining income from existing revenue streams.

    Balancing Free Content with High Quality Premium Content: There is an abundance of free content currently available and this is still critical to bolstering awareness. However, in addition to continuing pushing this segment, it is critical to drive high quality ‘VR Originals’ premium content that consumers will be willing to pay for.

    Perhaps there is too much pressure on VR to achieve instant success, it’s a technology which is still in its first mass consumer generation with the classic chicken and egg situation at present of limited consumer uptake not creating a viable user base – something that Google and YouTube are looking to change. Uses and applications are still being discovered and creators are still working out what works (and importantly what doesn’t). But critically there’s commitment to invest, ensuring improved user experiences at ever lower costs, so it’s now a case of more consumers starting to do more with it.

Embrace Change or Fall by the Wayside: The New Reality of the Broadcast Market Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    The world of professional video production and delivery is changing at a remarkable rate. Advancements in technology have always meant that consumers have had an increasing number of options of how to watch “television”, but OTT is taking this fragmentation to a whole new level.

    Historically, technology changes in the broadcast industry have been driven by the industry itself. Think about the transitions to digital, to HD – they have of course benefitted the consumer, but the technology has largely been driven by broadcasters and the manufacturers of TV sets. The pervasive nature of mobile technology and the desire to consume video regardless of location means that the consumer is, for the first time, the major driving force behind technology change. It is becoming expected that all companies involved in the distribution of content, including traditional “broadcast” players, field content to multiple screens at a time that fits the consumer. Consumers don’t care if there’s a valid business model or if the required infrastructure will have a positive return on investment; consumers want content at their fingertips 24/7 and, due to the likes of YouTube, preferably for free.

    It is in this new world that the industry finds itself and it is having to change fast. Think back to how the industry looked just five years ago: the challenges and industry attitudes were very different. The sheer pace of change is going to leave some companies behind. “Doing more with less” is the new reality facing end-users across the board as budgets are getting squeezed and then spread thinner.

    This is both a challenge and opportunity to the companies providing equipment and solutions to the professional video market. Although there is less money in mature markets, there is an imperative for content creators and distributors to buy if solutions result in significant cost savings overall. This in turn is pushing technological innovation faster. Although the roads towards adoption of IP and IT centric products and architectures were always clear it can be argued that the current climate the industry finds itself in is accelerating adoption and development of these technologies.

    The speed of change means that those companies that don’t move with the times will be left behind. This is forcing companies onto unfamiliar ground as they are pulled in directions that take them out of their comfort zones. Many companies know they have to make the transitions, but are not ready, particularly in terms of personnel. This is linked to a very natural human resistance to change that this very traditional industry is facing, but this has to be overcome.

    Vendors can help through providing education, but in the end it comes down to the personnel themselves. Although purchasing processes have changed significantly over the past 15 years, the most important person in broadcasters with regard to these issues is arguably still the head of technology, whatever their actual job title may be. The operational and financial elements of these businesses are often fighting for the changes to be made, but if they’re faced with a staunch traditionalist chief engineer, change, though inevitable, will be slowed.

    The inevitability and the loss of control is daunting to some, but it is the companies who get ahead of the curve, that find new ways of monetising the situation they find themselves in, while embracing new technology, that will reap the rewards over the coming few years.

    For more information on this issue, please download Futuresource's white paper on original research here>>

Learning Management Systems in K-12 Part 2 - Supply Side Perspective Read more
Education Technology

    In the first section of this two-part blog we examined the current adoption of LMS’s in US K-12 education, covering the drivers and barriers that impact this.

    Key takeaways included:

    1. The penetration of paid-for LMS’s in US higher education is in the region of 100%, while the penetration of paid-for solutions in the K-12 sector is only 35%, as of the close of 2016.
    2. The US market has a lower penetration of LMS’s in K-12 schools than other advanced education markets like Canada, the UK and Nordic territories.
    3. The adoption of LMS solutions in US K-12 education is accelerating, partly driven by the rising penetration of student devices in classrooms (forecast to reach over 50% in 2017) and a growing reliance on E-Learning solutions.


    In this 2nd blog, we will examine the competitive situation that frames rising rates of adoption. Futuresource’s latest report on the US K-12 platforms and tools market identifies three provider groups targeting the market.

    Holistic Solutions Suppliers
    The late 1990’s and first decade of the 21st century saw significant consolidation in the higher education LMS market, with market leader Blackboard making a number of acquisitions. With a consolidated supply side, market providers with a presence in the higher education sector are increasingly turning their attention to emerging opportunities in K-12. Blackboard is an excellent example of this strategy. The company has acquired a substantial presence in the K-12 enterprise communications sector with the purchase of Parent Link and Schoolwires. These providers can now be leveraged to upsell a broader solutions proposition, including the LEARN LMS solution.  

    SIS Providers
    Growth in instructional technology solutions is blurring the lines between instructional and administrative solutions providers. Leading K-12 SIS (student information System) suppliers PowerSchool and Infinite Campus both offer LMS’s.  PowerSchool offers its LMS solution via its recent acquisition of Haiku Learning and as part of a wider strategy to become a ‘Unified Classroom Supplier’; and Infinite Campus which offers a free to access learning management system via it’s LMS platform. In addition, younger providers like Alma and Motivis Learning have entered the market in recent years seeking to take share by offering combined LMS/SIS solutions.

    Freemium Tools
    This segment is made up of a broad range of solutions including feature light and free to access solutions from major holistic LMS providers like Instructure and Schoology. The ambition is then to upgrade to the enterprise grade platform. In addition, assignment distribution tools like Google Classroom offer some of the features of an LMS. With over 20 million users worldwide and strong adoption in the US market, (where Chromebooks now account for over 60% of mobile PC device sales to schools) Google holds a substantial presence in the US classrooms. Combined with the broader productivity tools found within its GSuite, the classroom platform can be used in conjunction with other so called ‘Point Tools’ (tools that focus on the provision of a single capability or feature) to replicate the experience of a broader LMS. Think Edmodo for wiki’s and communications, Mastery Connect for Gradebook, Ogment for lesson creation, Bulb for E-Portfolio and Fishtree for adaptive learning, to name a few. The potential combinations for a patchwork LMS are numerous.

    In addition, this evolving ecosystem of tools run in parallel with the growing utilisation of course management solutions (CMS). A strong existing market for digital supplementary courseware already exists and major basel textbook publishers are actively increasing the provision of management platforms for digital versions of core textbooks - supplementing what remains a largely paper based trade, with digital solutions bundled as a complimentary addition.

    So, what conclusions can be drawn from this?  Futuresource sees three key trends impacting the space today and going forwards:

    1. The number of management tools teachers use will continue to increase.
      A teacher may use multiple learning management tools to support individual students, activities or content. Different platforms may be used for the same purpose but to serve different students. Tools are not mutually exclusive.
    2. Freemium solutions and point tools have the potential to displace the use case of enterprise solutions in some scenarios, diluting the value of more robust holistic solutions.
      ARPU’s will come down as the adoption of paid-for solutions rises.
    3. Points of unification will be important as the number of both management platforms and digital content in use grows.
      Growing use of freemium and point tools will in turn drive the requirement for more holistic solutions, used as an umbrella for other tools. In addition, data transfer standards from providers like IMS Global and Clever, which allow interoperability between platforms, will become increasingly important.


    For deeper analysis and insight on the LMS market see Futuresource’s latest report on the K-12 Management platform and tools sector, please click here>>

Ikea Enters the Smart Home Market Read more
Consumer Electronics

    In March, Ikea, the world’s largest homeware retailer based on physical geographic footprint, entered the retail smart home market with a range of connected lighting called Trådfri ("wireless" in Swedish), designed to be “simple, affordable and accessible”. The full range comprises of four lightbulbs, three light panels, five cabinet lights (illuminated doors) and four sensors/gateways. 

    Ikea is already a significant player in the lighting market, having sold 79 million LED bulbs in the last financial year (FY 2016). Significantly, they also announced that their entry into smart lighting is "just the beginning" and given their history of introducing innovative technology e.g. wireless charging (2016), it would certainly look like a major new global player has entered the smart home market.

    In typical Ikea fashion, they have been extremely price aggressive from launch: with dimmable LED bulbs, available for as little as £9 ($11.5 or €10.5) and a full ‘Gateway solution’ which includes two white LED bulbs, a remote control and a (zigbee) gateway, available for £69 ($88 or €81.3). 

    The whole Trådfri range is designed to be “plug-and-play”/ DIY fit i.e. no need for an electrician, so the bulbs can be used in any lamp with standard socket sizes. It’s a robust launch range that is price competitive, simple to use (app or dimmer) and well designed. In all probability, the majority of their customers will be new to connected home products and a decrease in price is inevitable as Ikea drive currently unparalleled scale, in turn attracting more customers (virtuous circle).

    Ikea at launch have focused heavily on current barriers – Ikea’s Home Furnishing Expert, Helen Longford commented, “We know from research that existing smart lighting technology is perceived to be too expensive and difficult to understand, so we have worked to remove those barriers to make smart lighting more accessible.” In terms of the current savings comparisons, a single Hue bulb starts at £15 ($19 or €17.5) and Hive is £19 ($24 or €22.5), both without a physical dimming device. For a similar Philips solution with dimmer (E27 starter kit), it is currently £99.99 ($128 or €118).

    Although this is a very credible launch proposition, it is fair to say that there are some limitations:

    1. The App is somewhat limited in capability compared to the competition, for example lighting control works locally only and not away from home.
    2. Coloured LED – none at launch and to be introduced only later in the year.
    3. Trådfri is not compatible with either Apple’s HomeKit, Amazon Echo or Google Home.

    Despite the limitations, Ikea have a proven track record of scaling new products across multiple countries. For example, when Ikea moved to selling only LED light bulbs, it sold 7.6 million LED bulbs in under 2 years in the US market alone.

    With over 2 billion people visiting Ikea’s website or stores, specifically to buy homewares, Ikea have a unique opportunity to drive broader awareness of the benefits of connected living. By incorporating fresh design and integration into existing products such as kitchen and bedroom furniture and appliances, customers could consider and adopt these technology innovations seamlessly. It could become not an optional add-on but straight “out of the box”. Lighting is the near-term opportunity and offers Ikea a significant beachhead while thermostats, electrical appliances, automated curtains/blinds, room sensors and automation are obvious extensions that fit well with their existing portfolio, albeit security, a smart home adoption point for many consumers, is an area from which Ikea is absent. Over time, other home furniture and appliances could integrate connectivity solutions as barriers fall and use cases emerge. 

    Despite Ikea’s efforts and ambitions, however, the smart home opportunity is far from proven, with revenues less than $4 billion globally (while consumer electronics is worth $890 billion) and growing below expectations. The fact that Ikea can deliver something which is more affordable, easier-to-use and better looking than comparable products in the market, and on a greater scale, alone, is unlikely to deliver market success, if fundamentally the products do not solve a problem or add value for the consumer. Many aspects of the smart home proposition to date beg the question “why do I need this?”. Most commercial success stories in the ‘smart home’ have come from products wrapped up in a service such as utility, security or Pay-TV subscriptions, as well as in entertainment products such as multi-room audio and Amazon’s Echo. 

    Ultimately there is no “silver bullet” in this market but if Ikea can deliver a broader range of products at low cost, offer seamless connectivity with its characteristically good design and usability features, and leverage its global footfall and eye-balls on its website, the retailer could play a role in broadening and deepening penetration of the smart home, and in doing so claim a stake in this nascent market by adding value to its existing proposition.

    This article was co-authored with Filipe Oliveira.

Is Projection Really the Future of the Consumer Display Market? Read more
Professional AV

    Last year, Hisense made the statement that “…projection is the future of the consumer display market…” – a staggering claim, not least because it derives from one of the world’s leading TV manufacturers. 

    Futuresource is currently undertaking a study to establish to what extent this statement will be proven true over the next 5 years and found that Hisense’s claim may not be as outrageous as some have assumed…

    The Chinese market has recently witnessed substantial demand for ‘Screenless TVs’ – an umbrella term referring to both laser TVs (ultra/short throw projectors that are sold with a range-specific screen) and smart projectors (home cinema projectors with integrated smart functionality). This segment is currently being led by domestic Chinese brands: Hisense, Inovel, XGIMI and JmGo (which has had success with both laser TVs and smart Projectors). These players boast a combined shipment total in 2016 that reached into the hundreds of thousands – a substantial figure that cannot be overlooked as a mere ‘fad’. 

    Screenless TV solutions are unique and innovative. They offer an array of benefits that cannot be matched by flat-panel TVs: flexibility, low-cost, 100” displays and reduced eye-strain. Moreover, laser TVs offer consumers a new concept of content viewing – one that could easily be coupled (and potentially become synonymous) with the rise of the connected home. 

    It is the design of these solutions – specifically smart projectors, that has led to the recent surge in demand – they are modern, sleek and truly detached from the standard grey boxes to which projector users have become accustom. XGIMI and JmGo have a refreshing new take on projectors, marketing them more as ‘entertainment systems’ that add to a living room’s aesthetic than just a mere display solution. 

    However, there is the question of whether this demand will continue to be retained to just China. In order to break the international market, screenless TV brands must drive awareness otherwise battle fears from potential buyers over the perceived complexity of installing a projection-based display and concern that their existing home AV set-up would not be conducive to a laser TV. Furthermore, without a major advantage over their existing flat panel solution, it is possible that certain end-users will simply not entertain the idea of adopting this new technology/concept.

    In its report, Futuresource will explore the complex weave of factors that will impact both short and long-term growth of this burgeoning product segment. Will projection be the future of the consumer display? In China (a market which attributed to 22% of global TV shipments in 2016) at least, it could well be…

    Futuresource’s Report ‘A Review of the Global Screenless TV Market’ will be available to purchase in early May.

Learning Management Systems in K-12 Part 1 - Content Digitisation Driving Requirement for LMS Read more
Education Technology

    The use case for Learning Management Systems (LMSs) in K-12 education is a rapidly evolving debate. Changing requirements for the delivery of digital education and blended learning are set against the backdrop of a fragmented supply-side, with the melding of solutions across multiple sub-categories blurring the line between LMSs and other solutions. The examination of each of these factors shed’s insight on the current direction of the market. In this first blog, we’ll examine some of the factors influencing the increasing adoption of LMS solutions. In a follow-up piece, we’ll discuss the competitive landscape. 

    The US market has always been close to the top of the class when it comes to the adoption and innovation of digital education. You read correctly my friend, whatever misgivings you hold about budget restrictions, prohibitive regulations or a less than ambitious faculty I can assure you that US is driving initiatives and conversations in digital education that are just a twinkle in the eye of your contemporaries in many other territories, even the economically advanced one’s. A favourite anecdote in relation to this, is a story from Germany where in 2014 a major AV distributor had to delay a deal to supply 10,000 units of classroom projectors. The deal was delayed as the distributor struggled to source the acetate used to deliver content for these projectors, yes we’re referring to overhead projectors, not the digital ones adorning the ceiling and walls of most US classrooms. In contrast to this, 2014 saw the penetration of interactive display solutions in US classrooms approach 60%, while the penetration of school owned student PC devices surpassed 30% with the Chromebook format making its first major waves in the market. 
    One exception to this rule has been the adoption of LMSs in US K-12 education. Here, US penetration falls behind other advanced markets like Canada, the UK and Scandinavia, where regional and central government initiatives have helped spur adoption. In the US, the education focused LMS market has traditionally focused on the higher education sector. With a strong requirement for both blended (the combination of online and classroom learning) and distance learning, intuitions require systems to both manage the delivery of content and monitor student activity. Thus, the penetration of LMSs in US higher education is close to 100%. In the K-12 sector, the driving factors for online course delivery are not as evident. In contrast to the higher education market, the classroom remains the primary place of learning. Homework is typically ad hoc, short-term tasks rather than long-term complex projects, which are more likely to benefit from the administration capabilities of an LMS. 

    These factors, alongside others, have traditionally limited the requirement for LMSs in schools. As of the close of 2016, Futuresource estimates 35% of US schools are using a dedicated LMS solution. This excludes the use of course and assessment management tools, the evolution of which is increasingly blurring the line between LMS and other management platforms (a topic we will cover in the follow up to this blog). The K-12 penetration of LMSs has risen recently, with a growing reliance on digital teaching resources in K-12, increasing the infrastructure requirements for online course management and delivery.  

    Content digitisation gives teachers and students more freedom in the selection of learning assets, expanding the teacher toolkit beyond the confines of a book cover to an increasingly diverse and interlinked range of resources. The digital transition is creating a demand to acquire and access resources in a more granular fashion. Instead of purchasing a whole text book, why not purchase an individual lesson, video or exercise? In this manner, a single textbook may be replaced by multiple standalone applications.

    The barriers and drivers for more granular resource acquisition are numerous and heavily linked to both available school infrastructure and the will of major publishers to transition to new business models. The vast majority of core curriculum textbook sales remain paper-based, with digital copies bundled in only as an addition. The market for supplementary and standardised testing content has transitioned to digital at a greater pace. Digital solutions providing Response to Intervention (RTI), Subscription Video on Demand (SVoD) and test prep platforms already operate in well established markets.

    These market segments sit alongside the growth in open educational resources, well documented by industry press. To help manage content delivery and measure the utility of a growing number of digital applications, LMSs sit above the expanding ecosystem, ready to serve as a point of unification. Systems have advanced beyond simple information repositories, integrating flows of information from various tools to guide and interpret users learning events, providing a link between the individual and the institution to boost student engagement and retention. 

    The 30% student device penetration figure we highlighted above will reach over 50% in 2017. This growth in infrastructure is one of the primary factors driving the digitisation of content and is expected to facilitate further LMS adoption. While this is certainly positive news for providers it is but half the story. As in most expanding markets, competition in the sector is anticipated to accelerate as the adoption of management tools in K-12 rises. The number of LMS solutions targeting K-12 is rising and is accompanied by increasing competition to higher-end solutions from feature light and freemium management tools. This has the potential to create confusion amongst end-users and threaten the average revenue per user for providers. We’ll cover some of the implications of this in our next blog.

    Part two will be distributed on Wednesday 26th April 2017.

LeEco $2 Billion Acquisition of Vizio Called Off Read more
Consumer Electronics

    It was officially announced this week that the proposed $2 billion purchase of Vizio, the second largest TV vendor in the US, by LeEco, China’s 2nd largest SVoD service, will not go ahead. Official reasoning for abandoning the acquisition was “regulatory headwinds” regarding overseas investment and capital for Chinese firms. However, there are reasons to believe that the takeover would not have gone ahead for other reasons.

    LeEco, founded as LeTV in 2004, has quickly grown to having around 15 million subscribers of its SVoD service in the competitive Chinese market. As part of its business model it also offers hardware bundled with its content services, with TV and smartphones being amongst its hardware offerings, along with headphones, speakers and smart bikes. As part of expansion taking it into new markets, the US part of the expansion was set to see LeEco purchase Vizio, a company only 2 years older having been founded in 2002, in a $2 billion deal. This purchase would have immediately given access to vital retail channels and the relationships within them, a household brand name in the US which the LeEco name could be established on the back of and a company commanding upper-teens market share in the US in recent years. Had the takeover gone through, it would have made LeEco a serious player in a market which has a value approaching $20 billion and given it a springboard into other US retail markets such as smartphones, worth almost $50 billion.

    It was announced in early April 2017 that the planned takeover would no longer go ahead, officially due to Chinese regulations. In recent times, LeEco has had its CEO cut his salary to 1 yuan, made cut backs to its work force in India and found new sources of funding, as it found itself low on cash during its expansion efforts. Around CES, stories circled about it looking to scale back operations in the US, with financial uncertainty surrounding Farraday Future, the electric vehicle project it has invested in.

    In place of the takeover, an agreement between the two companies has been put in place. This will see the two companies “continue to explore opportunities” of working together as well as bringing Vizio products to the Chinese market, which will include the LeEco content platform – it’s main business. Although not the original chosen path for a company with eyes on becoming a household name across the world, in the short-term the move lessens the exposure of the company but still keeps the door open for getting the LeEco content services onto Vizio hardware in the US having agreed to do so in China already – potentially its most lucrative market opportunity.

    But what of Vizio? In the short-term there will likely be little impact. Having established itself as such back in 2009, it is likely to remain the second largest TV vendor in the US and continue to perform strongly in its local market. However, the market in which Vizio is strong has become saturated with limited opportunity for growth. As such in the longer-term, it is likely to look to expand into other product categories (e.g. VR and smart home) or expand into markets outside of the US, to go along with the agreement it has now established with LeEco, which will see it enter China. It may choose to revisit filing for an IPO again, a process that it has previously explored, or may look for another buyer.

Major Changes Ahead for the AV Over IP Market Read more
Professional AV

    News that Crestron is now shipping the DigitalMedia NVX Series is the latest development in the AV over IP market, which has witnessed a lively few months. The market continues to gain traction and saw widespread interest at ISE 2017, with many looking toward the potential impact that AV over IP could have upon future content distribution and the harmonisation of AV systems. 

    Crestron’s entrance in this space is certainly a key talking point and signals that the industry heavyweight is taking the threat of AV over IP very seriously. The DigitalMedia NVX Series is an advanced piece of technology which claims to distribute 4K/60 4:4:4 over a standard Gigabit Ethernet network with no latency. Crestron says that it is able to achieve this due to a “patent-pending technique” which, if proven to be truly latency free, is likely to have a major impact on the market.

    The NVX Series is not unique in its attempt to distribute content over a standard 1G network, with several vendors launching similarly focused products at ISE. While many feel that AV over IP will truly take-off as 10G networks become increasingly prevalent, there is strong logic behind solutions focusing on a 1G network which can take advantage of the extensive infrastructure that already exists. Furthermore, solutions that are able to meet the, albeit high, demands of the Pro AV industry and do so on a 1G network will certainly set themselves apart in a market awash with competing claims and technologies.

    This being said, how close we are to latency free and compression-less video distribution remains to be seen. The market is crowded with vendors making dubious claims about what can be currently achieved with AV over IP, which only serves to confuse channel partners and end-users alike. Furthermore, issues such as latency, compression and market inertia continue to hold the market back from something more than niche use cases.

    There have been a number of responses to issues faced in the AV over IP market. In particular, the Software Defined Video over Ethernet Alliance (SDVoE) was launched at ISE 2017 and seeks to provide a standardised software and hardware platform to increase the adoption of IP as a means to distribute AV. In addition to this, HDBaseT over IP was also announced and further seeks to advance the HDBaseT standard and bring it to over IP mediums.

    Vendors across the AV industry are taking notice of the potential that AV over IP technology brings to the signal distribution space and more widely to the AV industry and we are likely to see many new developments in the coming months. With the news that Crestron is shipping the NVX range, it is tempting to see this as symptomatic of AV over IP finally being ready for wider adoption, but it is simply too soon to tell what impact this will have on the industry. There continue to be a number of obstacles which prevent wider adoption and although alliances like the SDVoE or HDBaseT over IP are trying to resolve some of these issues, there is still a lot of ground for AV over IP to cover.

360 Video - Potential and Pitfalls Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    Much has been said about the potential for 360 video, and there’s no doubt that it, along with its more dynamic cousin, VR, is a hugely exciting technology, but there are significant question marks over the commercial viability of 360 video, not least the question of finding the right content.

    Within the world of traditional content, the most lucrative content types are movies and sport, which is problematic for 360 video because the new medium lends itself to short form content. Ask yourself this – do you want to sit watching a 90 minute football match or a two hour film with a hot, heavy headset on your face? The answer is probably no, which is why the industry is concentrating on content of between 3-8 minutes: perfect for a short film or a highlights reel, but nothing longer. This will change as technology improves and headsets becoming lighter, but it is still a significant initial obstacle to overcome.

    Sport is a slightly different proposition, as the idea of being able to virtually put a viewer in a stadium to watch their favourite team is extremely compelling on the face of it, but becomes more complex when looked at in detail. Speaking in broad terms, the reason many people want to go to sporting events is to feel the experience – to feel the buzz of the crowd and to say “I was there”. They don’t go for the view because even the best seats in the house aren’t as good a viewing experience as watching the match at home. This is the issue: although 360 video can let you feel as though you are part of the crowd to a certain extent you can’t say “I was there”, but the price for this is an inferior viewing experience. There are solutions to this that are being worked on (being able to ‘change seats’ to get the best view as the action moves around for example), but it means that the technology faces an uphill struggle to convince people it isn’t a gimmick in its early years.

    Other content types such as documentaries and music videos are more suited to the technology, but will people be willing to pay for them in the same way they pay for sport and movies? Probably not.

    The good news that in terms of distribution of content, no real investment needs to be made by content distributors to get 360 video into the hands of consumers. The only constraint (as ever) is bandwidth and with resolution so important in 360 video, this will be maxed out quite quickly. 360 therefore faces the same challenges as 4K, but things will improve for 360 as compression standards are optimised for the technology.

    The tricky part comes when creating the content itself. This is still really seen as the Wild West, as uncharted territory, because most of the practices used to created traditional content up to now have had to have been thrown out of the window. How do you direct a viewer’s attention for example? With traditional content, this is done through editing and framing, in 360 simple editing is possible, but this is more to relocate the camera – editing cannot be used to direct attention or to fulfil another of its key functions – to generate empathy. Tricks such as audio and visual clues can be used, but this is still an area of development. And this is a problem.

    There’s a finite amount of time when its accepted that there will be little to no return on investment for 360 video.  After this, monetisation is key, but will people be prepared to pay for substandard, experimental content? Traditional content has taken 100+ years to reach where we are today and is the benchmark of what people expect in terms of quality of experience. 360 video is in year 3. Content creators are therefore facing an uphill battle to create compelling content that will generate sufficient revenues to keep the 360 momentum moving. The potential for 360 video is incredibly exciting, but it faces an uncertain future.

Pay-TV Lite - Coming to a Screen Near You Read more
Media & Entertainment

    After many rumours, YouTube TV launched at the beginning of 2017, making its first foray into Pay-TV Lite, the relatively new but already competitive market distorting the lines between traditional pay-TV bundles and online video services. This move comes as a breakaway from the ad-funded content YouTube built its “1 billion hours viewed per day” reputation upon; and they are not the only ones diversifying in this way with MSOs (Multiple Service Operators) already staking a claim and a multitude of others coming down the pipe.

    With SVoD pushing down consumer price expectations for entertainment, Pay-TV operators have been struggling to retain their traditional high value customer bases, indicated by the collective loss of over 1 million subscribers by US operators in 2016.

    US households now currently spend $88 per month on average for pay-TV services, close to 6 times higher than homes spend on SVoD (a gap which is closing, as multiple SVoD service take up rises – currently standing at 1.6 per subscribing household). Pay-TV Lite meets this delta in the middle, with typical monthly fees of $35.

    Dish Network was the first of the Pay-TV giants to push the button on Lite services, launching Sling TV in Q115 accumulating an estimated 1.2 million subscribers since. DirecTV Now launched in December 2016, supported by AT&T’s broadband network and zero-rated on its mobile network, gaining 200,000 subscribers in its first month.

    As it may seem a natural progression for MSOs, online video services are digressing to offer this too.

  • PlayStation’s Vue service already has close to 1 million subscribers 

  • Hulu which had accumulated 14.6 million subscribers for its SVoD service by the end of 2016, is moving to linear, most recently signing to offer channels from A&E networks on top of deals with CBS, Disney and Turner Networks. 

  • Amazon Channels offers a virtual channel aggregation platform already includes HBO, Showtime and Starz. Using the proposition to further build retention and revenue from its Prime membership base. Amazon has also entered the bidding war for NFL streaming rights, currently held by Twitter.With Netflix continuing to dominate the SVoD market (48% share in the US), and competition unable to maintain pace on a like-for-like proposition, Lite differentiates and critically provides additional revenue streams. But this isn’t where the competition ends…

  • The social media revolution has created a breeding ground for new content creators which many Hollywood studios are increasingly partnering with to tap into this following; with Facebook having access to almost a third of the world’s population, this comes as little surprise. Both Twitter and Facebook have been acquiring live rights and created video specific apps in order to create a base in the live video ecosystem. A culmination of these factors could see both parties release their own Lite proposition. No other online service has this power of reach and engagement, so it would be crazy to not tap into it.

    So what next? Comcast is gearing up to launch its Lite service nationwide, Hulu continues negotiations for further channels, rights bidders now include social media platforms, so the cogs are all in place for further disruption. 

    Oh, and just one more. There’s just Apple left now to react; securing rights to Carpool Karaoke made famous by Britain’s favourite export James Corden and recently commissioning its first Original Series. Surely its intentions are clear…

Centrica: A Case Study in Connected Home Innovation Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Energy supply and service giant Centrica PLC recently announced profits in 2016, which topped £1.5/$1.9 billion, on a turnover of £27/$34 billion. The FTSE 100 company owns a range of brands including: British Gas, Hive, Bord Gáis Energy (Ireland), Direct Energy (USA) and Dyno and has placed strategic focus on Connected Home, as outlined in its publicity below.

    For an energy company, its strategy is unusual in that its success has come through deep vertical integration rather than through 3rd party partnerships (eg with Nest) and by the creation of a new brand – Hive – to support its move into the innovative, early adopter smart home market and remove the need to be a British Gas customer.

    The main propositions that have been developed to date are:

    • Hive Home – a range of smart devices to enable home automation including a thermostat, smart plug, motion and window/door sensors and an LED light bulb.
    • My energy (British Gas) – a personalised insight into home energy use.
    • Boiler IQ (British Gas) – remote identification and reporting of faults to support predictive maintenance.

    The first thermostat was launched in September 2013 in conjunction with AlertMe, a Cambridge based company who also provided a basic energy insights product under the British Gas brand. The energy insights product (my energy) was subsequently re-developed in house as a fully digital proposition using smart meter data and offered free of charge.

    In March 2015, AlertMe was acquired to ensure full ownership of the core technology platform and the much-improved Hive 2 thermostat was launched in July 2015. Subsequently, Boiler IQ was launched in March 2016 and in August 2016 FlowGem was acquired to support the development of a leak detection product.

    Over 500,000 Hive connected hubs are now installed, and the company is the market leader in smart thermostats and my energy is available to all 3.3 million British Gas smart meter customers. Around 30,000 Boiler IQ devices are now in use. Internationally, Centrica expects to invest £500/$633 million (OpEx and Capex) in this area by 2020 and is now expanding to Texas via the Direct Energy brand.

    So how has Centrica achieved this? Some of the reasons include:

    1. The Connected Homes operating model. The business was founded on lean start-up/agile principles as a stand-alone entity based in central London. A significant proportion of the employees come from non-energy industries and were familiar with cutting edge technology. In addition, it was run as a product centric company based on customer insight and rapid iteration.
    2. The development of the separate Hive brand supported a mass market launch to both British Gas and non-British Gas customers, together with acceptance as a technology innovator (compared with the British Gas brand).
    3. Sales channel reach – British Gas has a significant sales and engineers force who can install and maintain these products. In addition, they already offered support for gas boilers under HomeServe and therefore Boiler IQ was a natural extension.
    4. Significant marketing budget was available through the parent and there has been heavy promotion of products to British Gas users.
    5. British Gas has been at the forefront of the UK smart meter roll out, enabling the business to offer powerful energy insights to a significant number of customers using 30 min data free of charge.
    6. Investment levels – Centrica has, and continues to invest a significant amount of budget in the development of a digital capability, believing it will offer a significant differentiator in the market.


    Some of the business benefits to the parent company include:

    1. Additional revenue and margin through the sale of hardware.
    2. The development of new services revenues through Boiler IQ (£3/$3.80 per month) and Hive Live (£4.99/$6.30 per month).
    3. Churn reduction by being able to clearly show customers the energy consumption of their home for example and ways in which they could save.
    4. NPS (Net Promoter Score) improvements through association with more innovative solutions, putting customers in control of their spending and demystifying their bill.
    5. Enhanced stance with the regulators by showing a clear investment in trying to pro-actively assist customers in reducing their energy consumption.
    6. Use of smart meter data to enhance energy insights for pre-smart customers i.e. those who do not have a smart meter currently.
    7. Proof of concepts such as my energy live offering near real time – i.e. less than 10 second data – from the home, viewable via an app. This offers significant benefits to prepay energy customers for example, so that they can ensure they are never out of credit.
    8. Energy forecasting can be made more accurate using the energy data and analytics capabilities that are available through the deployment of smart meters.
    9. Development of new tariffs such as British Gas “HomeEnergy FreeTime” which offers free electricity on a Saturday or Sunday.


    In the future, such solutions could support the shift to distributed generation and storage (e.g. batteries), peak load management (of the grid), more innovative demand response/ ‘power-by-the-hour’ energy pricing and new business models using demand level disaggregation which can analyse individual devices in a home.

    Meanwhile, current users of Centrica services benefit from the additional insights they - and their supplier - now have of the energy they use, enabling more control and potentially greater savings. In addition, the offer of Hive smart home products to households that do not currently take Centrica services extends the reach and profile of the company to a wider audience.

Are Classroom Engagement Tools a Threat or an Opportunity for Enterprise Communication Providers? Read more
Education Technology

    School to parent communications are an essential part of the day-to-day running of a school. The requirement to notify guardians of school closures and events, absenteeism and student progress present a significant operational burden, one which is often best handled by a dedicated management platform.

    In the US, most K-12 public schools use an enterprise grade communications platform with the penetration of solutions estimated to be above 90%. These platforms help centrally manage formal mass communications via multiple channels including voice, email, SMS text and web applications. These platforms are typically designed for one way information delivery, a sound horn for schools to reach a broad audience. Over time, platforms have become increasingly sophisticated with deep integration into Student Information Systems (SIS) and other school based management platforms; linking student events to automated messaging and alerts. Despite a heavy reliance on these platforms, the thrust of usage remains one to many, the institution to the individual, not a two-way conversation between peers.

    The market for these platforms has seen significant consolidation in recent years, with leaders West (School Messenger) and Blackboard each making a number of acquisitions. Consolidation of the supply side, combined with a highly penetrated market, has spurred providers to seek new opportunities, diversifying product portfolios to drive revenue and increase customer retention. The development of bespoke mobile applications & websites, tools to enable and promote social media engagement and safeguarding tools to monitor communications are all areas of development, providing new growth opportunities.

    While back office solutions matured, and diversified, tools targeting the classroom have rapidly grown the user-base amongst students, teachers and parents. Web-based solutions, like messaging application Remind (which claims use in 70% of US public schools) and behaviour management tool Class Dojo (which claims use in 90% of US K-8 schools), offer free-to-access platforms, generating classroom engagement through multi-way communications with a focus on informal user interaction linked to classroom events. Integrating features like reward systems, peer-to-peer messaging and a suite of Emoji’s, these platforms resonate with young audiences, well versed in social media conventions.

    To-date, the classroom focused freemium alternatives have not displaced the requirement for a dedicated enterprise-grade communications platform. Instead, freemium platforms are typically being used as a complementary addition to products from suppliers like West and Blackboard. Classroom solutions typically manage informal interactions while enterprise platforms retain ownership of the more formal aspects of school to parent communications. While freemium tools have amassed large user-bases, most customers are accessing these solutions without charge. As such, these businesses are, in some cases, yet to prove the capacity for reliable revenue generation.

    This is starting to change. In early 2017, Remind introduced school and district packages with advanced features including the ability to integrate Remind into the SIS, provide analytics on usage and on-boarding solutions for school staff. Through this strategy, the provider is replicating many of the more advanced features and functionality typically found in enterprise grade communication platforms.

    The objective of monetising classroom communication solutions will increase the competition between freemium and enterprise platform providers. Freemium web-based solutions like Remind will seek to monetise from the ground up, mobilising support from existing student, teacher and parent user-bases by offering paid-for premium features.

    Enterprise platform providers, which already have contracts in place with district communications leaders, are expected to increase focus on the provision of web-based applications and their role in the classroom, formalising a multi-way communications ecosystem by directly appealing to administrators.

    The victors in this rapidly evolving segment remain to be seen. What is abundantly clear is that a growing reliance on web-based communication technologies in our lives as parents, professionals and class mates will undoubtedly impact the market landscape for education solutions moving forward.

    The above information was taken from Futuresource’s recently released research covering key trends in and the outlook for and adoption of management platforms and tools in K-12 education. Covering the US & UK markets the report looks at developments across and range product categories servicing both the classroom and back office.

What's Next for Pro AV Tech in 2017? Read more
Professional AV

    It seems slightly odd to be referencing ‘the consumer electronics’ (CES) trade show when being asked to consider the big trends in Pro AV for 2017, but here I am kicking off with a nod to CES. As my colleagues from our CE division returned from Vegas and we discussed the hot trends from the show floor, I am reminded again that convergence, certainly in terms of innovation and transferable learnings, is such an important part of our lives. Indeed, never have the CE and B2B analysts at Futuresource worked so closely together. It is also slightly depressing to note that, in some instances, the CE sector has leapt ahead where the Pro AV industry was once so proud to be the cocoon for product innovation and development before it transferred in scale to the consumer sector. Let’s consider some examples. 

    At CES, voice recognition and AI stole the show front and centre for tech giants like Microsoft, Google, Amazon and Apple. This isn’t new, it hasn’t caught the industry off guard, yet in the Pro AV space it’s rarely referenced, despite having the potential to dramatically impact control, automation and to a point display technology. Simplicity is key and will underpin much of the electronics industry in the future. Though not a learning from CES, I still find it amazing that we have only recently begun to see the videoconferencing sector move beyond dedicated spaces/rooms when away from the office, most of us have been using FaceTime or Skype for many years. 

    However, most developments are running in parallel or are combining to provide a more powerful experience for an increasingly mobile workforce. 

    At CES, smart home automation was again a key theme and of course, closely linked to smart buildings and cities in our world. Underpinning these trends we have connected devices, AV over IP, IoT and further into big data, all hot topics in Pro AV for 2017. Building further on these trends, and perhaps too nascent for this discussion, smart cars were another hot theme at the show. Whilst much of the buzz and hype focused on the benefits for consumer brands, behind closed doors the benefits for enterprise were often cited. 

    Finally, Virtual Reality (VR) and Augment Reality (AR) Head-Mounted Display’s continue to fascinate consumers and demand attention at CES. There is little doubt that the consumer sector has huge potential to drive scale but some of the most interesting use cases are found in B2B environments for training, design, sales & marketing etc. 2017 will see both VR and AR solutions, not just HMD’s, grow in importance for the Pro AV sector. 

    But I digress from the original intention of this blog, which was to look at the main display highlights for 2017, it’s hard to be focused when we are in such a fluid phase of industry development. 

    At Futuresource, we talk more and more about ‘Digital Surfaces’, appreciating that each of the major display platforms (projection, LCD, LED) has a place and are increasingly blended together. In retail for example, store designers are surprisingly alert and informed to the benefits each platform can bring and we will begin to see installations that use multiple display technologies to create innovative and engaging experiences. Creativity is less of a driver in corporate and education markets but utilising multiple display technologies is no less in demand, typically projection and LCD but moving forward we will see LED become a viable choice. 

    We aren’t, as many would propose, at a point when a one of these technologies loses relevance though of course in some instances they certainly compete for the same budgets.

    The projection category has finally fallen into long term volume decline but is still the single largest display platform by quite some margin with lots of reasons for optimism looking forward. 

    2017 will see more small and large scale mapping technology come to market. Indeed, showcasing projection’s inherent flexibility has been the emphasis of recent tradeshows in the wake of falling sales in presentation applications. We expect to see a broader range of brands partnering with leading mapping specialists/integrators in ever-more striking installations. 

    Advances in solid-state technology – namely laser phosphor –  has enabled digital signage to finally became a viable opportunity for the projection industry and thus, coupled with mounting adoption in this application, solid state is expected to be the key projection trend in 2017. Further launches of laser-phosphor solutions, at both ends of the brightness spectrum, are anticipated from all major brands, whilst cheaper RGB laser is expected to be a key theme in the high-end segment. 

    4K will be the other key theme of 2017, with the first solutions using TI’s latest, and smallest, 4K chip-set launched ahead of the ISE 2017 show, as are those with Compound Photonics’ licensed 0.55” 4K chip-set. With rumours that the price of these solutions will rapidly rival 1080p/WXGA equivalents, it will be interesting to analyse how well they are received considering that the market’s core brightness segment is rapidly evolving to >4k lumens.

    For the LCD displays sector, we can expect to see vendors broadening ranges in large 70”+ sizes and accelerate the transition to 4K, critically in smaller sub 50” sizes. Though far more niche, more buzz, not necessarily commercial opportunity, will also build around ultra-thin, in some cases flexible, display technology. 

    Display opportunities in presentation environments, particularly in the enterprise space, will be a keen focus for the industry in 2017 with vendors building on interactive ranges and integrating collaborative tools directly into the display.

    We can expect to see wireless presentation features for sharing content, audio/camera for videoconferencing and even wider UC access, akin to the Microsoft Surface hub come to market. Meeting room collaboration is hot!
    The high brightness/outdoor and semi outdoor market will develop strongly in the coming year building on already buoyant in window market and, dare we say it, opportunities in QSR finally being realised. A number of important changes in supply chain dynamics, mixed with a growing demand across franchise holders will help drive this trend. 

    For the videowall space, virtually ‘bezeless’ LCD walls, with more extreme/extra narrow displays will continue to gain traction but come under increasing pressure from narrow pixel pitch (NPP) LED which has been very much in the ascendancy in recent years. After Sony stole the show at InfoComm with its CLEDIS NPP LED, and at CES, we will hear more about new micro LED and chip of board (COB) technology for NPP LED in 2017, another key development phase for the category. 

    To sum up, it’s an incredibly exciting time to be in the pro display space and Pro AV industry, but there are challenges ahead. Navigating the choice of display technology, associated specification and features will be headache enough for manufacturers, channel and end-users but adding in the other more macro trends mentioned above further clouds future roadmaps and strategies.

VPA (Voice Personal Assistants) Competition in 2017 Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Futuresource expects voice control to largely disrupt how we interact with our electronics – from controlling our in-car-entertainment, white goods or smartphones, voice is making an impact. With four main contenders in the English language VPA race, Siri, Alexa, Cortana and Google Assistant, there is a lot of ground to fight for, with no clear winner in sight.

    While Amazon, Apple, Google and Microsoft are taking vastly different strategies in terms of getting users on their platforms, and with Samsung’s rumoured assistant Bixby, speculated to be released in the coming fortnight, we have a very interesting platform battle developing in 2017.

    Often when discussing the VPA market, we also forget the many alternatives available either as smartphone apps or regional products outside of the west. SK Telecom has ‘skinned’ IBM Watson technology with the Korean Language, to offer voice commands and AI assistance in their Nugu smart speaker.

    Baidu, the Chinese answer to Google, also has its sights on bringing smart assistant device to the most widely spoken languages in the world, Mandarin and Cantonese. Although Baidu’s VPA speaker form factor differs from other leading VPA’s on the market, including a screen and a camera, the essential uses of the device remain the same – ordering food or other goods, asking questions and interacting with the smart home.

    While language coverage is one key aspect of how VPA’s will battle globally for a space in our homes, the business model behind the devices and smart assistant is equally important.

    So far, I have mentioned six companies with assistants on the market or expected forthcoming offerings, but background of these companies is important to understand the limitations of the devices and the expected adoption of their use globally.

    Apple and Samsung both predominantly create revenue from sales of hardware. Siri has only appeared on hardware that is produced by Apple and is marketed as a unique selling point to Apple products. Presumably, if Samsung do later announce their own brand of personal assistant, we will see a similar model.

    Baidu and Google create the vast majority of their revenue from servicing online advertising. While Google has made claims to focus more on hardware in the future, their hardware has usually served to forward their software or advertising products. Baidu’s business model is less varied than Google’s, with a greater focus on online marketing, meaning Baidu’s smart assistant technology will be offered to generate data and therefore better targeted advertising.

    Microsoft’s major source of business is its software, however, does gain a substantial amount of sales from other hardware ventures. The company so far has largely invested into their Cortana platform as software, opposed to pushing the assistant as a hardware device. Its PC and gaming platform could prove key strategic assets, in both business and consumer channels.

    SK Telecom had announced plans to diversify their revenue streams after citing loses in 2015-2016. The network has a range of products that the Nugu smart assistant can interact with, such as video streaming and cable platforms.

    Finally, Amazon is predominantly an online retailer. However, to further generate business on their platforms, Amazon has created several hardware devices linked to their retail products. Although Alexa has been celebrated as being a hugely capable smart assistant, it is sold essentially to drive traffic to the Amazon store and Amazon Prime membership.

    As smart assistants continue to become more popular, 2017 will witness many more vendors and products emerge in this space, and we will see how different business model manifest as consumer propositions, and ultimately, which will generate greater traction.

The Cultural Revolution - The Rise and Rise of Legal Online Video in China Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Consider home video in China and the first things that spring to mind for many are pirate DVDs and illegal online video sites. However, things are changing rapidly. The Chinese home video market is in the midst of a cultural revolution and this is largely occurring in the minds of the young, with the growing acceptance and uptake of legal paid-for SVoD services.

    Legal video websites are nothing new in China, but the notion of paying for online video content is, with the legal market having long been dominated by ad-funded on-demand services.
    Gradually, however, the concept of SVoD has taken hold and is being driven by some heavyweight Chinese companies; notably the world’s largest retailer Alibaba which acquired the Youku Tudou SVoD service in 2015, Chinese search engine giant Baidu, which owns the largest SvoD service iQiyi, on-line gaming and social media platform Tencent and leading technology company Le TV. Each is estimated to have in excess of 10 million paying subscribers and is continuing to grow fast. 

    SVoD is another battleground in the fight for consumers between Baidu, Alibaba and Tencent which has seen them compete on an increasing number of services, including music streaming, web browsers, cloud storage solutions, map/navigation services, on-line payments and social media.

    Notable in their absence are the major global SVoD players Netflix and Amazon Prime Video. The expansion of both services into China is hamstrung by local legislation dictating that 70% of the content carried must be local content and that overseas organisations operating online in China must use local data storage facilities and domestic equipment. 
    In addition to ownership regulations stipulating that foreign companies establishing an operation in China must be part of a joint venture with a Chinese company, foreign companies can only hold a maximum 51% stake in the venture. 
    As a consequence, the major domestic SVoD services have marched ahead establishing in-house content production divisions and augmenting their local content offering through licencing deals with the major Hollywood studios; Tencent with Paramount and Sony, Youku with Universal and iQiyi with Fox. 

    Traditionally, the video on demand sector has been relatively free of the strict censorship controls that have impacted the TV and feature film segments, but indications over the past 12 months are that the Chinese government is beginning to tighten regulations in line with the rest of the media industry. 

    Nevertheless, US and international feature film content is a key driver for consumer SVoD adoption with 56% of Chinese SVoD users in Futuresource’s ‘Living With Digital’ survey (published in Q3-2016) citing this as the main reason for subscribing to an SVoD service.

    SVoD uptake is being driven by the younger consumer group. Futuresource’s ‘Living with Digital’ consumer research highlighted that 66% of SVoD users are in the 16 to 35 age group. This is a demographic that is increasingly interested in high quality, premium content. In addition, they are not deterred by the concept of paying for access. 

    With monthly subscription costs typically ranging between RMB 10 and RMB 20 (US$ 1.50 to US$3.00) the threshold to subscribe is relatively low compared to other territories, making a subscription an increasingly attractive proposition.
    Looking ahead, the Chinese SVoD market has huge potential for growth driven by the desire for premium content and as the generational shift in consumer behaviour adopts SVoD as the norm. 

    Online piracy both in terms of illegal streaming and downloads remains an issue in China and add to that unauthorised account sharing. Nonetheless, the concept of legal, paid-for services is gaining a stronger foothold amongst consumers. 

    Broadband penetration continues to increase reaching 54% of Chinese households by the end of 2016. In addition, use of connected devices is increasing. The installed base of Digital Media Adaptors reached almost 44 million units at the end of 2016, representing approximately 10% of households, but this is dwarfed by the growth in Smart TV’s which were in close to 32% of households.   

    The growth in the market will occur with or without Netflix and Amazon. Both have currently stepped back from China, although looking forward they may yet aim to enter the market. But there are issues to resolve and the major domestic players may well be too entrenched with consumers and in terms of content deals. 

    Amazon may have the edge over Netflix in launching in China, having been active under the Amazon brand since 2011 and having launched the Prime Delivery service in autumn 2016.  Consequently it will have a strong consumer database in addition to an established brand awareness. 

    Further details on the development of the Chinese Home Video market will be available in the forthcoming China Video Insights Report and additional consumer insight can be obtained from Futuresource’s Living With Digital Service.   


The US and UK Show Key Differences in the EdTech Management Platforms & Tools Space Read more
Education Technology

    This week, Futuresource’s education technology team published its latest report on the adoption of mobile PC’s in K-12 schools globally.

    One of the key takeaways is the storming success Google is having with its Chromebook platform in the US market. A 58% market share in 2016 is no mean feat when competing with Microsoft and Apple, but look beyond the US and the market picture is markedly different. While Chrome is starting to gain traction in some territories, Microsoft retains the international advantage.

    It’s not just the operating system space where educational technology adoption between countries is markedly different. In an upcoming report, Futuresource explores the landscape for K-12 administrative and instructional management software in both the US & the UK. The two countries share a common language, a similar curriculum and a recent penchant for political upset, but illustrate substantial contrast in the adoption of education technology.

    Different structures for school management and procurement are a notable factor here. In the US, public schools are grouped into districts. There are over 13,000 districts but the largest 250 account for roughly 40% of students; creating enticing opportunities for suppliers looking to scale adoption and significant price competition for big volume deals. In the UK, purchasing of technologies is predominantly done on a school-by-school basis, creating a stronger reliance on channel partners and larger direct sales forces. This is starting to change with schools converting to academies (Schools directly funded by the Department for Education with greater operational freedom than convention local authority schools) and grouping together into Multi Academy Trusts (MAT’s) which operate in a similar fashion to US districts.

    The US’s district system has created demand for product categories like data analytics platforms to interpret and forecast district wide performance and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) solutions to help manage large workforces. These types of tools have a much lower rate of penetration in UK schools but are growing in relevance, as the number and scale of MAT’s increases.

    Consolidated purchasing has also supported the rapid adoption of student devices in US schools with student penetration reaching over 45% in 2016. This growth is creating significant markets for device management and web filtering tools, allowing administrators and teachers to control and restrict the digital adventures of inquisitive students. In the UK, device penetration hit a road block shortly after passing the 15% mark, with budgetary pressures amongst other factors inhibiting growth.

    Even in mature product segments, market dynamics vary. Both the US and UK show a strong reliance on Student Information Systems (SIS’s) (as most mature markets do). SIS’s are the heart of a school’s data collection system, capturing information on key indicators like student attendance, behaviour and learning outcomes. These systems integrate into a range of other platforms supporting functions like school communications, finance and cafeteria management as well as learning management and content solutions. In the UK, there is one dominant provider, Capita, the companies SIMS products service roughly 22,000 schools.

    In the US, the market is considerably more fragmented. There are over 120 providers in the market, with each state dictating its own data collection and reporting requirements. In the last decade, the UK market has seen the entrance of a number of new SIS competitors, typically offering an affordable cloud-based solution and seeking to take share from Capita. In the US, the market is now heading in the other direction; consolidation through acquisition is the order of the day with market leader PowerSchool buying up a number of competitors in the last 18 months.

    Evolving market characteristics such as these are important to note for everybody selling technology to schools. As EdTech adoption scales, the ecosystem is becoming increasingly intertwined and the functionality of product segments is overlapping. Standards for integration and interoperability are creating user-friendly environments and driving both partnerships and acquisitions on the supply side. Understanding the broader ecosystem, both at home and abroad is key for vendors looking to expand local presence and enter international markets.

The Day of the Smart Appliance is Finally Dawning Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Smart appliances have been available for many years without making much impact on the $74 billion worldwide laundry and refrigeration market, but research from Futuresource Consulting indicates that this may be about to change.

    Currently, <2% of the worldwide market for laundry and refrigeration is accounted for by smart devices, even though the world’s first connected fridge was launched back in 2000 by LG. The topic of when (or even if) these products will take off has been hotly debated in the industry ever since. Brands have struggled to propose killer applications which appeal to the consumer and such devices have been relatively expensive compared to the benefits they might bring.

    Futuresource, which first started tracking the smart home market in 2001, believes that the inflection point is fast approaching in the next 2-3 years; one which will see smart features rapidly become widely available in mainstream appliances. So why the optimism? What will drive this?

    As with so many consumer products, success or failure revolves around industry push and consumer pull factors. It is evident that the initial impetus is coming from the vendors, whilst the appeal for consumers is rather less clear.

    The vendors are convinced they are on to a good thing by pushing smart devices. LG and Hoover have committed to implement connectivity within all their appliances this year. Bosch (world #4) and Samsung (#6) have announced plans to follow suit by 2020. Key to this is the declining bill of materials cost of the electronics involved in making an appliance connected. This is crucial, as 2/3rds of consumers say they would not spend more than an extra 10% for the inclusion of smart features in an appliance.

    As a result, once a brand has decided to offer smart features and made investments in the underlying electronics, app design, support and infrastructure it now makes sense for that brand to roll the technology down through its product ranges rather than restrict it to the high-end. Manufacturers also have to plan well ahead to future-proof their devices as – unlike mobile phones – appliances have long life cycles. These factors, plus the knowledge that the first movers can achieve competitive advantage, leads Futuresource to anticipate that smart features will become standard fit for all the major players even though applications are yet to evolve. Vendors such as Samsung and LG will also seek to leverage their wider portfolio of products, which have the ability to offer a more integrated smart home experience.

    Vendors know that smart appliances will feed back a rich stream of highly accurate data on how their products are being used. This will pave the way for remote diagnostics, making repairs much cheaper and quicker and enable them to improve their products accordingly. Brands will be able to offer strong service propositions, creating the prospect of longer-term revenue streams, moving past the traditional one-off sale. For example, a brand which offers a smart refrigerator with internal cameras may be able to deduce how consumers store their food and for how long. They may even choose to sell this information on to the food industry.

    So there is little doubt that it is in the interest of the industry to roll out smart features, but will consumers accept them? Futuresource’s smart appliance research reveals that less than 30% of consumers agree that current smart offerings would provide long-term benefit. Whilst security, monitoring, energy efficiency and convenience are drivers of smart home products generally, these opportunities are not so clear-cut in laundry and refrigeration. Despite the most advanced smart features, one still has to be in front of the washer to load/unload the clothes and similar issues remain with packing/unpacking the fridge. Appliance monitoring and security is potentially more intriguing. Futuresource consumer research found that the most interesting smart features for consumers were refrigeration devices that can send an alert when temperatures rise and appliances that can inform users when there’s a danger of overheating. However, these benefits have not been well articulated to consumers, with vendors preferring to focus on more eye-catching innovations such as built-in displays on which to show menus, or even TV shows.

    Despite the lack of compelling use cases from the consumer point of view, we at Futuresource expect smart appliances to comprise over 50% of the total home appliances market by 2021, primarily driven by the industry. With a widening adoption of other smart and IoT devices driving up awareness and appreciation of connectivity benefits, those vendors whose products offer greater interoperability and can work within a larger smart home ecosystem are poised to gain market share. However, the industry will face an uphill task in persuading consumers that the benefits are so great that they should upgrade their current appliances any sooner than they would have done otherwise.

    Research Analyst Guy Hammett is working on Futuresource Consulting's forthcoming worldwide home appliances market report, due in March 2017.

ISE 2017 - The Show that Keeps on Growing! Read more
Professional AV

    The dust has settled on another successful show for the organisers, assuming growth metrics are indeed the right barometer of success! The official statistics underline what our team of analysts all felt; this was busier and larger than ever before. Attendance grew by 12% year-on-year to surpass 73,000 visitors across the four days with an extra 3,000m² of floor space added. 

    We picked up a few negative comments that the show was getting too big and too diverse but it’s not an opinion I personally share. I have been around long enough to have attended CeBIT in its heyday and understand the perils of losing focus. ISE just doesn’t have this feel yet. Yes it has broadened its focus to include new areas, Smart buildings being a great example, but all the zones are absolutely relevant to the Pro AV community. Perhaps the important point here is a more general reflection of the world around us, we have moved into a converged and connected era where Pro AV is often now part of a wider eco-system. This trend will only accelerate moving forward and we can expect the show to continuing innovating to keep pace with these changes. 

    Whilst our team of 10 analysts visited all the major zones and held meetings with a wide range of interesting companies, the key focus, certainly in terms of reporting, was on display technology. And what a visual feast we were treated to this year as LED continues its ascendancy, LCD displays become ever more feature rich and projection fights back on a range of fronts.

    Below is a brief list of the highlights across each of the three technologies. For a more detailed overview of the show, please click here to download our show report. 


    Solid State Illumination – Only a minority of brands were without an SSI projector on their stands. Philips’ HLD LED is showcased by BenQ and Hitachi.

    4K UHD Resolution – Many brands now use TI’s 4K UHD chip in Consumer/B2B-oriented projectors. Canon, JVC and Sony demonstrated their own 4K LCoS.

    High Brightness 1DLP – Even more manufacturers launched 5-15k lumen single-chip DLP products – reflecting the appetite for mid to high-brightness but otherwise lowly spec’d product in mainstream installation areas.

    Greater Usage in Mapping/Signage – Numerous vendors were showcasing their projector hardware in a signage or mapping environment, further showing the flexibility of projector technology.

    LCD Display

    4K UHD – New 4K UHD products on offer, but less emphasis on booths with numerous 4K UHD displays. Likely to be a big year for 4K UHD with adoption expected to take off.

    Interactive Displays – Interactivity combined with collaboration was the hot topic of the show, with many new collaboration products shown from both IT heavyweights like Microsoft and Cisco, but also from display vendors.

    OLED – Central to LG’s booth, with visually stunning conformed flexible displays and wallpaper screens. Samsung launched the QLED product, their take on OLED. Both OLED and QLED looked very impressive with strong colours, contrast ratios and crisp images.

    SoC – New generations of products launched, with Tizen from Samsung and Android from Panasonic, Philips and Viewsonic. Raspberry Pi slot-in device shown by NEC allowing option of smart display.

    Video wall (LCD & LED) 

    Extra Narrow Bezel – More product shown for E/EXNB across most vendors, both those who exhibited last year and vendors new to the market this year. Expected to take a greater share in coming year, beginning to challenge RPC control room spaces.

    Stunning LED Displays and New Technologies – Sony CLEDIS was the talk of the show, beautiful product but extremely costly. P0.7mm demonstrated by Planar/Leyard. Massive amount of LED seen around the show with virtually all main vendors having some offerings.

    Rear Projection Cubes –  Laser solutions brought to market by Delta (Laser Phosphor, 4K) and Barco (Laser RGB).

Capturing the Zeitgeist of BETT 2017 Read more
Education Technology

    The BETT educational technology (EdTech) show remains to be one of the global meeting places for those passionate about harnessing the power of technology in education. The Futuresource team relish the opportunity to explore the halls at this show and wish to share the zeitgeist of BETT 2017 in our free downloadable show report. 

    The emphasis and focus of BETT has changed subtly over the last few years with fewer of the major textbook publishers in attendance. A large part of the show floor was dedicated to management systems and tools for schools/administrators but digital content solutions demonstrations were relatively limited in comparison. Google and Microsoft are arguably now the key exhibitors at the show, with big crowds always visible on their stands. 

    Numerous new computing devices were announced by Microsoft and Google and OEM partners targeting the education sector. The supply chain has moved towards developing custom made education SKUs that are built for students e.g. toughened gorilla glass being utilised by some for protection against students dropping devices.

    Some of the key headlines and trends at the show were as expected. Virtual reality (VR), robotics and coding were extremely prominent but BETT 2017 also saw some interesting new developments in the areas of data analytics, artificial intelligence (AI) and smart security.

    There was a large number of VR demonstrations taking place, highlighting a variety of applications that directly support the curriculum together with enhanced interactivity, typically via standalone handsets.

    In terms of the management platforms and tool vendors, the focus seemed to be on a modular expansion of their solution ecosystems, leveraging their existing customer bases in order to cross sell capabilities and solutions. As vendors look to develop their portfolios further, a blurring of the lines between product categories and providers can be seen from an end-user perspective. An example of this is the merger between leading communications provider SchoolComms and leading cashless payments provider ParentPay.

    Analytics and various applications for artificial intelligence (AI) were the new kids on the block at BETT 2017, with emerging product categories for standalone tools and evolving functionality for solutions like the MIS and VLE already present in schools. In the back office, tools designed to support decision making across Multi Academy Trusts and those that draw insight from multiple platforms and data sources are both emerging categories.

    In the classroom, the increased use of formative assessment tools to guide student progression and the adoption of adaptive learning solutions that drives content discovery were both increasingly evident on the show floor.

    Finally, vendors selling smart technologies for access control, attendance monitoring and cashless payment solutions had an extremely strong presence on the show floor. The technologies employed for user identification continue to evolve with solutions integrating RFID, NFC, facial recognition and fingerprinting each seeing increased adoption alongside more traditional card scanning solutions, typically found in school canteens. As schools increasingly invest in EdTech solutions they are more vulnerable to targeted theft, with thieves targeting IT equipment, hence the emergence of security applications for smart security. Click here to download our BETT 2017 Show Report>>

Do-It-Yourself Consumer Electronics Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Do-It-Yourself (DIY) is a trend we see growing in Consumer Electronics as consumers seek to refresh, enhance, and even create their own CE devices, supported by online tutorials, online component marketplaces and a rapidly growing base of coding-savvy consumers.

    We have seen connectivity penetrate home and personal CE devices; however the scope of what we can do with this connectivity is often limited to the OEM’s ideas of a product’s intended use. The demand for more flexibility in the functionality offered by devices is not new; we have seen groups develop the means to update and change locked devices, for example, jailbreaking iOS devices. It is the products that allow and encourage innovation that result in such interesting consumer creations.

    The availability of make-your-own kits for DIY electronic goods is growing quickly; we are seeing products being made by new entrants, but also those established in their field. Bose, notoriously absent from CE trade shows, had a booth for their BOSEbuild educational DIY speaker at this January’s CES. We’ve seen a modular DIY electronics vendor collaborate with the giant Disney and other toy companies are being built from the ground up on offering educational toys on technology and electronics.

    Home audio products also highlight the commitment and opportunity to upcycle and create products at home. Speakers and headphones can be made with relatively little prior knowledge of electrical engineering. For those willing to take on a greater challenge, high-end items such as electrostatic headphones, can be made at home for a lower cost than can be found on the high street.

    The Lego Boost kit, announced at CES 2017, is perhaps a subtle sign of where some areas of consumer electronics are heading. The toy combines the traditional build and play opportunities, but an accompanying app brings creations to life through simple programming commands, bringing creations to life. While innovations in the toy market may not usually have many implications to wider CE products, the availability of such toys mark the increasing demand for the DIY creation of electronics goods.

    In fact, the toy market is where a large degree of ‘makerspace’ products can be seen to be beginning their consumer life. XYZprinting, one of the leading consumer 3D printer vendors has a lot of products focused in the toy makerspace market. While ‘adult’ use cases for 3D printers in the home develop, there is clearly a healthy market for devices aimed to give children creative opportunities with advancing technology.

    Raspberry Pi, currently by far the best-selling British computer with over 11 million units, is an important innovator in both the educational and non-educational DIY computing space. The tiny chipset has allowed the homebrew creation of a vast amount of products in the home. Home media controllers, photo booths, smart mirrors, car dashboards, retro arcade machines, smart plugs and home security systems have all been powered by Raspberry Pi’s. Communities of creatives have grown around the product, sharing design blueprints, pushing new concepts forward and allowing designers to customise consumer goods further than what is available from established brands.

    An important catalyst to this makerspace and DIY CE trend, especially as we move forward, is coding being increasingly taught at schools - coding and the principles of programming are moving beyond after-school clubs and now feature in curriculums for children as young as five.

    In parallel with this trend, the global home improvement market finds itself increasing year-on-year - those in developed nations spend between $150 and $200 a year on DIY home improvements and with technology taking a greater importance in the home, the overlap between these previously separated markets is growing.

    Confidence in creation and design is a major barrier to entry for DIY expenditure and project initiation. Combatting this is a wide range of support groups that have been created both online and with real-world access points.  Sites such as YouTube host a wealth of how-to videos and discussion for project guides or tips for getting the most from a DIY investment. Hackerspaces offer an opportunity for those interested in pushing their creative ability to do so, around like minded people and without the need for investment into expensive professional equipment, such as high-end 3D printers. However, given the rise of electrical educational goods, it is likely as a whole we will come to be more competent in designing and building our own electronics.

    Although it is all but a small segment of the overall CE market, there are observable and growing trends towards consumers demanding more access to building or customising their consumer goods. We should expect to see an increase in both educational toys, but also an increase in CE products being replicated, recycled and repaired at home, even created based on original designs.

Professional PTZ Cameras - A Market Full of Opportunities Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    One of the uniting aspects of most of the pro video and AV industries is that almost all end-users are looking to cut costs whilst at the same time aspiring to do more with the video format. This idea of doing more for less has driven down price points significantly in the pro camcorder market (a global figure of -28% over the past five years) and has encouraged people to consider alternative ways in which to capture video.

    Alternatives to pro camcorders include DSLRs and CSCs, a trend which has been well documented, but in the world of live video production, the burgeoning professional PTZ camera market is fulfilling this function.

    For instance, take broadcast, the origin of professional video use. Traditional studio set-ups require at least two or three cameras and their camera operators as well as a camera controller in the studio’s gallery. Use of comparatively inexpensive PTZ cameras does away with the need for camera operators, reducing the required headcount for a three camera set up from four to one. In a world where budgets are being squeezed, this is a significant reduction in both CAPEX and OPEX that is very appealing to some. 

    There are caveats to this of course: PTZ cameras can’t yet match the image quality of 2/3" sensor studio cameras and they can only be used in non-dynamic environments where the action is pedestrian. PTZ cameras are therefore better suited to static studio set-ups (interviews, news or cooking shows for example) than fast moving sports. Because of this, reality TV is another key application, for example the UK production of reality staple ‘Big Brother’ uses 55 high-end PTZ cameras controlled by just one operator.

    Away from broadcast, the video conferencing market is going from strength-to-strength, partly due to the cost savings derived from people being able to communicate face-to-face without the expense of traveling. 

    Another way broadcast is starting to save money by using PTZ cameras is through remote production. Where small, satellite studios are required, PTZ cameras (along with other production equipment) can be operated remotely, requiring no on-site staff. This is perfect for locations that often require people to be interviewed, but don’t warrant investment in a full stand-alone studio - financial districts for example.

    Aside from cost savings, another point key to the growth of the PTZ camera market has simply been the emergence of video as a central part of modern life. The dominance of the internet in our lives and increasing broadband speeds has meant that video is now everywhere. Smart phones and tablets mean that video content is always at arm’s reach, websites are now almost expected to feature video in some way and video-based display signage is ubiquitous, we can rarely escape video.

    It follows therefore that the use of video is growing fast outside of the world of broadcast. Video hasn’t been the exclusive preserve of broadcast for at least 10 years now, but its use in a whole variety of applications is now being accelerated by this wider cultural phenomenon.

    In addition to video conferencing, other markets for PTZ cameras include internal corporate communications, education, houses of worship, government and military as well as medical, event venues and stadiums. Some of these applications use PTZ cameras due to their low cost and comparative simplicity (they are often seen as “fire and forget” in terms of installation) while others such as education, stadiums and houses of worship use them because of they can be mounted out of the way on ceilings or high on walls and controlled remotely.

    The education market in particular is extremely interesting in its use of PTZ cameras and is a good example of the cultural encroachment of video. While PTZ cameras are used to record lectures or lessons for students to catch up on later or for teacher assessment, the cameras come into their own in this environment when distance learning is considered. Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCS), typically fielded by technology companies rather than educational establishments, are forcing some of the world’s leading universities to change their business models. The ability to distribute videos of lectures, whether recorded or live, gives universities valuable assets that can be monetised without geographical boundaries. PTZ cameras are at the heart of this trend and are allowing traditional higher-education establishments to compete in this new market. 

    Considering all of these factors, the PTZ camera market is growing in volume terms, with 49% growth expected between 2016 and 2021. Although much of the 103,000 units shipped in 2016* were accounted for by comparatively inexpensive products used extensively in video conferencing, most volume growth over the next five years will be found in the $2,000-$3,500 segment as more quality conscious markets grow in importance. This means that despite significant price erosion, the shift in product mix will allow for a 27% growth in value over the same time period, up from $220 million in 2016*.

Sky/Discovery Pricing Spat was a Sign of Deeper Market Currents Read more
Media & Entertainment

    The well-publicised and highly acrimonious pricing row between Sky and Discovery Communications was settled at the 11th hour on the 31st January 2017 and Sky subscribers will continue to enjoy Discovery’s bouquet of 12 thematic genre channels like Discovery, Animal Planet, TLC as well as Eurosport. The disagreement was simple – Sky said Discovery’s viewing on its platforms has fallen and it did not want to pay what was being asked to renew their long term carriage agreement. Discovery said it is being paid less than it was 10 years ago, despite Sky subscription price rises and a claimed 20% increase in viewing of its channels on Sky platforms (the acquisition of Sky Germany and Italy in this period may well be a factor behind this assertion). Here’s the Futuresource take on the issues which underlay this unusually public spat between these two media giants.

    Impact of On-Demand on Linear Viewing
    Comparing BARB data for the last 7 months of 2016 with the same period for 2014 does suggest that the share of Discovery’s channel bouquet (excluding Eurosport) has indeed declined. The data also indicates that Sky’s own average channel share over the same periods has been relatively constant.

    In our view, this will almost certainly be due in a large part to the impact of on-demand viewing on traditional linear multichannel TV. According to the latest survey in the Futuresource international consumer research program ‘Living With Digital’, 12% of UK respondents now say that SVoD services are their most frequently viewed video platform, up from 6% a year earlier, compared to 15% for Pay-TV channels. There are now approaching 6 million Netflix and 4 million Amazon Prime Video users in the UK (many taking both). As total TV viewing hours are relatively flat, it is inevitable that viewing of these services (as well as other alternative platforms like YouTube) will be taking share from traditional linear TV channels.

    To combat the SVoD challenge, Sky itself has been migrating its proposition from linear to On-Demand with Sky Q, Sky+, Boxed Sets, Sky Store, Sky Go and Sky Now. Viewing of Sky Atlantic (which carries HBO content) is 75% on-demand. From 2018 Sky will offer its full content portfolio on its online TV platform Sky Now, which offers both Subscription and PPV/Pass options. 

    Rising Cost of Sports Rights
    Live sports have become a critical weapon in the battle to sustain Pay-TV as Broadband has taken centre-stage in the battle for multi-service subscribers. Sky had to bear a 70% rise in the price of Premier League rights in the last round as a result of competition from BT Sports and is paying a stellar £4.2 billion for 5 of the 7 packages which run for 3 years from 2016. Sky’s profitability dipped 9% in the last half-year and will be looking to keep its results up, especially as it has accepted a takeover bid by 21st Century Fox which values the company at £18.5 billion. Hence an understandable reluctance to pay more for channels which it claims are being viewed less.

    Discovery, whose largest shareholder is John Malone (Liberty), acquired the 49% of Eurosport it did not already own from TF1 in July 2015 for €491 million. It too has ramped up sports spending with exclusive rights to the Australian Open tennis and €1.3 billion for Olympics rights for 2016-2024.  Over 40% of Discovery’s overall revenue comes from advertising but it will also look to maximize subscription-based income and has been pushing its standalone online Eurosport Player. Although distribution deals with BT and Virgin Media (owned by Liberty Global) remained in place, a blank screen on 10 million+ Sky boxes from 1st February would have left a big hole and it was clearly in the interests of both companies to reach agreement.

Wearable Tech Market Loses Momentum Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Q4 punctuated a disappointing year for wearable device sales, as connected watch sales failed to fill the void left by slowing fitness devices – despite functionality and brands shifting to the newer category.

    A total of 90 million units of wearable devices were shipped to the market, reaching a retail market value of $14.2 billion. It was the first year since 2011 when there was a decline in the retail value of the market. The slowdown in shipments and a fall in value are partly explained by waning appeal of the novelty associated with tracking activity and wearable devices in general, as well as a price decrease in most product categories, which in turn, indicates that some developed markets are maturing and saturating.

    The brand landscape of the wearables market has rapidly evolved over the past few years and is now consolidated around a few key players. In terms of units shipped there were 4 clear market leaders in 2016: Fitbit, Xiaomi, Garmin and Apple. Fitbit and Xiaomi were leading in the activity tracker category accounting for 41% and 28% of units shipped respectively. Garmin was dominating the sports watch category with 26% and Apple was standing out in the connected watch segment with a total of 44% of units shipped last year.

    Fitness devices are reaching a degree of saturation in developed markets, for this reason vendors in this space have started to introduce smartwatches (with operating systems), anticipating a broader population opportunity longer term. Garmin developed its own app store called Connect IQ which allows their devices to run 3rd party applications. Fitbit acquired Pebble and Vector, two smartwatch companies.

    Due to the problems of short battery life, bulky design and a lack of solid use cases, full smartwatches did not take off as quickly as expected in 2016. Wireless watches, also referred to as hybrid watches (classic analogue design with connectivity features e.g. activity tracking, remote time keeping), in the short run will appeal more to consumers, as they allow design variety, are affordable and have a longer lasting battery life. They are expected to grow by more than 20 times by 2020, as some of the leading watch vendors such as Casio and Fossil are pushing for connectivity within their watches, with Fossil launching over 130 model SKUs across 2015 and 2016. Fossil make many well-known brands such as Skagen, Armani, Michael Kors among others.

    However, there is ongoing research in the smartwatch category, addressing the problem of short battery life. Some of the traditional watch vendors have already introduced watches with a solar panel instead of display, which allows the creation of smartwatches that do not require charging. The question is now whether this technology will allow adding additional features to the device. In the long run, the smartwatch category is expected to cannibalise both activity trackers and sports watches, as it will be able to incorporate the same features.

    Although the market performed below expectations, there are still opportunities for growth in the wearables category in emerging and developing markets. In 2016, they only represented 43% of the volume and 36% of the value of the total expected global shipments for 2016. Moreover, in those markets the total wearables penetration has only reached between 1 and 3%.

Why is SoC Becoming a Key Feature for Many Vendors? Read more
Professional AV

    The smart displays market has evolved and changed in the last year, with further developments expected this year. Of course, smart displays incorporating System on Chip (SoC) is not a new development in the large format display market, with Samsung having ‘Smart Signage’ screens for almost five years. However, now is the time where there is the most availability and choice to the user, with ever more vendors offering this solution.

    Why is SoC becoming a key feature for many vendors? End users are in some cases demanding a simplified solution for basic signage, and do not require dedicated external media players and networks, when a basic system fulfils the signage needs they have. This is especially true when the content being shown is often not much more than a rotation of images, basic graphics, video and free broadcast channels.

    Highlighting the importance of this category, roughly a third of all displays (excluding videowall and interactive) have SoC integrated into the displays. It has been interesting to see the different approaches by vendors to this segment with various choices around SoC, OS, range inclusion, integration level, etc. all driving complicated development decisions.

    Samsung is by far the largest proponent of SoC, with well over two-thirds of its display range (excluding videowall and interactive product) coming with on-board intelligence. Unlike some other vendors, Samsung has been less discerning about which model ranges should carry SoC, integrating it into virtually all of its mid-range, and some high-end SKU’s. 2016 saw the introduction of the Tizen based solution, utilising the successful platform cultivated in the smart TV sector. The processors used have also developed significantly, providing more power with which to run increasingly complex signage platforms.

    LG has the next largest offering of SoC, with the WebOS platform. However, unlike Samsung, LG has been far more selective around range inclusion, opting to focus more keenly on entry level ranges where the benefits to the end-user are perhaps more obvious.

    As well as the Tizen developments, 2016 saw new SoC offerings coming to market from other vendors. Some of the more interesting developments have been the Android operating system based solutions brought to market by Panasonic and Philips, with Viewsonic expected to follow in the near future. This is an interesting direction from these vendors, utilising the strong user-base of Android through familiarity in mobiles and tablets. Android has a wide network of application developers able to produce compelling signage applications that are easy to use. The Google Play store is indeed a strong selling point for these displays, with a large content bank being readily available.

    The final announcement of 2016 came from NEC with its Raspberry Pi solution, expected to be launched at ISE 2017. Unlike other vendors, this solution is not integrated into the display itself but instead, Raspberry Pi signage computers are offered via an optional slot in to the new Open Modular Interface (OMI). This provides flexibility in pre-sales along with the ability for fast swap out should the player fail.

    But what of the actual usage of SoC solutions beyond the hard sales numbers outlined above? From discussions across the industry, utilisation rates are thought to be incredibly low, as low as 10%. One of the reasons for this is that the technology is perceived as being very lightweight and only suitable for small networks showing basic content, for example in a small retail environment. Integrators and distributors have told Futuresource that if an SoC display is selected (as is often the only option for some brands), they will always encourage the purchase and use of a dedicated media player. Of course, an integrator will make more margin on an additional media player, but also there are concerns that if the SoC fails it is a very costly and time consuming process to have the display replaced, whereas a new dedicated media player could be couriered to the client very quickly and instantly swapped out.

    With the evolution of the smart displays from new and existing vendors, Futuresource expects to see the segment continue to grow and utilisation rates increase, helping to drive the signage market forward.

Mobile Industry Forced to Work Harder to Maintain Growth Read more
Consumer Electronics

    With worldwide shipments increasing by a factor of twenty over the last ten years, the smartphone has become one of the most successful products in consumer electronics today. 2017 will see the point at which over half of the world’s population owns a smartphone, far surpassing the peak of feature phone penetration, which did not reach more than 40% of the global population. Futuresource Consulting recently published their latest research and figures on the smartphone market, drawing on insight on the market gained over the last ten years.
    The exceptional growth witnessed at the beginning of the decade, breaking the 1 billion yearly shipments milestone, has slowed as developed markets have matured. However, 2016 did see an increase in shipments to 1.6 billion units, a 9.2% change from 2015. 

    While healthy shipment growth is expected over the next four years, at CAGR 5.4% 2016-2020, economic issues in key developing markets have lowered expectations of worldwide sales. Furthermore, the tail-end of the smartphone rush is in sight. Shipments have begun to plateau, and while total market trade value has reached a high of $317 billion in 2016, total revenues are expected to dwindle over the next three years. 

    Samsung and Apple have retained large segments of the market, and their position of first and second place. With fierce competition in 2016, Samsung lost some share of the global market, with 22.1% of total market shipments, alongside Apple, who fell to 13.4% of global shipments. Huawei continued to grow, increasing their overall shipments by 40%, to gain 9.8% of global market share. Regionally, Chinese brands have had a turbulent year. Tecno, itel and Infinix, brands of the Transsion Group, saw particular gains in Africa and the Middle East, increasing from 11.6% to 18.6% of market shipments. Xiaomi and Coolpad, on the other hand, have seen declining market share in APAC, with combined shipments falling by a total of 20 million units, and brand shares declining to 5.4% and 1.6% respectively.

    Looking to the future, vendors are seeking ways in which to grow market share. APAC has provided substantial growth in recent years, as developed markets have reached a peak in handset sales, but as growth in the region has slowed, META has been viewed as the next high potential market. Up until 2016, growth continued, but negative economic conditions in key markets such as Nigeria have caused lacklustre results. Furthermore, as the average spend per handset is lower in developing nations, compared to established markets such as the UK or USA, premium brands such as Apple have had difficulty in capturing handset sales.

    The difficulties faced by both smartphone OEMs and the telecoms industry has led to adaptation in product offering, and attempts to stimulate replacement handset sales. For example, UK operator O2 has begun offering smart home packages, while other products such as headphones have seen widespread sale through the telecoms channel in the US and Japan, a trend now being seen in Europe. Handset recycling, refurbishment and resale schemes have been brought into use by major OEMs to quicken handset replacement. It is hoped that these measures will further drive sales, in a period of expected change in the smartphone industry.


Apple Looks to Content to Strengthen its Service Proposition Read more
Media & Entertainment

    According to reports, Apple is intensifying talks with producers to acquire original scripted material for TV shows and movies. This is not new, reports of Apple dialog with Hollywood have been circulating for years, but does it indicate a stronger interest in exclusive content as a services differentiator, or signal a major strategic push into filmed entertainment as a precursor to a much bigger Apple TV play?

    For some time, Apple has been releasing music-related original programming such as Taylor Swift’s 1989 world tour and exclusive interviews with top artists like Adele. The firm’s first venture into original production outside the music arena will be a TV series, announced in March 2016, starring entertainer in association with veteran producers Ben Silverman and Howard T. Owens. This will focus on apps development and the app economy and, although it will undoubtedly be entertaining, the piece will clearly also play a role as marketing collateral for the Apps Store and Apple’s developer programs. Eddie Cue, Apple SVP of Internet Software and Services is previously reported to have said that it did not signal broader ambitions in TV and movies and content will be carefully selected to fit with Apple’s business like Apps Store and Apple Music.

    Apple’s Internet Services business has continued to grow strongly in the last few years, rising 22% to $24.35 billion in FY 2016 (although this was boosted by a $548 million windfall payment from Samsung relating to a patent infringement lawsuit). However, growth has come primarily from the Apps Store, Apple Care, Apple Pay and licensing services - iTunes growth has flattened as competing streaming services have hit transactional entertainment market growth, notably Spotify (music), Netflix and Amazon (video).

    Apple Music, launched in 2016, is Apple’s answer to Spotify (and other streaming services, including newly launched Amazon Music) and now counts over 20 million paying subscribers. A priority for the company will be to secure and grow Apple Music to defend its overall share of the digital music market and strategic moves will almost certainly include a widening slate of exclusive artists and original filmed entertainment (this path was followed by MTV 20 years ago to reduce its reliance on canned music videos). 

    Apple has hinted at major plays in television for several years but in practice has just continued to build the portfolio of content distributed on Apple TV, including major streaming services like Netflix, Amazon, HBO Now and Hulu. Apple has elected thus far not to directly compete with these major SVoD brands, who distribute across the widest possible range of personal and TV-centric devices, including Amazon’s own Fire TV DMA. Futuresource estimates that over 20 million Apple TV boxes are currently in active use worldwide, a big number perhaps, but only a small fraction of Apple’s 600m+ base of iPhone users. 

    In the absence of an Apple-branded SVoD service per se, third party brands like Netflix on Apple TV will almost certainly generate a small commission for the company and iTunes remains the default destination for EST or VoD amongst Apple users.

    During the last 3 years Netflix and Amazon (and to a lesser extent, Hulu) have taken a leaf from HBO’s book and have become locked into a spending ‘arms race’ on original series to attract and retain subscribers. If Apple wanted to make a major play in production and SVoD, it could have made a play for Time Warner, acquiring both a leading studio and HBO in the process. However, despite reports of Apple interest, the company chose to pass, leaving AT&T trying to buy the company (this deal is currently under regulatory review, it is conceivable that Apple could step in if it is blocked). The decision to pass on TimeWarner strongly suggests that the latest reported Apple tactical moves into original production look to be aimed more at strengthening businesses like Apple Music, rather than a major new assault on the filmed entertainment market.

CES 2017 - Convergence and the Impact on K-12 Education Read more
Education Technology

    The Futuresource research portfolio and expertise spans multiple technology sectors including consumer electronics (CE) and the education technology (EdTech) sectors, therefore the first essential trip in the technology calendar each year is CES in Las Vegas. The CE team at Futuresource recently shared all of the key category trends in the CES webinar here>>. The next port of call on the tradeshow circuit will be the educational technology show BETT, from 25th-28th January. This show is the global meeting place for those passionate about harnessing the power of technology in education. Following CES, Futuresource has decided to share a few of the top-line trends that it expects to see reflected from the CE showgrounds of Las Vegas in the EdTech halls of London’s Excel. 

    Increased EdTech Presence at CES

    K-12 educational technology had a dedicated and much bigger presence at CES this year with its own  space at the Sands expo area, part of the overall CES event. The presence of educational applicable tech was also found interspersed around the other halls too. 

    If we were to look at the CES show through EdTech lensed glasses, coding and robotics would certainly stand out as core themes, essentially this is due to the increased focus on science, technology, engineering, and maths (STEM) learning in many countries, also coding is now becoming part of the curriculum in many schools globally. This thematic trend was reflected by the number of products being demonstrated by both established brands and start-ups, addressing this growing need.

    Crowd Stoppers and Coverage

    If stand crowds and press coverage were anything to go by then the LEGO stand certainly grabbed the most attention with its LEGO BOOST product line, aimed at teaching younger kids to code, complementing its successful Mindstorms product line aimed at older students.

    In terms of robotics, everything from virtual assistants, toys, cleaning robots and educational robots were being demonstrated - many of course can be linked again to teaching kids how to code, such as the KUBO robot which gained a lot of attention. This product utilises tactile programming and not only accelerates the learning processes for kids whilst coding but also can be applied to developing maths, languages and music skills too.

    Another interesting but rather scary product was Professor Einstein by Hanson Robotics. This artificial intelligence (AI), Wi-Fi enabled teaching or learning assistant, stood at 14.5” whilst rather eerily looking like its genius name sake, including facial expressions. However, the PABI penguin had a more cuddly, approachable presence and was positioned as a tool to support autistic behavioural challenges.

    Last but not least, the diverse applications for robotics in education were re-enforced by the Telepresence robot which is being used in higher education to help remote or sick students remain connected to classmates and tutors. 

    For more information about Futuresource EdTech reports including: the Smart Campus - an Opportunity Assessment, PC Sales in the K-12 Market, Education Platforms Opportunity Analysis and the BETT Show Report (31/01), please visit our Education team page here>>

Amazon Going Global is Just the Beginning Read more
Media & Entertainment

    CES 2016 provided one of the most significant recent announcements in the video space as Reed Hastings stated Netflix was going global. Almost 12 months on, Amazon announced the immediate availability of its Amazon Originals video service in over 200 countries, fuelling the battle for global share and solidifying its position within the video service eco-system.  

    This move by Netflix and now Amazon is indicative of the trend towards the increased globalisation of the content sector, as service providers seek to benefit from economies of scale across technology, content rights and the ability to increase the return on their original production investment across a larger user base. 

    This latest move is also illustrative of the continued emergence of the OTT channel business, enabling consumers to effectively build a Pay-TV package with direct to consumer services, although it is mainly Pay-TV subscribers who take SVoD; this is particularly true outside of the USA. In the UK for example, almost one-third of Pay-TV customers subscribe to Netflix, twice as high as free-to-air viewers, according to Futuresource’s recent Living with Digital consumer research survey. 

    The emergence of OTT channels is a proposition that is further enhanced by Amazon in the USA with its virtual aggregation of these third party services on Amazon Channels, with Roku also developing a similar offering of late.
    As much as Amazon is a household name in key markets such as the US, UK and Germany, its retail business is only available in around a dozen countries. Streaming video was available in just 5 markets until its move in mid-December to launch its Originals App worldwide. Where it was previously present, it has become a key rival to Netflix. In Germany, there are currently approximately twice as many Amazon video users than Netflix users; more as a result of the strength of its retail (including Prime) business than video service however. 

    Amazon’s global deployment now means it must rely on the quality and interest in content alone and more specifically its own content. However, with an estimated USD$3 billion earmarked on spend per year – and rising, led by Top Gear re-incarnation, The Grand Tour, its commitment to offer quality and differentiation is clearly visible. And it is perhaps this differentiation which is resulting in consumers opting to take multiple services, with little overlap in content offering. In the US over 50% of Netflix subscribers also use Amazon Prime Video. 

    Like Netflix, Amazon’s Originals App is not expected to significantly change the subscription video landscape in many “new” countries immediately, largely due to the relatively limited nature of the offering. But with the investment it is placing in its overall Amazon service in India, including additional Bollywood content on Prime Video, it is evident that Amazon has a very targeted approach for future global growth, as its impressive momentum continues. 

Has Netflix Picked the Perfect Time to Launch Download Functionality? Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Netflix might be a global phenomenon but it's only just playing catch up with a function Amazon Prime Video has had since August 2014; the ability to download movies and TV shows to watch offline - even though Amazon is only active in a handful of countries (although this is about to change significantly). Amazon's download functionality has been well received by consumers, despite little promotion around it; Futuresource's Living with Digital survey from June-16 shows that 59% of Amazon Prime Video Users in the US, UK and Germany have downloaded Movies or TV on the service, equating to over 20 million users of the service. Half of these cite doing so regularly, with the functionality also popular in Japan. 

    Netflix, as recently as last year had been vocal about not adding a download function, so why now? 

    The feature provides additional value to "Netflix Originals" allowing its own titles to become more prominent initially and further supporting its intense program of releases. It could be that a train/plane/car journey watching downloaded TV shows is all that is needed to get viewers hooked to a series. 

    Netflix is placing increasing importance on emerging nations to drive growth. In Western countries the main benefits for a download function are to view whilst out of the home, to save mobile data or to use when access to the internet is either impossible, or expensive. Over fixed networks most Western subscribers can stream content without too much problem. However, in emerging nations even over fixed networks buffering can ruin the experience. So the benefit for downloading is greater, circumventing low speeds of fixed networks as well as low speeds and data caps of mobile internet, and allowing for a better quality viewing experience. Downloading on SVoD services is also a common feature on a number of local services in emerging markets.

    Futuresource's Living With Digital study already shows that Netflix users would use the option as 75% of Netflix Subscribers who also use Amazon Prime Video are already downloading content for later. The demographics of Amazon download users is interesting too, households with young children skew much higher, as do young adults (18-25) who are often on the go.

    There are some limitations to the services, with a significant proportion of Netflix's library not available to download. Along with Netflix Originals, Sony Pictures, NBC Universal, Lionsgate and some other independent studios are prominent. But others including Warner, Fox, BBC and Disney have no or limited content, and with perfectly good reason. Download functionality could well impact transactional digital sales, which for the home video divisions of the studios remains a major focus. Packaged video spend is declining by double digits in most countries and for the studios moving consumers to digital sell-through in particularly is a key focus in many developed markets.

    In addition, the complexity of such rights is highlighted by key titles including Daredevil, Luke Cage, Jessica Jones and others which are "Netflix Originals", which can't be downloaded as Marvel rights are held by Disney, who apparently aren't on board. This will add consumer confusion as they can't even be assured that they can download all Netflix Originals, instead having to rely on the dedicated "Available to Download" section to find shows to watch later.

    Overall, this will be a good move for Netflix, the demand has been there since day one and this is good timing for them too. Christmas is coming up, a time when a lot of people travel and we typically see a spike in SVoD subscriptions for evening entertainment. Amazon is due to go global, adding competition so this is another feather in Netflix's cap. However, this download capability will surely add cost to its enormous content spend and adding more major studios could be challenging, despite assurances that more content to download is on the way. The industry will have a renewed interest in the Netflix Q4 investor relations report.

Samsung and Harman Acquisition - Can it all be about Automotive? What About Pro AV? Read more
Professional AV

    The recent announcement that Samsung will acquire Harman for $8 billion has sent the newswires buzzing across the technology industry. Google this news and one comes across reams of press commentary, along with countless blogs from industry experts, Futuresource included. 

    The story invariably focuses around the access Samsung will gain in the automotive sector or, more specifically, connected car solutions which accounted for approximately 65% of Harman's sales during the 12 months ending 30th September. For the record, there is absolutely nothing wrong with this, it's a mantra often preached at Futuresource 'opportunity and innovation is all around us in the tech industry, but where is the money being spent?'. 

    But we on the Pro AV side of this business sat up and took notice for a very different reason. Samsung is a serious heavy-weight in the Pro AV space or certainly in display technology, where it is clear market leader in LCD technology. However, and like many Pro AV display vendors (not just in LCD but also projection and LED), Samsung has a constant challenge to remain relevant in the planning and decision-making process. In a bitterly ironic twist, given the display is often the only part of a solution that an end user actually sees, the lion's share of project budgets tends to be spent on other solution elements. Display selection is regularly an area where corners are cut to fit project budgets. Couple this with the rock bottom pricing of TVs as an alternative to professional displays and the picture looks even more challenging. 

    For many of us in the industry, Harman means audio, and rightly so considering the slew of brands in its wheelhouse. Professional audio appears to be following the CE space, enjoying something of a renaissance in recent times, or perhaps just finally receiving the attention it should really always have enjoyed. This is actually closely reflected in the amount of work Futuresource has been undertaking in this space over the last two years. There are certainly some interesting synergies here for Samsung; brands like AKG, Crown, JBL Professional, Martin, Studer and Soundcraft potentially offer Samsung access to new accounts and channels. But much like automotive, whilst this is the more obvious story, for me it is opportunities in video distribution that piqued my interest. 

    As a bit of background, Harman acquired AMX in 2014. AMX is the third placed player in pro AV signal distribution and automation technologies behind competitors Crestron and Extron.

    Video distribution solutions are a major portion of the business for AV automation companies, with these products accounting for around 50% of revenues across the major players. Matrix switching products, typically used to tie together multi-room systems, account for roughly half of this video distribution value and have been a major focus of growth and competition between providers in recent years. 

    These matrix switching solutions act as the heart of distributed AV systems, with various control systems and room-based technologies layered on top of the central video distribution network. As such, in large project opportunities, these systems are typically specified early on in the decision-making process as the complexity of solutions means that manufacturers will typically work closely with end users and integration partners. Samsung's acquisition means it will be able to push display products as part of the deal, early on in the project lifecycle. 

    This provides Samsung with greater access to customers across a range of verticals. The base of Samsung's displays business is heavily focused on retail, not a major market for matrix switching, and is arguably less strong in verticals like corporate, government, education and healthcare, where the majority of matrix switching sales are seen.

    Breakdown of Matrix Switching Ports by Vertical - Global 2015

    The other key story to this is the transition towards AV over IP, a very hot topic right now in the industry. The falling cost of Ethernet switches, improvements in compression and delivery technologies and a transition towards AV management through IT departments at an end-user level are all expected to increase the adoption of IP solutions in coming years. 

    Of the top three players in signal distribution, AMX seems to have been the most aggressive in its adoption of AV over IP. An indication of this was the acquisition of SVSI in 2015, estimated to be the leading player in low latency AV over IP solutions. Other major players have been less aggressive in their adoption of IP technologies as these solutions use off-the-shelf Ethernet switches and threaten revenues from proprietary card cages that conventional matrix switchers are based on.

    This has the potential to offer AMX a competitive edge over other major suppliers who do not have a robust IP offering to complement conventional matrix switching solutions.

    All these factors coupled together present Samsung with a multitude of opportunities, of course only if recognised, embraced and managed effectively. The strength in connected technologies that Harman brings has implications for its enterprise business, beyond Samsung's VD operations, but that feels like a topic for another blog!

Harman Brings Samsung Leadership in Connected Car Market Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Samsung has made an offer worth around $8 billion to acquire US audio/automotive specialist group Harman International. The deal will jump-start Samsung in the global automotive infotainment market, which Futuresource values at around $30 billion (including telematics and navigation), as well bringing Harman's stable of consumer and professional audio brands to Samsung's portfolio. 

    In the world of consumer electronics, Harman has been quite an unusual success story – a traditional high-end home and car audio specialist which has flourished through revolutions in wireless, mobile and streaming music, while riding a wave of change in the automotive sector as in-car entertainment has been increasingly integrated with information, navigation and telematics. Harman has grown both organically and through acquisitions, now owning more than 15 brands including JBL, AKG, Infinity, B&O (automotive only) and B&W. Harman/Kardon is also still also a tier-one global audio name in its own right. In professional AV, Harman has also acquired specialist professional firms like Studer and Revel to strengthen its portfolio and integrates AV and lighting solutions for events, venues and other sectors. 

    Automotive is seen a major strategic technology opportunity, attracting interest from major players like Google and Apple. In 2015, 92 million vehicles we made worldwide, of which 73 million were cars, and the average electronics value per automobile continues to rise year-on-year. However, the key to success in this market lies in relationships between technology providers and vehicle manufacturers: Harman has presence in 36 vehicle marques and is #1 in branded car audio.

    To sum up, the Harman deal will provide Samsung with a leading position in the connected car, bolster its position in home audio and open up an entry into the pro AV market. It is expected that the company will operate as an independent subsidiary of Samsung.

    In December our 'Connected Car Opportunities' will seek to address the wider opportunities associated with this sector.

Evolution Key for Video Server Vendors, with Stern Tests Ahead Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    The video server market is one of the stalwart product areas of the broadcast equipment industry, but in recent years it has started to face the same challenges that are affecting much of the rest of this business.

    The transition to IT-centric solutions has been core to these changes, as has a shift in end-user purchase behaviour and the desire to do more with less. 

    Even before considering the implications the transition to IP will bring in the future, COTS (Commercial Off-The-Shelf) IT systems are already impacting the studio and news segments of the video server market due to their comparatively low cost. In the past, there has been a resistance to use pure IT equipment, but pressure on budgets has meant that this is an increasingly popular option, which will only increase as end-users gain confidence with such 'non-traditional' products. 

    Playout is the other area of the market being hit hard by alternative solutions. Compared to other types of video sever, playout is the most price sensitive, which has allowed cost effective 'Channel-in-a-Box' products to gain real traction, especially where only limited functionality is required. Interestingly, this trend is most advanced in mature markets such as North America and Western Europe, while the typically more price sensitive emerging markets favour more traditional playout solutions. Feedback suggests that the mature markets are simply further up the learning curve and are more open to alternative products. 

    Until recently, the term 'cloud' was somewhat of a dirty word in the industry, perhaps due to its vagueness and overuse, but over the past 18 months this seems to have changed and attitudes are thawing. The realisation has dawned on many that IP and cloud-based virtualised infrastructure is the future. Cloud-based, virtualised playout is becoming more common, which will have a significant impact on the traditional, hardware based playout server market over the next five years. 

    Replay servers are one of the few growth areas of the market, but even here prices are under enormous pressure with most of the growth found in the low to mid-range. Vendors of high end, highly specialised servers are having to add functionality to their products just to maintain prices. 

    In short, the video server industry is currently facing, and will continue to face, some stern tests. As with all product areas in the world of broadcast, video server vendors are having to evolve in order to address the rapidly changing situation. Not all manufacturers will survive the next five years and the ones that do survive will be the companies that move with and ahead of the changing tide.

Google Jamboard: A New Contender in the Collaborative Display Market Read more
Professional AV

    The competitive landscape of meeting room collaboration solutions over the past two years has changed rapidly where tools to facilitate this collaboration were extremely fragmented with vendors of displays, software/content, videoconferencing (VC) hardware and wireless presentation devices working in isolation of each other. However, the common standards used by many of these vendors allowed for their independently developed products to be integrated creating a complete solution. One key development in this solution is the growth of the interactive flat panel display (IFPD) market, which Futuresource expects to grow by 34% year-on-year by the end of 2016, reaching 916,000 units. By 2020, this figure is expected to reach 1.2 million units, indicating a 2016-2020 CAGR of 22.2% for IFPD.

    IFPD has partly evolved into a multi-featured, all-in-one display solution that allows VC, interactivity and content sharing, effectively bridging many of the gaps between VC players, display vendors and wireless presentation solution providers. While Microsoft's Surface Hub solution (launched in early 2016) may not have driven the evolution of IFPD into an all-in-one collaborative display solution, its marketing and launch were critical in increasing awareness of such solutions.

    On 25th October 2016, Google announced the Jamboard: a 55-inch 4K interactive flat panel display aimed at the corporate market. Jamboard claims the distinction of being Google's first hardware product announcement since the company's rebranding of its G Suite of cloud-based applications (e.g. Gmail, Google Drive and Google Docs). Jamboard is currently only available to business customers of G Suite on a private beta testing basis but is expected to become available to the public by mid-2017 with a price tag below US$6,000.

    Unlike its Chromebook product that went to market via third-party OEMs such as Acer, Asus, Dell, HP and Lenovo, Google is in partnership with BenQ, which provides the panel. Through this partnership, Jamboard will be sold through BenQ's channel network in the Americas.

    Jamboard itself is designed to facilitate collaboration in the corporate space using Google Hangouts, permitting up to 50 participants in a "Jam" session. Video calling is possible with Jamboard featuring an integrated HD camera, speakers and microphone. Its interactive functionality supports both pen and finger touch and content sharing is permissible in a Jam via iOS and Android devices.

    While Jamboard has many similarities to Microsoft's Surface Hub, it does have notable limitations such as users being unable to contribute to a Jam through a desktop/notebook computer but rather only through the G Suite mobile apps on iOS/Android devices as well as Chromebooks. Desktop/notebooks may only view a Jam via a web browser. Jamboard does not allow the installation of third-party applications nor are Jam participants able to review sessions or embed video, though the latter is a possible future development.

    Despite having some limitations against Surface Hub, Google's G Suite of cloud apps, 4K resolution and finger touch interactivity present Jamboard as a clear competitor to Surface Hub with both devices being IFPDs with an integrated camera and audio inputs/outputs, particularly with Jamboard undercutting the 55" Surface Hub. Will potential customers be enticed by Jamboard over Surface Hub with the former's lower price point despite the difference in functionality? 

    Will the likes of Cisco and Polycom be inclined to create their own IFPD solutions in the near future or will they partner with existing IFPD manufacturers?

The Consumer World of 360 Video Capture Read more
Consumer Electronics

    2016 has seen the launch of lower cost virtual reality (VR) headsets and the availability of 360 video experiences without headsets on sites like YouTube and Facebook. This is creating a heightened interest in 360 video capture. Initially VR capture was made possible only with high end professional cameras like the Nokia Ozo, at a cost of 60,000 USD, this was certainly a figure that the average consumer purse strings could not stretch to. However there are more affordable 360 camera devices coming to market. It is therefore not surprising that interest within the consumer 360-degree camera segment has grown considerably.

    Consumers are seeing new launches of premium devices such as the Kodak SP360 4K, 360fly 4K, Nikon KeyMission, Samsung Gear 360, Vuze 3D 360, and more affordable entry-level consumer models from Ricoh (Theta), LG (360) and C-list brands (<$100). There are also many more, less established companies looking to secure investment to develop new 360 cameras via crowd funding sites like Kickstarter. The range of 360-degree camera form factors has also widened from the initial mountable and handheld models to throwable and aerial drones. 

    Futuresource expects the vast majority of demand for single-unit 360-degree cameras, e.g. Kodak SP360 to be driven by consumers, initially early adopters and sports enthusiasts. Increased competition throughout the forecast period should see prices fall and lead to rising demand from casual users, similar to the trend with traditional action cameras e.g. GoPro Hero4.

    150k 360-degree camera units were sold worldwide in 2015 (1% of total action cameras). In 2016, growth has accelerated following the launch of new models and developments within VR. Futuresource expects 0.6m units to ship globally this year (out of total 9.8m action cameras), of which North America will account for almost half.

    It's still relatively early days for the 360 segment and there are some limitations, such as the quality/resolution of the video and issues with video/content stitching, particularly with the low-end models, although these issues are likely to be addressed moving forward. While volumes will remain comparatively niche in the short term, the longer term outlook for 360 degree cameras is positive, accounting for 34% of the overall action camera market by 2020, 4 million 360-degree cameras. User-generated content for VR is set to fuel growth in 360-degree cameras. YouTube and Facebook are the key platforms for 360 video activity, allowing users to view content without a dedicated headset, although a more immersive experience (audio and visual) is capable with a headset (e.g. Samsung Gear VR).

    Despite smartphones being the most convenient device for casual photography, demand for certain dedicated image capture devices, such as action cameras, remains steady as consumers see the benefit of wearable/mountable, hands-free capture. 

    In terms of the Futuresource analysis of the 360-degree action camera market it only includes single-unit devices in its definition of consumer 360-degree cameras (e.g. Samsung Gear 360), typically retailing for <$1,000 as opposed to a 360 rig setup using traditional action cameras or high-end professional devices (e.g. Nokia Ozo).

AT&T and Time Warner: 'Big is Beautiful' Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Following its $49 billion grab for DirecTV in 2015, AT&T has now offered $84 billion to acquire Time Warner Inc. The deal is subject to regulatory scrutiny and the FCC will be under pressure by a number of parties to block the deal, including Donald Trump, who has already said he will veto it if elected on the basis of too much concentration of power. 

    The value of entertainment M&A deals has skyrocketed as major network providers have moved to acquire content properties and the cable industry has continued to consolidate. Vertical integration is back in fashion - in 2009, Time Warner spun out its cable unit Time Warner Cable (TWC), seeing little strategic value in owning a physical network and netting its shareholders a windfall of about $9 billion in the process. In 2016, Charter Communications bought TWC for about $60 billion (as well as Brighthouse Networks for $11.1 billion in a separate transaction), catapulting the company into the #3 slot in US Pay-TV after Comcast and DirectTV, with 25 million subscribers. (Charter, mired in debt, was in Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection in 2009).

    Deal Year Value
    Comcast/NBC Universal 2011 $30 Billion
    AT&T/DirecTV 2015 $49 Billion
    Charter/Time Warner Cable & Bright House 2016 $71 Billion
    AT&T/Time Warner Inc (Proposed $84 Billion

    Although there may be opportunities for vertically owned companies to bundle content and services, the likely competitive advantage gained may actually not be that significant. The marriage of Comcast and NBC Universal is now 5 years old, but the two entities seem to still largely operate as separate businesses, i.e. provision of network services and entertainment content respectively. AT&T is planning a $35 per month DirecTV streaming service which is likely to be offered at a similar price to anyone with Broadband, not just AT&T network subscribers. OTT SVoD services, including Time Warner's HBO Now, invariably offer multi-device access to subscribers, regardless of network provider.

    So it may be that a simple corporate thirst for bigger operating scale underlies the current spate of deal making, especially as dominant network providers are limited in terms of maximum horizontal ownership. For example Comcast abandoned its $45 billion attempt to buy Time Warner Cable in 2015 in the face of institutional concerns over market concentration. Similarly AT&T was blocked in its $39 billion attempt to buy T-Mobile in 2011.

    What Will AT&T and Time Warner Bring to the Table if the Deal Goes Ahead?

    AT&T Time Warner Inc
    Revenue $147 Billion Revenue $28 Billion
    Wireless Subscribers 137 Million Warner Bros: #1 in TV & Movie Production
    Broadband Subscribers 14.3 Million Global Distribution, Theme Parks etc.
    Video Subscribers 25.4 Million Turner, CNN, Cartoon Network, Other Cable
    (DirecTV 19.8 Million, U-Verse 5.6 Million HBO, 46 Million Subs, International Distribution
    Video Revenue $20.3 Billion 50% of the CW Network (with CBS)
    Business/International Communications DC Superheroes: Games, Toy Franchises


Google's Move Into Hardware Is About More Than Devices Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Google has ditched its Nexus line of products after a few years. Initially introduced in 2012 to showcase Android’s capabilities and stimulate interest amongst OEM partners and consumers alike Nexus has now given way to Pixel as Google switches from working with selected partners on devices such as smartphones and tablets to new ‘designed by Google’ for a range of new hardware. This blog examines why this is and looks at the bigger picture behind Google’s new strategy as it extends into VR, smarthome and beyond. 

    Whilst Pixel was introduced as a brand with the Pixel Chromebook in 2013 and followed by the new tablet announced last year it was the recent announcement of the all-new Pixel smartphones that has garnered the most attention. Smartphones are a much bigger product category than tablets and Chromebooks. And now Pixel is a halo-product, a showcase for Android, with Google looking to closely integrate its new software platforms to launch new services and enhance existing ones.

    In a way, this is similar to Microsoft’s Surface brand and its brand strategy for that; in both Microsoft and Google’s case, Apple should be credited with influencing their product management strategy. Much attention will be paid to whether Google can use Pixel to grow its brand and mindshare as Microsoft has done for Surface, which remains one of the bright spots in a stagnant tablet market and has done much to provide growth opportunities with many OEMs following suit in the convertible and 2-in-1 categories. The smartphone sector is similarly slowing and it is more important than ever that companies look to differentiate. Pixel gives Google the opportunity to do this without relying on partners to deliver its devices – and without diluting its software capabilities and reach with their own applications.

    The other point of note is that, like Surface, Pixel has continued on the move last year (with the Nexus 6P) from cost-effective to premium flagship. This reduces conflict and competition with the majority of Android manufacturers – alleged to be a big factor in Google quickly moving to off-load its Motorola Mobility division not long after it was acquired – and hopefully maintains the balancing act of maintaining cooperation whilst minimising competition.

    Why take this risk? By producing its own hardware, Google will better understand the complications of integrating its own software and tailoring the whole package to consumers’ preferences to enhance the user experience – especially with regard to combining hardware and software as effectively as possible. This is a point which has seen discontent expressed with regard to its Android Wear and Cardboard platforms for wearables and VR. By its very nature, Google’s openness leaves it trying to standardise implementations in order to please multiple partners with different interests.

    This openness in effect restricts customisation and tailoring to different requirements. With Android Wear, a common complaint has been that the one-size-fits-all approach has left it acting as a Swiss Army knife trying to be all things to all people whilst limiting OEMs’ abilities to maximise battery life (a key point for consumers). With Cardboard, the more basic implementation prevented OEMs from improving the user experience with head-straps (for hands-free use) and additional sensors (for greater/smoother accuracy and involvement).

    This approach has caused some issues, with Samsung being the most prominent absentee from both of these platforms, choosing instead to develop its own software and platforms for both wearables and VR. Huawei is currently rumoured to be considering also adopting Samsung’s Tizen OS for its new smartwatch. Perhaps it is these two companies’ size and scale that means that they do not have to be so reliant on Google but it’s a strong indication that the two leading Android smartphone manufacturers are looking elsewhere. Now, as a developer and provider of complete products Google will understand more about what is required to combine its software and hardware and learn of the nuances that have to be taken into account, which is something that could benefit their OEM partners as well as itself.

    In order to effectively implement all of this, Google has also brought in a new retail strategy. Now its products are available in physical stores, no longer just through its online Play outlet. This gives it a much bigger presence and reach, which will boost sales. Minimising competition – whether deliberately or not – Google has announced exclusive distribution deals with MNOs in key countries as well as leading retail chains. This gives it a chance to have consumers more involved, even if only window shopping people will be able to see and try out the products in person rather than looking at images and reports online.

    Also announced alongside the Pixel smartphones were several other devices that are new to Google and to demonstrate its intent to put its new philosophy into practice. Coming soon after it recruited Amazon’s lead hardware developer, Google has announced Google Home, Daydream, Chromecast Ultra, Google WiFi and Google Assistant. Okay, Google Assistant is not hardware or a device but it is important and goes beyond what other virtual assistants are able to do; it is smarter, more contextually aware and more interactive than other platforms currently out there. Amazon has taken the lead with its Prime multimedia services, Echo and Alexa. In fact, Alexa being integrated into 3rd party devices perhaps is the biggest indicator of the threat to which Google has responded. Google now has a much better opportunity to maximise its broad range of platforms and applications and better understand how to implement them to be more successful with both partners and consumers.

    Our opinion at Futuresource is that this is perhaps the key point. Google has been able to test the waters with various software developments over the years but it has struggled to really go beyond search and advertising (possibly with the exception of Maps and location). It has done well to adapt to mobile, with Android serving it well there. Beyond that though? The new devices, integrating with Assistant and other software will give Google direct access to the new holy grail, data! Google will be much more able to utilise the vast amounts of data expected as we increasingly migrate online and move away from traditional UI and devices to voice control and sensors supported by machine learning. 

    By placing the emphasis on OEM partners to date, Google has been at risk of missing out on data. By producing integrated solutions it can go straight to the source and provide a more-rounded experience to customers whether they are out and about with their smartphones, living their daily lives at home, gaming and consuming multimedia content, listening to music, exercising, at work, travelling in their cars or interacting with potential new future connected IoT devices. Think of Google Assistant operating with your car as you work through your calendar, stream your music, plan your shopping list, schedule your meetings, check your recent exercise regime, pay for a new purchase and skip traffic jams – all on your commute before you step foot outside your car.

IBM and Apple Target Adaptive Learning with the Watson Element App Read more
Education Technology

    Last week, IBM, in partnership with Apple positioned its Watson analytics platform for the K-12 education market with the launch of the Watson Element for Educators app. The app, designed exclusively for iPad's, collates information covering students likes & dislikes, learning activities, interests and academic achievements to provide a holistic view of a student's school career. Based on this rounded perspective, Watson Element offers guidance for differentiated instruction in the form of content recommendations. Combining potential revenue streams from software licensing and content sales - the platform straddles two hot topics within the EdTech space, the role of analytics and the way content is packaged and delivered in education.

    The rise of digital education has led to the adoption of multiple disparate software platforms within schools. The increase in digital tools has been accompanied by a growth in data generated by these platforms. The growing availability of student and institutional data has been met with efforts to aggregate information from multiple platforms to generate insights. IBM, with its Cognos BI platform is just one of the providers of such a solution. In this model a variety of data points are combined to measure institutional wide performance, highlighting the macro impact of individual solutions and initiatives and providing indicators for groups of outliers where intervention may be required. These solutions help administrators analyse trends within the general student population, providing measurement against compliance frameworks and efficacy targets. 

    The introduction of the Watson platform marks a significant move for IBM from the back office into the classroom, with a solution designed to analyse the individual not the institution. The platform is designed for use by teachers, not administrators and aims to support a differentiated learning experience in a similar manner to adaptive learning courseware. Adaptive learning courseware leads students down personalised learning paths where content delivered to the individual is based on their level of ability and knowledge. A student's ability level is defined by usage and with use, platforms build up a picture of knowledge acquisition over time. Watson Element works in a similar way, the big difference here is that Watson is not locked into a predefined proprietary content library as is the case with adaptive learning courseware. 

    This fundamental change in content discovery and course formation has implications for the go to market strategy of content publishers. In today's market, the vast majority of education content is sold direct to schools and districts. In this model, courseware is typically acquired in an aggregated format – an entire textbook or content library or access to a comprehensive online learning platform. The Watson platform, through its content recommendation features has the capacity to recommend content beyond tools already owned by a school. In this model, additional recommended courseware would be acquired via a content portal. Content would be tailored for the individual and as such the purchase of content would be administered by the teacher (in league with the student) and not by the school or district, as is typically the case currently. This has two clear implications for content publishers, firstly, teachers will have a greater influence on content purchases than previously and secondly the content is more likely to be purchased in a disaggregated format (a single lesson or even learning asset) to meet the immediate needs of an individual student. This could have significant long term implications for how content is purchased in K-12 education, with the potential transition from aggregated school and district wide purchasing towards disaggregated purchasing for the individual. In order for this vision to be realised however, the industry movement towards open standards (and by implication the increasing pressure on publishers to allow their content to be disaggregated) needs to continue. 

    Of course Watson Element is not the only platform offering analytics based content recommendations and is just one of a number of platforms and ecosystem developments leading end-users towards disaggregated content but IBM's offering has the potential to be a significant contributor. In the wake of the IBM & Apple announcement, leading educational publisher Pearson announced its intention to utilise the Watson platform as a virtual tutor for higher education. It is currently unclear whether or for how long Apple will remain the exclusive partner for Watson in K-12 education.

    The benefits for Apple in the partnership are twofold. Firstly, there is the potential for content recommendations to link to materials in its iTunes U platform. Secondly, the tie up offers a clear point of differentiation for the IOS ecosystem. Apple took an early lead in the market appealing to innovative educators by positioning its ecosystem around the transformative power of technology. Its market share in US K-12 mobile device shipments* sat around 50% in 2012 & 2013 when 1:1 roll outs started on mass in the US. More recently, Apple has lost share due to the rapid rise of Chromebooks (which reached 50% share in 2015*). At a time when a large number of Apple's early adopter customers (who purchased 2012 and 2013) are likely looking to replace their devices, this new competitive development will provide a new 'USP' for Apple in the face of stiffer competition from Google and Microsoft. One significant challenge to adoption of this however maybe the move towards a multiple OS scenario (where different OS's are utilised by different age grades and usage models) which has taken place in many US school districts. In this scenario, either the district has to choose to return to a single OS environment or not to utilise the Watson Element platform across all of its students.

    *Shipments refer to mobile device products only (Notebook, Netbook, Tablet, Chromebook) not including desktop.
    *K-12 institutional sales only, not including bring your own device.

$5 App to Bring Projection Mapping to the Masses Read more
Professional AV

    As flat panel technologies become increasingly prevalent in corporate and education environments, projection's unique ability to produce more than a mere 2D image is beginning to be exploited. Projection mapping demonstrates how the technology can evolve to extort new opportunities and negate the threat that FPD presents. 

    Large-scale projection mapping is not new but only in the last two years has it become a hot trend following innovations by leading integrators such as ProjectionArtworks; Dataton and The Projection Studio. Widespread marketing of the latest mapped spectacle, whether it is in stadiums, arenas or on the world's most iconic architecture, has helped to catapult projection-mapping into an attraction the public can recognise, and now demands. 

    Small-scale mapping has also recently gained traction, again thanks largely to software developments such as the scalable, cloud-based solution, DisplayMapper. Such solutions, as well as developments in solid-state technology have finally enabled digital signage to become a viable opportunity for projection. We are now seeing it finally enter retail verticals in the form of striking on-shelf product promotions in leading chained stores. Research conducted by Futuresource Consulting has found that the global Total Addressable Market (TAM) for projection in retail alone is 3.7 million units. 

    Whilst the industry has seen innovations in large-scale and commercial small-scale mapping, there has so far been a glaring void – mapping for the mainstream. 
    Optoma has recently released Projection Mapper – a $4.99 app that can be used with any brand/type of projector. The app represents the first launch of dedicated software for digital signage by a projector brand, which is significant in itself. 

    Affordable and easy to use, Projection Mapper has the potential to bring mapping to the masses across a range of verticals: prosumer DJs, small businesses and in the home for parties/holiday decorations. The current global installed base for home projectors is 3.8 million – which represents a substantial untapped opportunity before the corporate market is even considered. 

    Projection Mapper has the potential to expand the general public's understanding as to what is possible with a projector and that achieving those possibilities is easy – and crucially, affordable. Not only does this have the potential to enhance how projection technology is perceived, which will in itself help overall projector sales, but it also unlocks an entirely new application for the industry at a time when traditional applications are becoming increasingly threatened. 

    Futuresource expects that Optoma will be the first of several projector brands to launch such a solution; in conjunction with dedicated hardware solutions such as Panasonic's Space Player, in order for the market to fully realize the opportunity that signage represents.

CEATEC - A Reflection of Japan's Changing Role in Worldwide Electronics Read more
Consumer Electronics

    A number of trade exhibitions and fairs punctuate the calendar of Futuresource analysts and – one of these, CEATEC - has just finished. The Tokyo show (whose full name is Combined Exhibition of Advanced Technologies) feels quite different to other events such as CES, IBC and IFA as it is primarily a showcase for Japanese firms. Over the years, Futuresource has observed how CEATEC reflects the changing face of the Japanese CE industry. In the past, this was the show to preview world leading innovations in TV sets, personal and home A/V. But the once globally dominant Japanese vendors such as Sony, Panasonic, Sharp, JVC and Toshiba are no longer the powerhouses that they once were in these fields and are refocusing their businesses. Sony has not exhibited at CEATEC in recent years, whilst the others prefer to show alternative products on their booths. 

    As a result, the dominant themes of the show this time were IoT, smart home and robotics and Japanese firms are clearly at the forefront in many respects. 
    Sharp's booth typified these themes, dominated by a live show where scenarios were acted out to demonstrate how smart home will make life easier. The mother, cooking dinner in a Sharp oven, asks a voice personal assistant to turn down the temperature of the oven to prevent the meal being burnt before she completed her yoga workout. The prototype VPA, which would also adjust the air conditioning unit is designed to cater for the Japanese taste for cute curved robotic shapes. Unlike some of the VPAs coming to the market, it does not double as a wireless speaker. A robotic vacuum cleaner – the Cocorobo x Vocaloid - was in action meanwhile; the centre of attention as it also played music whilst it worked its way around the floor. 

    Japanese online retail giant Rakuten told Futuresource that it is also working on a VPA (though not on show) capable of both audio and image recognition. MUFG bank meanwhile was showing a VPA in the guise of a 12cm high robot which it is trialling in a branch. Unlike most human branch assistants, it can speak English and Chinese (in addition to Japanese) and so can help travellers with banking queries. The bank figures it is cheaper to supply these devices than employ staff with foreign language capabilities. As in previous years though, many of the robot devices on show were little more than toys. 

    Panasonic is a world leader in power supply for next generation devices and its flexible battery for use in wearable devices was a major headline of the show. Just 0.55mm thick, the lithium ion battery can withstand regularly being bent to an angle of 25 degrees. 

    There were a multitude of IoT products on show, many of them relatively low value devices such as smart doorbells, sensors, and cameras. Whilst Sony was not exhibiting, it's worth noting that its sensors underpin many of the cameras used in remote monitoring systems. 

    Flexible displays were apparent on several booths. Nippon Electric Glass showed various products which can be used in portable and wearable devices or on car dashboards. Glass ribbon that is thin enough to roll up, but durable in conditions when being twisted or bent. 

    Various applications of virtual and augmented reality were apparent, including a VR headset from toymaker Tomy whilst Rakuten was showing its virtual shopping experience, enabling the clothes shopper to view him/herself trying on clothes without the inconvenience of entering a cubicle and physically getting changed. Styles, colours and sizes could be changed at a gesture. 

    TV sets enjoyed a significant presence last year but this time they were scarcely to be seen; largely restricted to a booth hosted by JEITA and NHK which was once again flying the flag for 4K UHD and forthcoming 8K. Trial 4K broadcasts by the national public broadcaster are underway, with regular services scheduled for 2018, at which point trial 8K broadcasts will begin ahead of the 2020 Olympics. Whilst doubts remain elsewhere in the world about the consumer need for 8K services, the Japanese thirst for the best possible technology remains. 

    Nearby, the Blu-ray Disc Association of Japan was hosting a booth highlighting the 40-50 disc titles that are now available in Japan, including a sprinkling of local content, anime and documentaries. 

    And that was about it for A/V. Panasonic, which had made a big splash of its 4K last year, was not showing TV sets, nor was its Technics high end audio brand exhibiting this year. 

    However, a visit to CE retailers in Tokyo such as BIC Camera and Yamada Denki - whose stores typically sprawl over several floors - is a welcome reminder of the passion that the Japanese consumer still possesses for consumer electronics. 

    Although the CEATEC show itself does not really merit a dedicated visit from Europe or North America, it is well-attended by Japanese. 120,000 visitors were expected during the week. Unlike CES, this show is not exclusive to trade visitors and not a place where a great volume of business is conducted with retailers and distributors. That said, the conference track which acts as companion to the show is well attended by industry executives. Futuresource made presentations on the state of the global CE industry, audio and smart home and these were sold out.

Video Ownership Remains Robust, but will People Jump to Just Buying Digitally? Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Consumers' have never had so much choice of movies and ways of getting their hands on it, so why is the disc still king and what's behind the reluctance to adopt just digital as the way to buy movies and video to own and keep? 

    Futuresource's latest consumer research unearthed an interesting trend from the results of 20,000 online interviews across 11 countries including the USA, Canada, Australia, UK, Germany, France, Italy, Spain, China, Japan and South Korea. Although the total number of consumers who are buying video to own and keep remains robust when combing DVD, Blu-ray and Electronic Sell-through (EST) there are very few who only buy EST. 

    Using the UK as an example, just over half the adult population buy video to keep, of these 67% only buy DVD's and Blu-rays, 29% buy both digital and DVD's and Blu-rays and that leaves just 4% who buy digital exclusively. The same is true in the US even though more people buy digital than physical, just 5% only buy digital copies. This is despite the number of EST buyers increasing over the past year, but the proportion buying just digital sell-through only has not. 

    If people are becoming more familiar with buying digital video overall, why aren't they choosing to buy only digital? It's comes down to collectability and longevity of ownership. 

    Looking at the reasons people haven't bought digital ("Cost" and "I have enough other options to watch movies e.g. SVoD") and using the UK respondents again as a benchmark, of respondents who haven't bought any digital video outright, 21% said they hadn't because "I don't feel like I will truly own it forever" with a further 19% ticking "They aren't as collectable as DVD's or Blu-ray's". Interestingly, both reasons were equally important to young and old including the "millennials" who are often stereotyped as preferring to access content rather than owning it. This data is taken from Futuresource's wave 12 edition of its Living with Digital consumer research. 

    The above represents a significant challenge, as persuading video buyers to buy a digital copy is difficult, if they don't feel that they will truly own it and perceive it has lower value to the physical counterpart. Part of the problem lies with the relative invisibility of the actual digital product, with the vinyl revolution highlighting consumers' appetite for tangibility is still significant. 

    Some insights and perhaps a hint at addressing this issue can be drawn from looking at the other side of this question, of those who have bought digital video, why did you? Overwhelmingly popular was "It was a good price or on promotion" which was cited by 45% of UK respondents (50% in the US), followed by "It was more convenient than buying a DVD or Blu-ray" which was selected by 42% of those in the UK and 43% of US respondents. 

    New services such as Sky and Amazon have provided a kicker to the EST markets they are active in, helping propel awareness of EST and communicate the convenience of this format, in particular bringing it to the TV screen rather than a mobile device or PC/laptop. Amazon and Sky have the scale to continue to drive EST, which will be vital in propelling EST to the next level and making more consumers comfortable in making the jump to digital ownership.

Who Wants to be in the Music Streaming Subscription Market? Read more
Media & Entertainment

    This year, the global music streaming subscription sector has seen a number of head -to -heads; the ‘big two’ - Spotify vs Apple Music, YouTube vs the rest of the industry and the polarised views on exclusives across the sector, but these running sideshows can’t distract from two key facts. Firstly, streaming music subscriber growth continues to impress and secondly, no one (well, no service provider) seems to be able to make money from monthly subscriptions.

    On the first point, Spotify recently announced it hit 40 million paid subscribers, which is double what it had when it’s now biggest competitor, Apple Music, launched in June 2015. Apple Music has also recently announced 17 million subscribers – meaning that Spotify has added more subscribers since Apple Music launched. 

    Regarding the second point, Spotify losses in 2015 were approximately $200 million, 10% of total revenue, despite its scale and strong brand. Smaller, but still high profile services Rhapsody/Napster and Tidal also saw rising losses in 2015, whilst music streaming profits/losses from Apple Music and Google Play Music are assumingly absorbed by the wider respective corporations.

    Yet we are continuing to witness new service launches against this backdrop of poor financial performance, in addition to withdrawals from the industry (e.g. Rdio, Simfy, Rara, Blinkbox have exited the industry in 2015-2016, and there are more). 

    Pandora has announced a new on-demand streaming music service in the USA, effectively now going head-to-head with the “big two”, with iHeartRadio hot on its heels, announcing it will launch a service in January. SoundCloud launched a subscription service earlier in 2016 and Amazon is expected to launch a more comprehensive, paid-for alternative to its Prime Music service soon.

    Given the undoubtedly tough financials in an increasingly cut-throat competitive environment, it could be seen as being slightly gung-ho to launch a new service. But all have one thing in common, huge existing user bases to convert; Pandora has 78 million active monthly listeners, iHeartRadio now has 90 million registered users, adding over 10 million so far in 2016 alone. Amazon Prime has approximately 40 million members whilst SoundCloud has 175 million monthly users. 

    But in a market where it is tough to differentiate, success is far from inevitable. Even with scale, margins are tight (or non-existent), largely due to the royalty structure (and most artists feel this structure fails to compensate them fairly). Increasingly popular family plans may well squeeze margins further; more users means proportionately more streams per subscription, meaning even higher royalty pay-outs, perhaps not compensating for the additional $5-or-so per subscription. 

    As we enter the crucial Q4, you can’t help but think there will be further headlines, with more consumers appreciating the benefits of unlimited streaming – spending approximately $8 billion worldwide in 2016, almost 3x the level of two years ago. So you can see why new players want a piece of the ever expanding pie, but they may have to settle for revenue over profits, at least in the short term.

Apple's iPhone Shows the Emphasis is on Improving the User Experience Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Apple's iPhone 7 launched to the usual blaze of speculation and publicity. As I watched the event and the presentation of each feature and improvement the point that occurred to me was that it is now near enough impossible for a smartphone to stand out from the crowd. Apple did a great job in explaining the advances in camera functionality, battery performance and the new waterproof capability but it struck me that someone had done each of these things already. Apple has cherry-picked the best features and advances in technology but someone, somewhere has pretty much done them all and they can be found in other manufacturers' devices.

    Dual lens cameras can be found in the LG G5 and Huawei's P9, the latter developed with Leica's input. Sony too has made much of its advances with camera technology, not surprising given it is the major supplier of the components to most other companies. Similarly, it has been very progressive about its battery performance (stating two days for its Xperia models for some time now) and it has recently introduced smarter charging to prolong the life of its newer Z-series models). The same for waterproofing, Sony has it (in most models), Samsung also reintroduced it for the Galaxy S7 (having previously dropped it for the S6). 

    Much was made of the loss of the 3.5mm headphone jack but consumers have been moving towards Bluetooth headphones for some years and given an adapter is provided it really is a moot point. It is an Apple-specific development and doesn't signify any notable advance or change in design or capability. Saying that, the greater data throughput and quality available via Apple's lightning connector may prepare the way for higher quality audio services from Apple. 

    The rest of the features and changes are largely design orientated. Apple is great at integrating proven technology and establishing features that others have struggled with, the addition of Touch ID and biometric fingerprint readers in phones being a great case in point.

    What this really indicates is that hardware is not enough to stand out from the crowd. This is a result of the smartphone market having matured significantly in the past few years. The market is effectively at a point of saturation and vendors are no longer able to rely on a killer feature or design change (given current technology) to drive sales. The iPhone 6 two years ago was the last real device to do this and that was perhaps its simplest change; Apple responded to the phablet trend and delivered a bigger iPhone that immediately stood out from previous iterations. That produced a jump in sales, timed well with its own expansion and uptake in Asiawhich was at the forefront of phablet demand.

    Global Smartphone Penetration
    Where Apple has gone with these latest advances and design features is to focus more on the user experience. Apple users rank the highest in terms of their use of apps, especially paid for apps and Apple is doing its best to maintain this. Whilst the camera improvements on their own may not stand out too much, they will be well received by their strong base of Instagram users. The screen is brighter and better quality, lending itself to capturing (via the camera) and viewing high quality content. Battery performance has to improve to support these features without degrading the overall user experience by having to charge it more often (thereby interrupting usage). Battery, screen and audio are the other three areas cited by consumers as being of most importance and Apple has addressed these to maintain and increase appeal to their user base, which is critical when operating at such a premium and having to justify to maintain their higher prices – something most other manufacturers have been unable to do. 

    Whilst some have made much of Apple's "struggles" in 2016, the other manufacturers would happily swap places with Apple to have such "difficulties" to contend with. Meanwhile, Apple continues to expand its portfolio and add its brand to new products. The Watch 2 has seen waterproofing also added and advances within Watch OS3, better lending itself to outdoor and sports usage which remains the "killer app" for wearables. 

    Futuresource expects to see more from them on the headphone side and the AirPods are Apple's first venture into "hearables". Whilst others are already available (notably Bragi's Dash and Samsung's Gear Icon X), Apple has again looked to offer a smarter user experience, combining sensors within the earbuds to optimise usage, with good reliability rather than trying to do everything they could think of being the primary concern. The AirPods automatically switch on when removed from the charger case, they pair very simply, they automatically stop music playback when removed and start again when put back in, they allow Siri to always be on hand (and as that improves this will move things forward again). 

    More product categories will be introduced over time, with Futuresource expecting more news in the smart home arena. It is likely that we will see Siri feature more prominently there too as virtual assistants are already being used by Amazon, Google and Sony to integrate themselves every closer into consumers' lives. For now though we are already thinking about what may be done to mark the iPhone's 10th anniversary next year. Does Apple have one more surprise in terms of hardware and design to go with its other advances relating to the user experience and how its customers interact with its devices and their wider ecosystems across homes, offices and automobiles?

Say You Want a Revolution - Vinyl Gets Another Spin Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Think vinyl in the digital age of music streaming and downloading and it’s easy to think snap, crackle pop and clutter. 

    But one of the most unusual phenomenon of the past few years has been the renaissance of vinyl records – an odd curio in an era of consumption over collection and where the convenience of ‘All you can eat’, access all areas subscription streaming services has been winning out. But nonetheless the vinyl revival is well underway, sales volumes are increasing for both discs and hardware. New vinyl disc sales have doubled in retail value between 2013 and 2015 with consumer spend to reach almost U$1 billion during 2016. Consequently pressure is building on the supply chain to meet demand. 

    But why midway through the second decade of the 21st century are we witnessing a revival in demand for a format that the mass market abandoned years ago as being too clunky to use in addition to being less sonically perfect than CDs? 

    It shouldn’t happen here but it is.

    So what is driving the vinyl revival? It has been a niche format for the best part of two and a half decades with sales underpinned by the long term vinyl aficionados and the DJ community. More recently we have witnessed the emergence of the younger consumer (16 to 35 year olds) buying into the vinyl concept. 

    Futuresource Consulting’s Living with Digital consumer research survey from July 2016, indicates that 22% of 16 to 35 years olds have bought a new or second-hand vinyl record in the last 6 months across the USA, UK, Germany and France combined. 85% of these buyers are buying new vinyl.

    For some this is a fashion trend, their friends are buying vinyl and may have purchased a budget price turntable, it is considered to be cool. So, they follow the crowd and consequently may be short term vinyl buyers with little long term longevity in the market. 

    For some in this age group it is the collection process, the attraction of amassing elaborate artwork or collecting different coloured discs, while maybe never playing the discs – using streaming or download services to meet their listening needs. Futuresource’s previous wave of research from December 2015 suggested that 17% of all vinyl buyers do not even own a turntable.

    While others who maybe dissatisfied with the sound quality of digitally delivered music and even CD, the attraction is the warmer fuller sound of vinyl records in comparison to other media. 

    For many younger consumers the ritual of listening to vinyl records, the interaction with the sleeve, the sleeve notes and the process of placing the disc on a turntable is their first tactile interaction with music, something older music consumers had taken for granted but had been lost to the download/streaming generation. 

    Moving forward this latter group with their enthusiasm for the sound quality, the ritual of playing the disc and their appreciation of the vinyl record, the music and artwork combined, as a complete artistic package are key for the music companies. It is essential that the record labels cultivate the younger consumers of today as the vinyl aficionados of tomorrow. 

    However, it is also evident that streaming services and vinyl buying are more than happily co-existing; half of Spotify subscribers have bought a vinyl record in the last 6 months – 4 times more likely than the overall population. 

    The vinyl revival presents an opportunity for the major labels to repackage their catalogue one last time, with major reissue programs of classic artists such as David Bowie, Pink Floyd, The Beatles, The Rolling Stones and Led Zeppelin – the latter out of print on vinyl since the earlier 1990’s – all generating significant volumes, although not all major classic rock artists or catalogue reissues have generated huge sales levels. Nonetheless, sales have been so good that in the UK and Germany there has been the launch of the first dedicated vinyl charts. In addition, the success of catalogue sales on vinyl has not gone on unnoticed by current front line artists, some of which have insisted on a vinyl SKU for new releases, although it has to be said with mixed sales results e.g. Ed Sheeran has achieved high sales volumes on vinyl for his 2014 release X.

    The vinyl market has long been dominated by online retailers such as Amazon and specialist online music retailers satisfying demand. However, the upswing in disc sales has awoken interest amongst brick and mortar retailers – in the UK major supermarkets Tesco and Sainsbury’s have begun to stock a limited selection of LP’s in addition to a range of budget turntables, Media Markt is thought to have taken the process of vinyl purchasing and range management back in-house. In the USA the vinyl revival has resulted in the emergence of the non-traditional retailers most notably with clothes and lifestyle retailer Urban Outfitters achieving a significant share of the market.

    However, the surge in vinyl demand has placed pressure on the supply chain, with around forty plants active across the US and Europe collectively. Limitations on capacity and the ability to expand, in addition to a shortage of skilled manpower, combine to create capacity bottlenecks and lengthy turnaround times.

    The challenge for the music industry is maintaining momentum in the vinyl segment by successfully mining their catalogues and attracting and retaining consumer interest, converting today’s recent vinyl adopters to be the mainstays of the market tomorrow while all the while maintaining retail support. 

Projection Technology Showcased Alongside the Latest and Greatest at IFA 2016 Read more
Professional AV

    Consumer electronic trade shows are normally dominated by the latest cutting-edge gadgets and IFA 2016 was no different with the latest innovations in drones, wearables and 3D printing technologies being widely showcased. 

    However, projection – dubbed by some as an outmoded technology – was also placed centre-stage and attracted widespread draw. In fact, leading TV manufacturers Hisense and TCL placed their new 4K 'laser TV' projectors at the fore of their booths. 

    Since LG released the Hecto series at CES 2013, 'laser TVs' have been gaining attraction but, due to the technology's price-tag, adoption has been limited. However, significant developments in solid state technology are rapidly reducing this price premium and are paving the way for a string of brands to enter with more affordable solutions. 

    The result of this innovation is a projector that can directly compete with a TV for use as the home's main display. Solid state illumination offers home users a bright solution that can last up to 20,000 hours with little maintenance – including no lamp replacements. The majority of 'laser TV' solutions currently on the market offer a display of at least 100" which means projection also offers a far greater dollar-per-inch ratio. 

    Epson, LG, Sony and JVC also dedicated significant floor-space to demonstrating their projectors – further highlighting how projection technology is evolving to remain relevant in the rapidly evolving world of CE.

Social Media Platforms: A New Home for Video Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Social media is shaping up to change the video viewing habits of many, with millennials already at the forefront of this switchover. User generated content and short form videos are proving to be incredibly popular by the mobile-driven masses, creating billions in views. 

    As a result, it comes as no surprise that content owners are taking full advantage of this addictive nature. NBC Universal is providing original short form content on Snapchat from The Voice and more recently it utilised its rights to the Rio 2016 Olympics, by offering exclusive content on the platform. Others, including Viacom, have been pushing snippets of shows from Comedy Central and MTV, using its stock of content; but this move by NBC will be the first for originally curated content. 

    Major networks have traditionally targeted their audience through broadcast channels, typically associated with large audiences and high production value. However, social media now offers potential by tapping into larger (and global) audiences, accompanied with lower production costs. Though, the question remains whether short form content compliments the traditional long form to promote it, or will it displace/overshadow it.

    Snapchat is the fastest growing social media outlet to date, launched in September 2011, and has seen faster growth in its first five years than competitors Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. However, Snapchat isn't the only one extending its video presence.

    YouTube still reigns supreme as the go-to video service, but it's well-known that Mark Zuckerberg is keen to take an ever bigger piece of video viewing hours, adding features such 360 video and more recently 'Facebook Live', which has shown a rafter of content including UFC fights, the presidential campaign and original content, such as news segments from ABC News. Instagram recently introduced 'Stories', which replicates a key Snapchat feature. Twitter has long been a key player in the sharing of video and commentary and recently added 360 video support. A culmination of all these initiatives is allowing video to be accessed easily on each platform, ready for the awaiting audiences seeking fresh content. 

    Social media has been progressively making the upgrade from user generated brand advocacy such as the highly successful Zoella, to a launch platform for new video content creators such as Vox, Vice and Mashable. Content publisher UniLad has seen tremendous growth from Facebook, YouTube and Instagram amassing 2.7 billion views for its videos in July 2016 alone, becoming the largest social video publisher to date. Now however, the platforms are making further progression to showcase high-production value dedicated content from the major networks. With social media garnering mass global audiences such as this, it is undoubtedly a natural step for content creators to showcase their creations quickly and effectively.

    Smartphones have opened up the gates to allow social media to flourish as a video content platform, as apparent in the chart above, as most social media is consumed through smartphones with some dedicated to this platform alone. There is the drawback however of video eating into mobile data allowances, but if anyone is like me, this is easily forgotten with videos automatically playing on Snapchat and Instagram.

    Short form video dominates in the world of social media with UK newspaper The Daily Telegraph citing 'consumers having shorter attention spans than goldfish, thanks to smartphones'. Futuresource's latest consumer research dedicated to kids media consumption habits highlights that in the US and UK, 76% of kids (ages 3-16) indicate free online videos they viewed were typically 15 mins or under. 

    Short form video is similar to the issues facing nutritionists, whereby peoples' nonchalant snacking leads to them eating way more than they would in one main meal. There's a high chance a similar feeding frenzy on video will work for media companies alike moving to short form. But will content owners similarly face the same issue in being exposed to too much snacking and not enough of the main meal? 

    Ultimately, this quick and frequent engagement is helping to reach larger audiences, gaining new advertising revenue streams and hopefully wetting the appetite for many of the large scale shows content owners rely on. 

    The above data is taken from our latest consumer study called 'Kids Tech', which was published in March 2016. The consumer study reviews technology usage and entertainment/content consumption of children between the ages of 3 and 16 years old. The study covers four countries - UK, Germany, the USA and China.


Impact of the Kumamoto Earthquake on the Camera and Pro Camcorder Industry Read more
Consumer Electronics

    In mid-April 2016, a series of devastating earthquakes hit Kumamoto City in South West Japan. The entirety of Kumamoto City was left without water, rail and road links, air services were disrupted and several key factories for the camera and pro camcorder industry were damaged.

    Chief among these was Sony's Kumamoto factory, responsible for manufacturing CMOS image sensors for many brands – both consumer and professional. The factory supplies around 40% of image sensors used in all digital cameras. Production in Sony's factory was reported to have resumed by mid-May but feedback from the channel is that back-orders are still waiting to be fulfilled well into August.

    The Futuresource EMEA pro camcorder monthly data shows that while volumes dipped in April and reached their lowest point in May, by June they were starting to recover, returning to run-rate levels by July. This is consistent with the time taken for the market to recover from 2011's Tohoku earthquake, where volumes returned to expected levels within a few months.

    In comparison, the consumer imaging market, which includes digital cameras, traditional camcorders and action cameras, has witnessed a longer period of supply shortages compared with the pro camcorder market.

    Consumer imaging shipment volumes were down approximately 50% in Q2 16 (versus Q2 15). With digital camera demand significantly outweighing supply, and vendors keen to minimise the financial disruption of the lower sales numbers, data from Futuresource's weekly digital cameras service highlighted that some vendors raised prices by 10-15% in recent months, causing the price of some high-end interchangeable lens camera models to rise by €150-€200.

    How long will this disruption last?
    The overall impact on the pro camcorder industry is thought to be short-term only, with back-orders being fulfilled by late Q3 2016. The result of this will be that volumes that would have been shipped in Q2 will instead be recorded in Q3, resulting in a larger than usual third quarter. In other words, the net impact to overall 2016 volumes should be minimal.

    Meanwhile, the supply of higher value DSLR cameras are likely to be in good shape by late Q3 and all consumer imaging products should return to run-rate levels by early Q4, in time for the crucial gifting period. This return to normal business is timely with new consumer and professional cameras set to be announced at the Photokina trade show in September, which is likely to contribute towards a strong end to a challenging year for the industry.

The Race to Bezel-Less LCD Video Wall Read more
Professional AV

    The LCD video wall product is going through another evolution; one that is hoped will stimulate further growth and keep the sector strong. This transition is the move to ever smaller bezel widths, the introduction of Extra/Extreme Narrow Bezel (E/EXNB) products. This type of product is classified by Futuresource as 2.0mm and below Bezel to Bezel
    (B-to-B) tiled displays. 

    At the end of 2015, the first E/EXNB product was launched by LG, the 55VH7B, with a B-to-B of 1.8mm. This was soon followed by most of the major vendors showing products of this type at ISE 2016, both from 'CE volume vendors' such as NEC, Panasonic and Samsung, but also traditional video wall specialists like Planar. Of these launches, the smallest Bezel-to-Bezel demonstrated was a Samsung and Planar product with 1.4mm B-to-B 55". This product is the only screen size thus far to have E/EXNB bezel widths, with no 46/47" being launched. 

    Whilst the E/EXNB product type hasn't sold in huge volumes yet, Futuresource expects this to become a crucial segment for the LCD video wall market. E/EXNB will become the premium product, previously a spot held by Ultra Narrow Bezel (UNB, defined as 2.1mm-4mm B-to-B by Futuresource). It's also interesting to note that, the migration between segments with UNB jumping from 32% share in 2015 to 52% in 2016 YTD. 

    Futuresource expects that SNB products will begin to be phased out by vendors in 2016/17, as UNB becomes the 'entry level' product, and E/EXNB takes the 'high end' position. Mirroring the trend witnessed in SNB pricing, UNB price points will drop to fulfil this lower end in the market. 

    So why is the introduction of the E/EXNB product important to the videowall market? There are two main reasons for this. Since its inception, the noticeable bezel join has always been a negative point for LCD video walls with many end-users disliking the crosshair effect. This is one of the key benefits of Rear Projection Cubes (RPC), where the bezel join is minimal. With RPC being favoured in some 24/7 mission critical control room applications, where data or alerts cannot afford to be lost in the bezel joins, E/EXNB is closing this gap, and creating another option for these applications. In Control Rooms, where space is of a premium, the thinner LCD solution is a big advantage over the traditionally bulkier RPC options. Added to this, the price for an LCD solution is significantly lower than an RPC solution. 

    As well as attempting to counter the perceived benefit of RPC, LCD is fighting on another front against the huge demand and surge of Narrow Pixel Pitch LED (NPP LED) products (as outlined in one of our recent blog piece). Of course, NPP LED is, by its nature, bezel less and can be assembled in any size or shape, without any perceivable join. However, whilst this bezel-less display is of course an advantage, this comes at a very high price premium. The E/EXNB product fits nicely in-between cheaper SNB/UNB and high cost NPP LED. 

    The coming months and years will be of great interest to see how E/EXNB is adopted and utilised. Futuresource expects the video wall market to be reinvigorated and grow with the introduction of this new technology.

Voice Heralds Next Generation Features in Wireless Speakers and Smart Home Applications Read more
Consumer Electronics

    In July 2015, Amazon launched its first audio device, called Echo, which has since become the bestselling wireless speaker in the US and is expected to sell around 3.9 million units by the end of this year (cumulative since launch), earning Amazon almost $700 million. Echo represents the first wireless speaker to introduce a 'Voice Personal Assistant' (VPA); the feature has generated significant intrigue within the audio industry, many wondering whether it could provide a much-needed boost to market revenues, which will be flat this year after a decade of stellar performance. 

    Echo comes bundled with popular music streaming brands like Spotify as well as Amazon's own Prime Music service, and moving forward is rumoured to include a dedicated low-cost music streaming service for Echo, presumably so that non-Prime subscribers aren't put off buying Echo. However, the feature causing most intrigue is voice and its voice personal assistant, which Amazon has named Alexa. Echo uses Alexa and an 8 microphone array to bring access to cloud services using voice. Users can control their media (e.g. "Play Beyoncé I'm a single lady", "Skip", etc.), as well as control compatible devices residing on the WiFi network (e.g. lights, appliances, etc.), and even access cloud content and services, such as ordering products from Amazon's own store, Pizzas from Dominos or a minicab from Uber. 

    User feedback indicates that usage is dominated by entertainment in practice, but nevertheless the product has created another catalyst to help increase awareness and interest in smart home. Brands like Nest, Insteon, Wink and Wemo have seen the opportunity to 'piggy back' on the popularity of wireless speakers and have system interfaces to enable Echo to control home automation functions, leveraging the power of Alexa. 

    Meanwhile, Google has announced 'Google Home' using its own VPA, which will reach the market in Q4 this year; and, Amazon's equivalent in China, launched two 'DingDong' models using iFlyTek's VPA in June 2016, the cheapest of which sells for only $30. Apple will offer Siri control of smart home devices via a new 'Home' App in iOS 10, but otherwise has not announced a dedicated audio device.

    Futuresource believe voice will become more prevalent as a user interface over the next 2-3 years, where visual and touch interfaces have dominated to date. While touch and visual interfaces represent familiarity for consumers and are necessary for certain applications such as video and surfing the web, voice and speakers have key attributes and could become more relevant for certain environments (driving the car, cooking in the kitchen) and applications. Key attributes include:

    • Small footprint and low cost – e.g. key for smartwatches
    • Hands-free – key attribute for driving, cooking, etc.
    • Throughput, versus typing - we generally speak 3x the number of words versus typing
    • Voice is personalised and can capture context (e.g. mood, background), more than keyboards
    • Random access versus tree-structure menus.

    With growing use of VPA's among smartphone users (Siri, Google, etc.), and the growth in smartwatches using VPA, along with improvements in voice pick-up accuracy and response latency, Futuresource expects voice to reduce friction within certain applications. If users want to check the weather or the traffic or set up an alarm, voice is relatively quick and reduces levels of abstraction i.e. users don't need to find and unlock your phone, open the app and press necessary buttons on a soft keyboard, voice is potentially much more convenient. Though, this assumes the assistant understands you (i.e. accuracy), and responds fairly quickly (low latency). 

    The short term scenario is relatively straightforward, and most probably positive, based on the momentum the category has, and the low level of penetration even among 'early adopters'. The longer term scenario is dependent on geographic rollout (based on language support, Wi-Fi home penetration), the rate at which existing audio vendors (Bose, UE, Sonos, etc.) integrate the technology either themselves or outsourced, the strength of the ecosystem supporting the platform (devices, services), and whether consumers take to voice interaction. Futuresource forecast the speaker-VPA category to achieve 4.7 million units in 2017.

Interactive Flat Panels the New Must- Have Display Tech in the Classroom Read more
Education Technology

    Interactive flat panels (IFPDs) are now dominating the interactive display market in classrooms. Taking over from interactive whiteboards (IWBs), they accounted for a staggering 96% of sales into UK classrooms in Q2 2016. USA has recently surged ahead at 70% of sales; this is up from 14% just two years ago. Across the world there are now more IFPDs than IWBs sold.

    Schools are choosing this type of device because the brighter image is more visible and they can see immediate user benefits over projector based IWBs and they want to have the latest technology. Children and parents can immediately relate to this technology and now IWBs are seen as old-fashioned. Height adjustable displays are also easier to use, so are a more accessible display for the children who collaborate, which encourages social skills, sharing and discussing.

    Prices are also reducing, with 65" IFPDs below $4,000. Initial costs are higher than IWBs but with negligible maintenance and low running costs, the total cost of ownership is arguably on par with an IWB and projector system. This is detrimental to the projector market where education is a key market. 

    The rapid rise of IFPDs has considerable impact for the traditional IWB vendors who, instead of being in control of end-to-end supply chain, have to source from a small number of OEM providers. Developing a real unique differentiator on hardware is therefore becoming much harder. This product transition has opened the entry point for a far wider range of competitors as anyone can OEM IFPD products. The competitive situation is changing and there has been success for local players entering the market, initially just in their home country and expanding outwards (for example Sahara in the UK and Prowise in Netherlands). In the USA, there are now over 20 vendors with a product range. Foxconn purchasing SMART therefore makes sense as SMART can leverage massive economies of scale to gain competitive advantage from a hardware point of view. 

    The channel is also impacted, as a wider range of brands means more choice and more flexibility for channel providers. Higher sale value leads to higher turnover, but logistics are more complex as large displays are considerably heavier and they are a far more delicate product to handle rather than the 'indestructible IWB'. As IFPDs are relatively new to schools, it is too early to judge a typical lifetime but it will certainly be far shorter than the 10 to 12 years from the average IWB, good news for vendors and the channel. It is also good news that IFPDs give resellers a reason why schools should change from their IWBs.

    School have to choose smaller displays due to the increased cost and whereas the average IWB is 85" the corresponding IFPD is only 65", this can be countered slightly by the brighter image but may still mean that there are situations where the display may be too small for larger classrooms.

What Does Artificial Intelligence (AI) Mean for Education Read more
Education Technology

    Artificial Intelligence is moving from the realm of science fiction to the real world in systems and products which can learn, assess, even anticipate and make fully autonomous decisions and responses. In other words, machines that can effectively think. AI is already being deployed across a rapidly widening range of applications, for example, data mining in healthcare, finance and e-Commerce, traffic and location analysis, call centres, language translation, image filtering, personalisation, social media 'chatbots', video games and driverless vehicles. AI software does not necessarily have to reside in an interface device (or robot), but can be performed by central processing over networks, enabling immensely powerful system capability. 

    In step with the introduction of AI, the technology is growing the use of natural language dialogue, visual and biometric recognition to complement text input, output and touch screens, creating a Man Machine Interface (MMI) more akin to a person-to-person dialogue. Already, concepts like virtual sales or service agents are being tested ('press 3 if you would like to talk to an Avatar'!). 

    But what about AI in education? This an area where traditional teaching methods, sensitivity to excessive technology intrusion, data privacy, performance monitoring and security are all major concerns. Futuresource believes that the focus of AI in the near to medium term will be primarily on supplementing the role of conventional teachers, including pre-school, infants and special needs applications, as well as providing stronger support for students at the personal study level, especially in structured online study programs and coursework for mature students. 

    Intelligent Tutoring Systems (ITS) have been in development for more than two decades and a wide range of adaptive learning tutoring software is already available. However, lack of investment in content has held back the market historically and current publisher focus is on subjects like mathematics which have defined scope, global scale and curriculum synergies. 

    Trials of robotic teachers and teaching assistants are underway in several countries, combining telepresence (remote teaching) and AI-based autonomous techniques. About 9,000 Nao robots made by Softbank Robotics (formerly Alderban Robotics) in France are in use around the world. A large number of these are in educational research institutes as researchers experiment to find out how robots can be most effectively exploited, including programs for children with special needs due to conditions such as Autism. Applications are inspired by approved behavioural models and approaches (ABA, PECS, TEACCH, DENVER, SCERTS).

    'Edutainment' is again not new. Educational PC games are well established and help young children with computer interface skills as well as making learning fun. AI can be selectively employed in this environment and robotic teaching assistants are already being trialled in several countries. Physical manifestation (rather than an avatar on PC or tablet screen) may be helpful with younger children to increase engagement, although there is a danger robots are seen as playthings – researchers in San Diego reported that they found the arms broken off Rubi, a teaching robot, after the first day of school! A note of caution, however, younger children are managed and supervised with the utmost sensitivity and again the scenario is one of AI and robotics supporting teachers, rather than displacing them.

    'Flipped Classroom'
    A general trend towards the 'flipped classroom' means more personal study time for many students and greater focus on collaborative groupwork activity in classes, especially at undergraduate and post-graduate levels. This means more student dependence on course material and web information resources. AI can enable personal assistant software to adapt to and support a particular individual's pace of learning and needs, possibly becoming an indispensable virtual companion or 'Digital Mentor'. Robots like Softbank Robotics' Pepper, which was introduced in 2014, can already perceive human emotion and respond accordingly to provide motivational support and encouragement. 

    Language Learning 
    Studying a language by a structured course (tape, CD etc.) has been around for decades, but AI will offer a new level of interactive tutorial capability as voice recognition and machine learning deals with the subtleties of conversational syntax, accuracy of pronunciation, colloquialisms and vocabulary. Telepresence by remote teachers can supplement autonomous system capability. Digital translation is advancing at tremendous speed – for example, Google Translate already understands 15 languages and can speak in 23! (It can also provide text-based translation of words and phrases in another 50 languages). 

    Asia is of particular interest as a market, where a huge and rapidly expanding middle class wants to learn foreign languages, especially English, and are prepared to pay for it (as opposed to school budgets). Robotic teachers and teaching assistants using AI and telepresence have been on trial in Japan since as long ago as 2009. In South Korea, Robosem, developed by Yujin Robot, has been trialled for English classes and some even predict that robots could actually start to replace teachers in language classes after 2020. 

    Online Courses & Mature Students 
    Futuresource believes that early AI impact will be seen in online course enhancement, both on and off-campus, especially MOOCs (Massive Open Online Courses), where scale offers a more attractive commercial proposition to platforms and software developers. As a leading edge example, Udemy (bought by LinkedIn and now Microsoft), is an online learning and teaching marketplace hosting 40,000 courses for 12 million students. Many 'bricks and mortar' universities offer off-campus courses, using MOOC providers like Coursera or edX. At many business schools, a high share of MBA students are on distance learning courses, attending only residential weekend tutorials and groups. Low completion rates have been a problem with online courses, but AI will be able to sense progress and commitment, help keep students engaged and flag up need for additional support if they are falling behind or losing motivation. 

    Marking and Grading
    AI-based systems can take the drudge out of examining and grading coursework and examination papers, freeing up teachers to spend more time on student development. Software is already available to mark structured work like multiple choice and 'fill-in' questionnaires, although there has been some controversy over the reliability of results obtained with online testing. In the future, AI may even be able to rival teachers in grading freeform qualitative work like essays, at least at primary and secondary levels. Given time, AI will even be able to grade abstract notions like 'elegance' in mathematical proofs or originality and prosaic quality in composition. A sidebar benefit is that AI can also spot student-to-student copying and instantaneously scan for work using plagiarised content 'cut and pasted' from the web. 

    Like voice, handwriting recognition continues to improve in accuracy, meaning that AI-based systems will be able to assess written, rather than typed work. Similarly, visual recognition and AI will allow systems to interpret and assess hand-drawn images (and conversely help children to write, as is already the case with robot-assisted calligraphy trials in Japan).

    AI-assisted marking and grading can help in identifying areas where courses need strengthening or where individual students or teachers need more support (although again we stress that the education sector can be sensitive to invasive technology - student bodies, teaching unions or administrators could resist change in some areas, not least performance monitoring and supervision). 

    The Future? 
    At this stage, it is difficult to judge just how far AI might go in education long term. One of the teaching assistant at Georgia Institute of Technology, Jill Watson, has been answering e-mail questions sent by post-grad students and posted on forums since January 2016. Answers were received within minutes, were accurate, using nuances and colloquialisms and some students even suggested that Jill should be 'Teaching Assistant of the Year'. Nobody realized that Jill was in fact a robot powered by IBM's Watson system. 'It seemed very much like a normal conversation with a human being' one of the students told The Wall Street Journal. The course? You guessed it – Artificial Intelligence.

Virtual Reality and the Implications for the Music Industry Read more
Media & Entertainment

    2016 is a major year for VR, as it pushes beyond the early adopters and reaches mainstream audiences, and crucially across a range of entertainment genres. Music has a great fit with VR and the pioneers in the music industries, artists, musicians and manufacturers, together with AV distribution networks and formats are already forging ahead, bringing VR, once a theoretical concept, to reality.

    A number of key bands and artists have already welcomed VR technology with open arms. Taylor Swift created a 360 video app, that makes fans part of an interactive musical mansion tour. The Icelandic, musical pioneer, Bjork, produced the video for the track Stonemilker, in interactive 360 video together with surround sound audio and is currently developing a full VR album. And let's not forget Paul McCartney, who now has a range of VR experiences available through VR pioneer Jaunt's platform, including 360 video shot at a recent concert through to a documentary focused on the early days of the Beatles. This is all good news for driving consumer awareness of the technology.

    VR uptake is set to benefit from a range of headsets from basic £10 headsets that just need a smartphone to operate through to £700 units requiring the power of a high-end PC. With the price point broadly correlating to the level of quality and overall immersion of the experience. The price point range and wide variety of applications opens up the technology to a broad demographic – important in gaining mass acceptance. Futuresource Consulting predicts that in Europe, 11.5 million headsets will be shipped in 2020, building to an installed base of close to 30 million.

    Major technology companies including Facebook, Google, Intel, HTC and Samsung are investing in the VR eco-system, connecting and contributing to this musical evolution. Companies are distributing developer kits to drive education in the design and creative communities and mainstream acceptance is starting to grow. Popular internet platforms such as You Tube 360 and Facebook 360 have growing subscriber numbers. By 2020 Futuresource Consulting predict that consumer VR content – including gaming and video - will reach a market value of $8.3 billion. 

    However, there is still more work to do in terms of consumer education. Consumer research results from Futuresource's global market tracker for VR, indicate that in the UK only 7% of the nationally representative sample had tried VR. This rose to 12% for the under 35s. In terms of content that consumers would like to view in VR, movies, music/TV, sports and adult content came out on top – all of which are key genres of experimentation for the industry.

    There is a great deal of hype and excitement around VR, and so there should be, but it is not a world without barriers and challenges that must be overcome. The creative communities need to create post production products, production processes and pipeline, that efficiently create VR and deliver VR content, especially considering the file sizes involved in a VR production. In terms of monetisation consumers need to see the additional value in investing in VR devices and content. The tech is now out there but if the right content is not readily available then it might stall the adoption of HMD.

Narrow Pixel Pitch (NPP) LED Market Trend Read more
Professional AV

    Narrow Pixel Pitch (NPP) LED had a very strong year in 2015, with total value reaching $678 million in 2015, representing an increase of 201% year-on-year. The market now enters a steady but strong growth phase in 2016. Futuresource expects that the NPP LED market will account for 34% of total value in the videowall market, highly impressive for a technology that was only launched in 2012.

    In 2016, as Futuresource expected, P1.9mm starts its transition as the mainstream pixel pitch, and P0.9mm becomes the premium option. Average end user prices have been falling, due to the increase of Surface Mounted Devices (SMD) LED package production and tier 2 Chinese LED manufactures significantly expanding the local market with relatively low price SKU's.

    Chip-on-board (COB) LED continues to receive more attention, often considered to be the next technology for NPP LED. COB LED offers low energy consumption and water/dust/break proof features. Compared with SMD LED, COB LED has higher production yields and lower production costs. However, COB LED is currently unable to match the picture quality of SMD LED and the repairing process is challenging.

    Instead of racing for an ever tighter pixel pitch, vendors focused on improving products and developing better solutions. Futuresource has seen the approach from vendors change with the creation of solutions or specific products designed for specific applications. Furthermore, many vendors have moved toward a more standardised cabinet design with 27.5', with 16:9 aspect ratios seemingly the preferred size.

    The competitive landscape of the market changed in the last 18 months, with international brands like Samsung, NEC, Panasonic, Planar, Christie Digital, Delta and Eyevis all entering the market. These brands are expected to stimulate the market, especially with Sony unveiling Crystal LED Integrated Structure (CLEDIS) at InfoComm US 2016, which redefines high-end display solutions.

The HDR Challenge Read more
Media & Entertainment

    This current generational upgrade for TV is happening in two waves, the first we've already seen (increased resolution – 4K UHD); the second is the inclusion of High Dynamic Range (HDR) and Wider Colour Gamut (WCG), posing a different challenge for the industry. 

    It's clear that there is now little doubt that Ultra High Definition (UHD) will replace HD, this type of generational upgrade is of the kind we are very used to. So far, 45 million UHD TVs have been shipped globally and by 2020 UHD TVs are to account for over 50% of total TV shipments, but it could be higher. 

    The initial move to UHD came at the time when TV panel makers were seeing tight profit margins for HD. So, when the first 4K UHD TV's began to be sold in the market in 2013, almost three full years before Ultra HD Blu-ray launched, it meant that the next generation of TV technology was already experiencing a two stage implementation. Meanwhile, industry standards bodies were working on ratifying specifications for improving both colour and dynamic range of content (WCG and HDR respectively). Put simply, this allows screens to show brighter brights, darker darks, and a broader array of colours than currently can be displayed. 

    Until recently, implementation of HDR was confusing due to the number of different (and half complementary, half competing) methods, with 3 key solutions emerging:

    1. HDR10/PQ – This is the format which will primarily be adopted for pre-recorded films and TV series and is already part of the UHD Blu-ray specification. It is license and royalty free and currently supporting this solution is Samsung, LG, Philips, Sony, Panasonic and others.
    2. Hybrid Log Gamma (HLG) will primarily be adopted for live broadcasts. Its main advantage is that its fully backwards compatible with standard dynamic range TV's as well as being license and royalty free.
    3. Dolby Vision works by adding another layer of detail onto the HDR10 format, providing greater quality. However, it needs a license and therefore demands a royalty, as well as requiring higher processor power.

    There is also a notable HDR specification from Technicolor/Philips and while it does have merit, it has not yet gained the equivalent support from the industry. 

    So the challenge for the industry is how to explain this all to consumers, because while resolution does improve viewing experience, well executed HDR and WGC make a much more notable impact. Together, these three can provide an optimum UHD experience. 

    At a retail level this is a challenge, as although 72% of US consumers (some of the most tech savvy in the world) are aware of 4K UHD, just 44% are aware of HDR, according to Futuresource's recent Living with Digital consumer survey. Therefore, retail needs to inform consumers that if they want to see a significant upgrade with their new TV, they need to purchase one which includes at least HDR specifications 1 and or 2. 

    It also poses a challenge for digital video, for a number of years paid-for services have only offered the option of SD or HD, but that choice could expand significantly to include, UHD with or without HDR (in up to 3 different specifications), and potentially could have a HD with HDR option too in order to improve the picture but not be as data heavy as UHD. Either way, it's not a clean solution and likely to cause further confusion amongst consumers. 

    UHD Blu-ray has an opportunity to take advantage of this confusion as the entire eco-system works well. Consumers will still need a HDR10 compatible TV to get the full effect, but all other parts of the chain (including production, discs and players) are controlled by the single UHD Blu-ray specification. 56% of Living with Digital's EU5 and US respondents who've tried UHD Blu-ray have reported themselves 'Extremely Satisfied'.

Is this the End of Transparent OLED? Read more
Professional AV

    This week, the news wires were buzzing with news of Samsung deciding to end of life (EOL) its range of transparent OLED (TOLED) displays. The Futuresource team reported seeing TOLED products front and centre during visits to both ISE and InfoComm China this year, so this news was a touch surprising. Or with hindsight, was it really? 

    Futuresource has undertaken numerous studies to understand the potential of transparent display devices which spiked again in 2015 with the introduction of TOLED. These studies typically involve an upstream review of component production and downstream analysis of demand and usage drivers. The findings varied very little with a common set of barriers, more barrier than drivers unfortunately, dominating the discussions. 

    At a production level, and regardless of if the display was transparent or not, OLED struggles with production efficiencies in large screen sizes, maintaining extremely high price points against LCD displays. Increasing competition from Chinese LCD panel producers, coupled with the introduction of quantum dot (QD) and high dynamic range (HDR), only accentuates this position. However, it is clear that OLED is receiving an ever increasing amount of attention with mass adoption across mobile devices, securing huge R&D budgets and an investment/attention from major panel vendors ramping up in 2016. From a Pro AV perspective, LG have been showcasing OLED technology at both the ISE and InfoComm shows this year. Whilst they looked quite stunning, it was notable that LG largely stood alone in this area and one can't help but feel that this was more a glimpse of what is possible than a serious push for one of the leading commercial display vendors. 

    Of course transparent displays are nothing new to the Pro AV industry, with LCD options launched as early as 2012. The reception was mixed at best with endless interesting opportunities including fridges, vending machines and display cases, but few genuine use cases that justified the heavy cost of hardware. Beyond the high price premium, the achievable level of transparency has also been relatively low for LCD solutions, between 10-20%, with a number of component vendors and manufacturers feeling the ability to increase this ratio would overcome a significant barrier to more mainstream adoption. OLED technology gives a significant boost to transparency, but takes the hardware cost out into the stratosphere again. 

    The launch of TOLED rejuvenated interest in this segment but ultimately it has suffered a similar fate as TLCD: where is the use case? How do I justify the high CAPEX? What will be the ROI against alternative display options? 

    So does the exit of Samsung from TOLED spell the end for this technology? Futuresource certainly doesn't think so. Samsung is a volume player, sometimes display technologies are just ahead of their time and this is true for both OLED and transparency in general. All the markers seem to indicate OLED will ultimately be the 'next' mass display technology but this will take time. Though I cringe to mention it, a little like the faux pas of mentioning the Minority Report in a digital signage presentation, one can't help but be drawn to the Corning video 'A Day Made of Glass' (now viewed a staggering 25 million times) and recognise that transparent displays will become increasingly common in our lives. There are many exciting use cases for transparent displays, like everything in this business, it's just a matter of timing.

Softbank Takes the 'Long View' with ARM Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Japan's Softbank is planning to buy UK semiconductor architecture designer ARM for £24.3 billion (US $31 billion), representing a 43% premium on ARM's pre-announcement share price. If the deal goes ahead, it seems like a lot for a company, which although highly profitable, had just $1.5 billion sales and single-digit growth in 2015. What does Softbank see in strategic value to justify the price ticket? 

    ARM's Business Model
    ARM does not make chips, but licenses its core processor architecture to other companies. The average fee is a little under $0.10 per chip, an affordable fee in the context of powerful, relatively expensive devices like smartphones, tablets and servers. 

    To date, over 90 billion products have been shipped with ARM-powered processors. The bulk of these have been mobile devices, where low energy consumption is most critical; 95% of the world's cellphones use at least one chip using an ARM core or IP, and most use several (signal processing, graphics, controllers etc). 

    In 2015, 15 billion chips were shipped with ARM cores, 32% of total processor shipments estimated at 47 billion units. However, as ARM does not actually sell chips, in revenue terms its licensing income represents well under 10% of a mobile applications processor market valued at $18 billion. 

    45% of ARM's 2015 usage was in mobile devices, but use of its low power architectures is spreading into non-portable areas as energy consumption becomes increasingly important e.g. network servers and data storage. As its market share increases in new areas, ARM's sales will outgrow the semiconductor market, indeed this week it is expected to report quarterly revenue up 20%. 

    Who Is Softbank?
    Softbank is an investment holding group run by entrepreneurial Chief Executive Masayoshi Son, Japan's richest man, who has a history of placing bets on tech start-ups. His biggest success story is Alibaba, in which Softbank invested $20 million for a 32% stake in 2000. Alibaba has risen to become China's leading e-Commerce provider, valued at about $200 billion, netting Softbank over $60 billion. Currently, Softbank is selling its majority stake in Finnish gaming company Supercell (Clash of Clans) to China's Tencent, tripling its investment in three years. 

    From a business perspective, Softbank is focused on communications and internet services. Its domestic operating company has over 30 million wireless subscribers in Japan (Softbank bought out Vodafone Japan to add to its own J-Phone subscribers) and it owns 35.5% of Yahoo Japan, which provides Internet and advertising services. Softbank also owns 80% of Sprint, the #4 US mobile communications supplier, which it bought for $22 billion in 2013. 

    Does ARM Fit With Softbank?
    Despite talk about a 'paradigm shift' at Softbank towards investment in the 'Internet of Things', it is difficult to see the strategic business fit between ARM and provision of mobile internet services. This synergy is also clearly lost on some Softbank shareholders who have criticised the deal and have seen a 10% fall in their stock value since the announcement. Softbank has over $100 billion debt load and there are also concerns that the ARM deal will over-extend the company.

    From a financial point of view, ARM will not shift the needle in Softbank's $90 billion revenue, although it will make a useful profit contribution. So, it looks as though this investment is mainly based on an expectation of future growth in strategic value in ARM as it continues to expand its business, which means Softbank may have to stay in for the long haul.

Robotics in Education - Fad or Serious Trend Read more
Education Technology

    The 'Maker Market' is one of the hottest trends in the EdTech sector. Maker days are springing up everywhere and schools are increasingly creating maker spaces. The White House announced a 'National Week of Making', inviting people to hold events around the US which celebrates problem-solving and supporting new opportunities for creativity and ingenuity. The use of robotics, especially tied to coding, is developing and a key part of the 'maker' trend. Walking the halls at the recent ISTE trade show in Denver our team perception was that many of the stands from the traditional industry leaders seemed to be quieter than usual whilst the big crowds were flocking to 'maker' demonstrations. 

    We've seen this many times before in EdTech, trends come and go and many prove to be just short term fads. Whilst new technologies are picked up by the most innovative, they often founder when it comes to penetrating 'mainstream' classrooms and therefore gaining significant and sustainable scale. Digital tools have helped to reinvigorate the teaching of traditional STEM subjects in schools (science, technology, engineering, maths). Statistically, boys are much more likely to study traditional STEM subjects (and more likely to work in STEM related sectors) but the use of robotics has the potential to help address longer term gender gap issues within education. At present though, robotics solutions are often utilised in after school /extra curricula classes. To gain long term acceptance, robotics need to be integrated into the curriculum for use in the classroom. 

    Talking to vendors offering robotics solutions at ISTE, it was clear that many were emphasising the lesson plans they had created, to help teachers get to grips with the concepts of how robotics can be utilised for learning. Whilst the most innovative tend to be happy to experiment and learn for themselves, the mainstream typically need more support. So, example lesson plans with step-by-step instructions are needed. Some providers reported that they were working with (or had employed) teachers to help design lesson plans and case studies and the implementation of this is likely to be key to long term adoption. Walking the ISTE show floor however, it felt like there were almost too many new providers entering the 'maker market' and the complexity of integrating with curriculum could help to separate serious players from the rest. 

    The use of robotics has the potential to become a long term trend in education, helping to improve interest in STEM subjects and closing gender gaps. The challenge for providers will be to achieve the scale necessary, so that investment is made in teacher training and lesson plans which are linked to the curriculum. With the extremely fragmented nature of the curriculum, this is likely to be a demanding challenge and may be a long term roadblock to widespread adoption.

Vendors and Telcos Evolve their Strategies to Address the Mobile Handset Slowdown Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Focus on META for New Growth, Accessories, Dedicated Online Stores and Open-Channel Brands.

    This blog entry expands on and discusses some of the new findings from Futuresource’s most recent analysis of the mobile market.

    2016 marks a significant point in terms of handsets sales, with smartphone growth expected to fall below 10% for the first time this year. This introduces new dynamics and challenges for brands, vendors and service providers. In the past, there has always been the guarantee of new markets migrating from feature phones to smartphones, or those who jumped straight in by taking advantage of increasingly low priced devices being released in the past two years. Now the market is slowing; between 2011 and 2016 mobile penetration increased from 43% to 70%, by 2020 it is only expected to increase to 75%.

    The picture is not wholly pessimistic, there remain opportunities for growth; we forecast that annual sales of smartphones will grow by half a billion from the end of 2015 to 2020 as they account for an ever greater proportion of total handset sales (from 70% in 2015 to 84% in 2020). The advent of 5G will provide a bit of a boost in the most mature markets and there remains some growth in those still developing. Yet the safety net of overall market growth of 40-60% per annum has now gone. Differentiation between devices and brands is more difficult. Brands entering the market are able to take advantage of Android platforms from major chip vendors, offering low-priced smartphones with specifications and features that are attractive to large proportions of consumers. One impact of this, perhaps more significantly than for volumes, is that average trade value is expected to grow less than 3% in 2016 (it was over 10% two years ago), and then flat to declining from 2017 onwards. The margin for error in terms of brand positioning, distribution and retail strategy and device attractiveness is smaller than ever with brands finding it ever more difficult to bounce back from a bad year as competition gets ever more intense.

    In the past year Asia Pacific (APAC), the previous growth engine, has started to slow with China in particular flattening off and countries like Indonesia and Pakistan becoming more settled. India has relatively low penetration and is growing, although more steadily than those other countries as it is fairly conservative. Plus, competition is intense as local vendors and tier one global brands already present have seen at least 15 Chinese vendors enter the market in the past year as they look to find new growth channels beyond their domestic market (which whilst steady for volumes is fickle in terms of brands and devices). Latin America is suffering from a mix of political uncertainty and economic downturn, whilst North America and Western Europe are already saturated. Eastern Europe has some untapped potential but the economic meltdown in the biggest market, Russia, is causing a slowdown. This leaves the Middle East and Africa (MEA).

    MEA is an interesting and rapidly changing region, in a way representing the global market as some African countries are relatively untapped, with mobile and smartphone penetration as low as 20-30% and less than 10% respectively. Contrastingly, some Middle Eastern countries are amongst the most highly penetrated smartphone markets in the world (close to 90%). This has resulted in rapid growth in countries such as Egypt, Nigeria and South Africa; now the three largest smartphone markets in Africa, with both recognised and new vendors are moving quickly, building local presence and new channels to distribute their products. Companies like Tecno were among the first to recognise this, establishing a position alongside the likes of Samsung and Apple. Others are catching up quickly with Huawei and Lenovo being fast-growing brands in the region. Now we are seeing companies like Wileyfox from Europe, Micromax and Karbonn from India and Chinese vendors, such as Infinix and OPPO, looking to introduce their entry-level products to very price sensitive consumers.

    This competition has already had an effect. Futuresource increased its estimates for 2015 smartphone sales in MEA due to the demand for sub-$100 smartphones, with the annual growth rate raised from 29% to 51% as adoption happens faster. There is a slight trade-off with later growth being reduced slightly (from 10% to 5% in 2020), as penetration cannot continue but this combines to highlight why companies are so keen to tap into what is effectively the only region delivering significant growth over the next five years. Such has been the growth, Futuresource’s latest analysis now shows MEA is expected to become a larger smartphone market than Western Europe next year.

Netflix Second Quarter Results Should not be Evaluated in Isolation Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Netflix announced a lower than expected 1.7 million global net additions in Q2 2016, below expectations of many onlookers, as well as its own. It largely blames the recent announcement of price rises and subsequent increase in churn. However, these results are not entirely surprising. There are a number of factors to consider when monitoring Netflix's performance, with the future outlook for both domestic and global growth still providing encouragement for investors:

    1) Netflix added just under 300,000 paid streaming members this quarter in the USA, but domestic subscriber growth has exceeded expectations for some time, particularly when you consider that Netflix penetration of broadband households has now passed 50% (this excludes those who are using someone else's subscription).

    2) As it is for any subscription service, churn management is clearly key for Netflix now. The no-contract approach makes the service more accessible to a wider base, but it makes it easier to "dip-in and out". Futuresource Consulting's just published Living with Digital consumer survey suggests that over one-third of current and previous US Netflix subscribers have cancelled then re-started their subscription in the last year, a figure that is also similar in many European countries covered by the research. Key to managing this will be ongoing refreshment of content, particularly for both its originals and exclusives.

    3) As subscriber growth inevitably slows, the focus will steadily shift to growing ARPU. The price increases and grandfathering process are a key part of growing this ARPU and indeed, Futuresource's Living with Digital survey indicates that over 90% of Netflix subscribers in the USA and key European markets feel that Netflix is value for money. Even further price rises would not put off most subscribers to Netflix, the vast majority of Netflix US users would happily absorb a $2 price rise.

    4) ARPU growth is also being achieved by steadily shifting consumers to the premium, family plan. Around 20% of US and UK subscribers claim to be this top tier, as highlighted in the Living with Digital survey. Further growth is expected in this category, with increased emphasis expected to be placed on growing this tier, particularly as more 4K UHD content is introduced. 

    5) Despite Netflix now being available in almost every country, international net additions were below expectations at 1.5 million in Q2 (paid member additions were 1.9 million). However, in many "rest of world" markets, the launch of "skinny Netflix" required comparatively low capital investment and is more of a stake in the ground for longer term growth opportunities. In the larger non-English speaking markets such as France, the availability of local language content is critical in attracting new subscribers but perhaps more importantly, retaining existing subscribers. 

    Amazon Prime Video will provide the greatest competition in many markets (where available), at least in the short term, as it grows its user base impressively and is set to launch in new markets such as France, Italy, Spain and potentially others. However, Futuresource research indicates a significant overlap between Netflix and Amazon Prime Video users, across the key markets of the USA, UK and Germany; indeed, over half of Netflix subscribers also use APV. 
    Moving forwards, monitoring measurements beyond that of just subscriber growth will become of increased relevance, as Netflix continues to focus on improving its content offering whilst managing the fine balancing act of growing ARPU against subscriber retention.

How Etail Players are Eroding the Traditional Reseller Channel Read more
Professional AV

    Projector resellers are facing increasing pressure from the expected long-term decline of the mainstream market. However, traditional 'bricks and mortar' resellers face further challenges from online retail, particularly from mass merchandisers such as Amazon and Media Markt which are able to undercut traditional resellers partly due to their lower overheads.

    A survey conducted by Futuresource of projector resellers across EU5 (France, Germany, Italy, Spain and the UK) found that close to half of those who responded had seen a negative impact on their business due to online competition. Much of the negative impact had been seen in low-margin mainstream product sales (standard throw <5000 lumens) where the resellers believed that they had lost out mostly to etail where Corporate customers required one-off replacements – this was also witnessed in Education with entry-level product, albeit to a lesser extent.

    Though losses of small-quantity sales to etail competitors were frequent, it had been revealed that resellers were largely immune to the impact of etail competition when either the corporate or education sectors required large quantities for replacement or new room builds. The lack of expertise in pre-sales consultation, integration and post-sales support put mass merchandisers at a distinct disadvantage against traditional resellers. 

    More than half of the resellers that had seen a negative impact on their business by online retailers were actively reviewing their strategy to increase their portfolio of value-added services and after-sales support to fight against further losses from the etail channel. Though a typical trait of IT dealers, some AV dealers admitted to diversifying their product range with peripherals to boost their margins. Interestingly, despite the potential boost to their revenue from online sales, only a third of these resellers had a website of their own which allowed customers to make a transaction. This insight is a summary of Futuresource's Projector Quarterly Reseller Index.

DVD Royalties - The Final Curtain Read more
Media & Entertainment

    A longstanding and contentious issue for the optical disc replication industry has been the requirement to pay a royalty to a number of patent pools on each good disc manufactured. CD royalties expired in the early part of the last decade, except in the USA where they were enforced until 2008. Since 2013 the essential patents required for DVD production have begun to gradually expire. By early 2017 the royalty obligation on DVD production is expected to have ended thus easing the cost burden on the replication industry. BD patents, however, will largely begin to expire between 2020 and 2025 although some will remain active until 2030. 

    A Bit of History…
    At its peak no fewer than five patent pools were actively seeking DVD royalties from disc replicators, 6C (representing Hitachi, JVC, Kenwood, Mitsubishi, Panasonic, Samsung, Sanyo, Sharp, Toshiba and Warner Bros), 3C (representing Sony, Philips, Pioneer and LG), MPEG LA (which represented around 20 organisations including Sony, JVC, Thomson, as well as Scientific Atlanta and France Telecom) in addition to DVA (Discovision Associates) which was only active in the USA. Thomson also had patents on DVD.

    At the launch of the format in 1997 the collective royalty level stood at US$0.198 per disc in the USA (US$0.168 in Europe), which at the time represented a manageable 4% to 5% of the overall DVD9 manufacturing price. By the turn of the century, as disc volumes and industry competition increased and pushed disc manufacturing prices downwards, the proportion of the average DVD9 replication price represented by the royalty began to increase significantly. Although the patent pools implemented reductions in the royalty rates, a combination of the competitive nature of the replication industry, customer pressure and increasing disc production volumes, meant that the reduction was invariably outpaced by the speed of replication price erosion. As a result, the royalty accounted for an estimated 15% of the DVD9 replication price in the USA (12% in Europe) in 2000, rising to close to a fifth by 2005, at which time the collective royalty had fallen to US$ 0.134 in the US and US$0.116 per disc in Europe.

    At this point in time DVD production volumes were achieving healthy double digit growth rates year on year and industry wide capacity utilisation rates were healthy (65% of global capacity was utilised in 2005). However this was counterbalanced by rising oil prices and polycarbonate production issues which meant that raw materials prices were increasing and consequently production margins and disc replication prices were placed under immense pressure. This brought greater focus on the royalties issue and increased lobbying by the industry association iODRA.

    The Uneven Playing Field
    As with CD before it, a controversial element of the royalty was the subject of cross licencing, whereby technology companies holding patents would cross licence with each other to effectively discount their royalty obligations. As a result their disc replicator subsidiaries were able to gain a perceived price advantage over replicators without cross licensee status.

    This situation was further exasperated by the inconsistent approach as to where patents were registered, for example not all patents were registered in Eastern Europe thus granting a price advantage to Eastern European plants over their Western European counterparts. Although attempts were made to counteract this, specifically by implementing the full royalty on discs exported to countries where the full royalty was in place, however this was difficult to police. 
    The uneven playing field was further compounded by the issue of non-compliant replicators who sought to avoid paying some or all of the royalties, in order to either ease margins or make themselves more price competitive. 

    Invariably this resulted in cries of foul play by compliant manufacturers and those replicators without cross licensee status, lamenting the lack of a level playing field, and resulted in a failed bid to petition the EU to intervene and harmonise the situation. 

    Fallen on Hard Times. 
    DVD production peaked in 2008 with global production volumes of 8.7 billion discs and the industry fell in to decline shortly after. Diminishing replication demand pushed industrywide capacity utilisation beneath 50% from 2010 and it has steadily worsened, placing greater pressure on replicators, replication prices and production margins. Although there is little scope for downward movement in manufacturing prices for many replicators. The worsening market conditions resulted in a slew of factory closures and industry downsizing and consolidation in the years that followed.

    Expiry Dates
    2016 finds the industry in ill health, the outlook is for global DVD output to fall to around 3 billion discs by the year end, with around one third of available global capacity being utilised and further rationalisation is expected. 

    A positive for those manufacturers still active is the gradual removal of the disc royalty as the essential patents begin to expire. The AC-3 patent was the first to go having expired at the end of 2013. Since late 2015, there has been a gradual fall away of essential patents amongst the different patent pools. By Q2 2017 it is anticipated that all major patents will have expired; with the exception of a small number of territories which don’t currently have a replication industry.

    Consequently the cost burden on replicators will lighten, although moving forward it is uncertain as to whether they will be able to use the lack of royalties to shore up margins or whether this will be passed on to their customers in a new round of price reductions, in reality it may well be both.

    Submarine Patents
    While the current disc patents become increasingly redundant, this may not be the end of the royalty situation. Throughout the history of optical disc production there have been incidences of companies emerging outside of the regular royalty groups with individual patent claims, some of which have traction and some of which have faded away. The latest “submarine patent” claim is by Laser Dynamics which is known to have made royalty claims against US DVD replicators. The possibility of yet to emerge patent claims may result in some DVD royalty payment requirement for the industry moving forward.

Is the Gap Between Technology Suppliers and End-Users Increasing? Read more
Education Technology

    Innovation in the supply side of the EdTech industry continues to develop at pace. Virtual reality, predictive analytics and adaptive learning are just a few of the developing trends, but is the gap between what technology suppliers are offering and what end users are able to effectively leverage in the classroom beginning to grow? As the market matures, EdTech is increasingly penetrating a more mainstream user base, not just innovators. So, usage messages need to focus on being simpler.

    The EdTech ecosystem is constantly evolving, with increasing numbers of platforms and applications being made available to schools. This increasing number of options is creating fragmentation in the ecosystem, which is confusing end users when it comes to selecting and using the right tools to achieving their desired learning outcomes. As an analyst tracking the category full time, it is incredibly hard to keep up to date with all of the various providers entering the market as well as the different product categories emerging. If we find it hard to stay up to date, how must
    users feel? 

    The chart below shows our interpretation of how we believe the platform landscape within the EdTech landscape currently sits, but there are many blurring lines and arguments could be made that many other categories exist. The chart highlights the bewildering number of different types of platforms that exist in the market and that’s before you start to explore the digital content landscape. 

    There is no doubt, that whilst in many ways it is positive that the industry continues to innovate and new providers with fresh ideas continue to flood the market. What the industry needs now is scale and for clear leaders to emerge. Walking the recent ISTE tradeshow floor, it was clear that many providers are locking in to the Google (Classroom and Apps for Education) and Microsoft (Office, Classroom and OneNote) ecosystems. Adoption of interoperability standards such as LTI and OneRoster is increasing (in the US market at least, much less on a global scale where custom APIs are still most common) allowing for simpler integration of platforms. Seamless integration is needed in order for platforms to efficiently and securely share the data required for users to be able to make informed decisions via data analytic tools. 

    A key question moving forward will be how much of the ecosystem the major OS providers will want to bring in house, for example will we see data analytics tools wrapped into the wider OS offering? This will be a key consideration moving forward, by integrating solutions into their offering, they are potentially helping to simplify and provide scale to the industry. Too much integration however, could result in them stepping on incumbent provider’s toes. In addition, we anticipate a movement towards consolidation in the industry (as seen by PowerSchools acquisition of Haiku Learning), especially in the SIS & LMS space. 

    What’s clear to see, is that end users are crying out for simplicity. The growth of Clever in the US is a clear example. Despite a business model that is generally seen as unpopular with the publishers, (as they take a % of publisher revenue) Clever has developed a strong position with many districts informing suppliers that they have to integrate with Clever in order to operate within the district. 

    The education ecosystem is currently too complex and confusing for users and it is holding the industry back. Industry providers and associations need to continue to seek, work on, develop and deploy interoperability standards on a large scale, thereby ensuring a more cohesive learning environment for end users.

ISTE 2016 - Evolution Not Revolution Read more
Education Technology

    A concise summary of our view of the show would be 'evolution' rather than 'revolution' in terms of developments in the EdTech market. Many of the key themes seen on the show floor were around integrating and implementing technology solutions in a more efficient, joined up and effective way. We have talked before about how the fragmented education ecosystem was causing confusion for end users in our latest blog article, which focuses on the issue of simplicity. Click here to view>>. Walking round the show floor, providers were advertising partnerships and integrations with third party platforms (integration into the Google and Microsoft ecosystems most prevalent). It was noticeable that there were limited product announcements or developments with significant 'wow' factor. 

    From an individual exhibitor point of view, Amazon's announcement of the Inspire Open Educational Resource (OER) platform was a major talking point. The entrance (entrance in the sense of this announcement, Amazon does already operate in education) of a heavyweight provider such as Amazon caused much discussion. The industry is desperately in need of scale, especially in terms of content curation and central locations for content discovery so the announcement was broadly welcomed. Whilst currently a non-profit play, as part of the US Department of Education 'GoOpen' initiative, it is clear to see that longer term the platform has the potential to become a powerful one stop shop for curated paid for content. 

    The 'Maker Market' has seen significant discussion in the US through 2015/16 and this momentum continued at ISTE with a noticeably large number of demonstrations of robotics and 3D printing solutions especially. In addition, there were multiple conference sessions discussing how best to utilise and implement 'Maker' spaces. It was also noteworthy that many of the 'Maker' stands seemed to be the best attended. As with many new usage trends, the challenge now for producers is to get past the 'innovator' stage of market uptake (i.e. teachers who are happy to create, trial and develop usage themselves) and penetrate mainstream users in order to start to scale volumes. A key challenge to widespread adoption will be ensuring solutions are integrated into state curriculums and specific lesson plans. Providers are starting with this process and many stated that they have developed large numbers of lesson plans. Integration into the various state curriculums is less developed and this will prove a real challenge to market providers. 

    Virtual Reality was a key theme on the show floor with numerous demonstrations taking place. Google announced its 'Expeditions' program is now live following an extensive beta testing program that reached more than 1 million students. The platform launches with more than 200 separate 'Expeditions'. Many of the leading publishers were demonstrating content they had created for the program, in addition openly admitting they had further developments in the pipeline. 

    The market for classroom collaboration tools has become one of the most overcrowded sections of the EdTech market. I have lost count of the number of solutions I have seen that offer some combination of screen mirroring, screen casting, Q&A functionality and content distribution. There are many specialist providers offering paid for solutions in this space, but with so many free solutions (that admittedly don't typically have the same level of functionality) carving out a clear market position has been hard. 

    Google has brought some scale and much needed simplicity to this sector of the market by launching Google Cast for Education. A free Chrome app that allows students and teachers to share screens wirelessly. With Google's wide adoption (more than 10 million users of Google Classroom) and the full integration into the Google ecosystem, Google Cast for Education is likely to be adopted quickly, making it harder for providers seeking to commercialise dedicated collaboration/screen sharing solutions. 

    Utilising data to help drive learning outcomes was clearly a big topic at the show. Whilst the utilisation of data is not new, many cite the fact that end users are struggling to understand how to glean insight from data. Part of this issue, is that different parts of the supply chain are collecting disparate data (SIS, LMS, Publishers) and integration between platforms is often not simple. Custom APIs and even CSV data transfers between disparate systems remains common. Interoperability standards are key to ensuring efficient & secure data transfer takes place whilst managing privacy issues. Moving forward, the question of who in the supply chain holds the data is likely to be a key question in supply chain developments. 

    On the display side of things, interactive displays are transitioning towards flat panel technology with fewer projection vendors demonstrating. PCAP touch technology is emerging, whilst more expensive it offers significant benefits (accuracy and speed).

    Finally, it is worth noting what wasn't at the show. There was almost no presence for wearable devices. A couple of vendors had them on their stands, but with no education usage case (essentially just a consumer demonstration unit). Whilst wearable usage in education has been discussed for some time, the 'killer app' is yet to become clear (certainly in k-12 at least). 

    Perhaps understandably due to the nature of the show there was very limited evidence of the Internet of Things, a hot topic amongst the EdTech technological supply chain. Futuresource understands that most of the supply chain focus is on the area of 'Smart Campus' (i.e. smart lighting, security etc) as opposed to the 'Smart Classroom' (utilising sensors, wearables etc) so ISTE is likely the wrong trade show for such demonstrations (more likely initial uptake in Higher Education).

    To summarise, KISS (Keep it simple stupid!) seems like an apt phrase to describe the industry status currently. Whilst providers are catching on to this and increasingly preaching the message, the fact remains the supply ecosystem is too fragmented. The industry needs scale providers to develop and increasing adoption of interoperability standards in order to simplify usage for end users. 

Starz Deal Strengthens Lionsgate Market Reach Read more
Media & Entertainment

    The marriage of Lionsgate and Starz has finally reached the altar following the announcement that Lionsgate will acquire Starz for $4.4 billion in cash and stock. The move will bring Lionsgate a new conduit to the valuable US cable market as well additional international and SVoD distribution. Starz will be able to lift its game in terms of original content in the fight against its bigger rivals HBO (owned by Time Warner), Showtime (CBS) and the growing power
    of Netflix.

    Canadian-American Lionsgate built its early business on low budget horror movie franchises like Saw but really hit the ramp with the global blockbuster Hunger Games and sequels. It has also been pushing strongly into TV production to diversify. In 2015, TV production grew to 24% of Lionsgate's $2.4 billion revenue and in recent years it has produced a string of hit series which have been distributed on broadcast, cable and SVoD e.g. Anger Management, Orange is the New Black, Nashville, Mad Men, Manhattan and Nurse Jackie.

    Starz is one of the top three premium Pay-TV channels in the USA, with about 24 million subscribers (55m including Encore). In the last few years it has started beefing up original content, and aired 76 episodes of original series in 2015 including Outlander, Fresh Bone and Blunt Talk. However, it is well behind HBO, which has kept original productions up to half of output, and, more recently Netflix, which has bet heavily on original series following the global success of House of Cards. Starz has been pushing into OTT delivery and has a partnership with Amazon and T-Mobile, which offers Starz Play free and unlimited to its subscribers. Starz Play also launched internationally in 2015, with a focus on the Middle East. 

    Starz Inc was spun out from media investment conglomerate Liberty Media in 2013, but Liberty remains the majority shareholder and the Starz deal will bring Chairman John Malone onto the management board of Lionsgate. Lionsgate owns 31% of much smaller Pay-TV channel Epix and will now probably seek to sell this. The deal is part of ongoing consolidation in Entertainment which has been occurring as most recently illustrated by the Universal Dreamworks acquisition. Next moves could include the sale of Paramount.

The Impact of VR and 360 Video on the Professional Acquisition Market Read more
Broadcast & Professional Video Equipment

    Strictly speaking, 360 video isn't virtual reality (which tends to be computer rendered), but virtual reality and 360 video have become one and the same thing in popular parlance as they often (but not always) use the same headsets to
    view content.

    The ability to watch 360 video on YouTube and Facebook without the need for headsets is a key differentiator between the two technologies as it immediately gives video creators popular platforms on which to publish their videos that doesn't need additional investment from consumers. Essentially, 360 video is currently far more accessible than
    "true" VR.

    Many of the production challenges that exist for VR are the same for 360 video, but the unique and rather obvious difference is that 360 video requires a camera, or more specifically, cameras.

    The principles of 360 video are well understood – multiple cameras are required to provide 360 degree coverage, the images of which are stitched together to produce a coherent video – but there is a wide degree of variation in the way this is achieved.

    Many productions are using multiple cameras mounted on a rig, which at the low end (the GoPro Odyssey and Facebook Surround 360 rigs for example) is an affordable solution, but at the high end cinema quality images are traded off against extremely high cost and unfavourable physical characteristics – imagine the size, weight and cost of a 16 camera Arri Alexa rig for example!

    Another issue is that however accurately engineered the rig is, inaccuracies produced when mounting the cameras will result in greater issues when stitching the content and so many productions favour integrated cameras to minimise this.

    At NAB this year there was an array of cameras claiming to be professional, but most could optimistically be described as "prosumer" at best. Still, these cameras can and are being used by professionals to experiment in the art of 360 productions and in many and varied professional applications where the 360 element adds a new dimension. One example that has been given is consumer 360 cameras being used by forensic teams to give greater context to the high quality photographs taken at crime scenes.

    At the high end of the integrated 360 camera spectrum there are only a small number of models on the market. The Nokia Ozo and Jaunt One the two main contenders, although high prices and limited availability means that sales are currently limited. Futuresource expects sales will remain low, especially as once the initial early adopters have purchased, the industry is likely to rely on a rental model due to the experimental stage at which 360 video is currently at. Unless 360 video is the bread and butter of a production company, renting makes a lot more sense than investing in a $60K camera - a trend seen across the camera markets.

    Professional 360 cameras will remain niche in the short to mid-term. In Europe, the market will be around 10% the size of the European digital cinema market in 2016, but longer term they will play an increasingly important role in the acquisition market overall.

Brexit - What Might be the Implications for the CE Market? Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Last week's decision by the UK to exit the European Union raises many questions for the consumer electronics industry. The most fundamental being – what impact will this have on sales? 

    To answer this accurately implies knowledge of the impact it will have on the economy, on prices, on household disposable income and on consumer confidence. All of these are of course a matter of opinion, with the phrases 'Uncharted Territory' and 'Uncertainty' being a regular response from the experts. 

    So what can we be sure about? Is there anything we can learn from history?
    Firstly, most independent economic forecast agencies warned before the vote that a UK withdrawal from the EU would have a negative impact on the economy. In other words, the economy would be smaller than otherwise predicted, at least in the short to mid-term. This would particularly impact the UK, which is one of the EU's largest economies. They generally advised that UK Sterling would lose value versus the Euro and the US Dollar, whilst the Euro would do likewise versus the US Dollar. 

    This could lead to higher interest rates in the UK, which would then reduce consumers' disposable income. Futuresource concluded that – based on these predictions – consumer spending on discretionary items would also be negatively impacted in the short to mid-term and that the market in the UK would be most affected, but that it would also negatively affect other EU markets and economies to a lesser extent. 

    The exchange rates have indeed taken a hit in the three working days since the result was announced, with Sterling down 7% Vs the Euro and 10% Vs US$. The longer term is of course still a matter of conjecture, but the likelihood is that there will be some recovery after the initial shock. Regarding interest rates in the UK, these may not rise in the way that was anticipated before the Brexit decision as the Bank of England looks set to intervene to keep rates down. 

    The last time there was such economic uncertainty in Europe was of course in 2008 with the worldwide collapse in banking and resulting recession. However, the CE market survived and parts even thrived. Whilst consumers delayed replacing their cars [the global car market fell by around 40% in 2009] and slashed discretionary expenditure on dining out, going to the theatre and expensive foreign holidays, they targeted their remaining cash on items that they perceived to give them better long term value. In such times, consumers often hunker down in the home and invest in products that make their lifestyle at home more enjoyable and fulfilling. They also shopped around more in search of the best price. We saw deals advertised as 'Credit Crunch busters' to persuade shoppers to take the plunge. Value tends to suffer more than volume in times of economic stress, with margins being squeezed even further.

    Which types of CE product are likely to fare better than others if there is a marked economic downturn? 
    Generally speaking, economic downturns have the biggest impact on product categories which are mature, and are seen as somewhat discretionary. Current examples would include Tablets, Compact Digital Cameras, DVD players and secondary TVs. Adoption and replacement of these devices might be deferred until economic stability returns, or put off completely. 

    Anything which is perceived as a necessity and is coming to the end of its effective working life will be replaced by the consumer if at all possible. This would include Washing Machines, Refrigerators and Smartphones.

    Products, meanwhile, which are already on a high growth curve – the current 'must-haves'- will continue to grow, but likely at a slower pace or at least with lower prices attached. Devices in this category in the opinion of Futuresource include Smartwatches, Wireless Speakers and Wireless Headphones. In the early years of the 21stC, DVD Players were the must-have product and sales growth continued despite the economic recession and stock market collapse that occurred in the wake of the terrorist attacks on the Twin Towers in Sept 2001. Not only was it a growth product at the time, but it also played into the social trend of staying at home. 

    From a content perspective, the Pay-TV industry came through the last recession relatively unscathed as consumers opted to retain their TV packages in the light of spending more time at home. It's worth noting though that Brexit will prompt some vexed discussions on issues which go to the heart of the content industry – movement of skills and talent from other countries, copyright, broadcast standards and taxes. It remains to be seen how these might impact the future pricing of entertainment content.

    In short, if there is a marked economic aftershock - which seems likely at least in the short term - consumers will prioritise what products they choose to buy and will seek the best price, possibly trading downwards in terms of features or brand.

    The UK economy will obviously survive. Its entrepreneurial flair, increasing focus on non-EU trade, and likely policy accommodation by the Bank of England and UK Treasury will all help to stabilise and recover the economy in the medium to long term. However, getting to the next stage could be a long process, leaving considerable uncertainty for UK citizens and markets. The extent of the damage now rests largely on the way the exit is managed. Of particular importance to the UK economy will be ensuring London's continued pre-eminence in financial services. This sector is highly important in the country's wealth creation and hence consumer spending.

    Meanwhile, CE vendors and retailers need to manage their businesses in order to mitigate the consequences of any downturn.

Apple Helps Wearables Revenue Accelerate Year-on-Year, While Migrates to Smartwatches, and Dedicated Fitness Revenues Slow Read more
Consumer Electronics

    Following the release of the latest Futuresource WW Wearables Report we would like to share some of the topline trends, data points and market shares in the wearables market. In Q1 2016, worldwide revenue for wearable devices surged 133% to nearly $6 billion (at retail) year-on-year, fuelled by connected watches, notably as Apple Watch passes its 1st birthday. Units grew significantly less than value, representing 50% uplift in the average price paid for a wearable device, to $218.

    Within the health & fitness category, activity trackers continue to be the standout performer, with volumes growing 18% in the quarter, to reach 10.7 million units, while sports watches with GPS and heart-rate monitoring (using chest-straps) grew 11%. Fitbit and Xiaomi commanded more than 70% share of activity tracker volumes while Garmin, Polar and Suunto remained the most popular brands in sports watches, used by fitness enthusiasts and endurance athletes. 

    Unit growth for activity trackers has come at the expense of tumbling prices and ultimately rapid feature commoditisation - average prices for the category fell 40% in 2015, versus 2014. 

    With falling prices and value migrating to connected watches, overall spend on health & fitness wearables grew only 2% in 2015 and are expected to witness similar underwhelming growth this year, despite unit and penetration growth. As a result, vendors are focusing efforts on additional revenue streams such as accessories (bands, etc.), in-app engagement, emerging markets (where penetration is almost zero), and repositioning in to watches and jewellery. 

    A number of brands from the world of tech and fashion are manoeuvring for position with partnerships and acquisitions - Nokia buying French wearable-health Withings, Fossil acquired Misfit, and Fitbit recently acquired Coin which will allow them to add payment technology to their devices.

    While Apple Watch uptake continues to fall short of early forecasts, Apple already ranks among the largest watchmakers in the world in revenue terms, behind giants Swatch and Rolex, and ahead of Fossil, Citizen, Casio, Richemont, LVMH and other well-known heavyweights in watch making. This serves as a stark reminder of Apple's global reach and pull and how smartphones have redefined market success, in terms of scale and rate of adoption. 

    These global insights are in the latest quarterly results from Futuresource global wearables report, which focuses on the total market size, sales, forecasts, product type and technologies. Its detailed tracking of the wearables landscape provides a snapshot of the current market status, analysis of the latest trends as well as providing longer term forecasts.

Have you heard of Twitch and a Question I Often ask People Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Video gaming has come a long way, appealing now to a wider demographic than ever, from casual app gaming through to truly immersive experiences offered by VR.

    However, popularity is not just limited to the playing of games, but also the watching of others playing; carving out a new genre of video content, a new sport, and a new form of sportsperson, with professional gamers seeking recognition akin to the likes of Brady and Ronaldo. And now the industry is breaking away from their niche online ecosystem to the mainstream world of TV.

    Currently Twitch, (Amazon owned gaming social video site), is the number one destination for both individuals to broadcast their game play and the first choice for professional competitive gaming ‘eSport’ tournament organisers to broadcast their matches. And when you consider the site sees the average viewer watching 421.6 minutes per month, compared to a mere 291 on YouTube, it comes as no surprise that companies are increasingly looking to partner with Twitch.

    For a game that involves players ‘twiddling their thumbs’ for hours, the above numbers are extremely impressive. So it comes as no surprise traditional broadcasters are now looking to take a share of Twitch’s action. Also factoring in the proposals currently sat with the IOC for esports to become a recognised Olympic event in 2020 games, the esport content pool is likely to get a whole lot bigger.

    However, is it possible for the same viewership to transfer to linear viewing? Will the millennial population pull away from their laptops/mobiles and move to the TV?

    Two of the main challenges to esport working on scheduled TV are firstly:

    a)    The loss of interactivity

    Part of what makes Twitch extremely popular is the interactivity and the ability to share commentary directly with other viewers whilst watching the events, allowing everyone’s inner Simon Cowell to come out. This has been one of the key drivers to increasing viewership for game events and something that may not transfer well to TV where commentary would be need to run on a secondary device or service such as Twitter. Facebook is attempting to enter the broadcast field in esport, and whilst this would allow direct commentary, the loss of anonymity in providing it may prove to be unpopular with the more ‘vicious’ spectators. 

    b)    Returning to the familial screen.

    Whilst wide scale TV broadcasting seems to be the end game for the evolution of eSport, it will be a challenge to the industry to transfer a generation defined by the internet to the traditional TV set. But there is no shortage of companies willing to take a punt on making it work.

    Turner recently announced a multi-year deal with Twitch to broadcast its ELeague three times per week through the site to over 80 countries; this will be complemented by a weekly roundup show on Turner’s US linear channel TBS. The Eleague appears to be showing early signs of success gaining 500k viewers for the first broadcast at a 10pm slot and as broadcasts continue, this initiative could seek to grow its audience share outside of primetime.
    Traditional broadcasters are likely to see difficulties in getting similar viewership seen on Twitch. However, eSport could help to break a new primetime for the video gaming masses, by utilising a generally less profitable late night time slot. 

    Esport is and will continue to be largely prosperous whether it be online or on TV. Recent rumours of ESPN offering $500m to Riot Games for League of Legends may have come up false; however it does set a standard in the industry of how potentially valuable esport could be.

    Personally, I’m not a fan, but I’m a rare breed. Esport is in it for the long run, so expect broadcasters, brands, advertisers, gamers all swarming towards this new money maker. Say goodbye to your sponsorships NBA stars; the nerds are coming to claim it!

InfoComm 2016 - Window into the World of Displays Read more
Professional AV

    The Futuresource professional AV team attended Infocomm 2016, meeting clients and scanning the floor for the latest innovations in this space. For those that did not attend this show, we wanted to share what we found to be the big display themes, which did reflect the trends from European market, captured in our ISE 2016 report.

    The final numbers for the US show InfoComm 2016 did echo the feedback from exhibitors and visitors alike, it felt quiet, which is strange for a Vegas based show!

    However, given the increasing influence of ISE in Amsterdam, arguably the premier global professional AV show, it was excellent to see a few exciting product launches timed for this US show. Whilst the numbers were down, there was certainly a buzz around the show floor and positive steps to introduce new areas including drones and the internet of things (IoT), which will maintain its future relevance. 


    Following the trends seen at ISE and reflected in sales performance, solid state projection (SSL), mostly high bright laser phosphor, was heavily promoted by almost every vendor at the show, and rightly so given its importance to the category. 

    InfoComm 2016 was not necessarily about what was being shown but rather how it was being shown. Several brands, in fact most, demonstrated projectors being used in micro or large-scale mapped installations. This was most notable on the Epson stand, following the same theme it adopted at ISE, the brand partnered with DATATON to highlight its intention to be recognised as a leader in high-end, as well as mainstream projection.

    Closely linked to both the above points, digital signage played a pivotal role on most brands’ stands, finally making this application viable to all product segments. Brands were keen to illustrate how projection’s inherent flexibility creates a wealth of opportunity for players in this space. The Panasonic Space Player, though not a new product, is a great example of this trend.

    As the impact of flat panel displays in presentation applications becomes more wildly felt, we expect projector brands to devote more time in demonstrating how the technology can do far more than mirror a computer screen.

    Beyond solid state illumination (SSI), brands continue to accelerate the introduction of high resolution projectors with 4K, liquid crystal on silicon (LCOS) and digital light processing (DLP) chipsets, very clearly a trend highlighting the level of investment in the installation space.


    NPP LED stood out clearly in the latest Futuresource Global Video Wall Report, NPP LED, <3mm was front and centre for most of the leading display vendors. Indeed, it is quite amazing to see how this new display technology has moved from the darkest depths, at the back of ‘hall nowhere’, to be such a prominent category, in such a short space of time.

    The Sony 1.2 CLEDIS (Crystal LED Integrated Structure) wall was the show stopping technology for Futuresource, rarely without a huge crowd. Deliberately avoiding the techie side of the product, it has very high contrast potential in well-lit environments and produces a smooth continuous image.

    Numerous LED product developments were on show across the floor, cable-less solutions, curved mounting, etc., another key indicator of the rapid maturity in this category. Silicon core is the other vendor worthy of individual note, launching both P0.95mm indoor and P3.9mm outdoor solutions. 

    Commercial Flat Panel

    The commercial LCD category felt a little flat, no pun intended, at this year’s show. We have already been through the 4K, and to a point the super large screen size buzz, so the addition of new headline grabbing products was limited. In fairness this is also a consequence of so many launches timed for ISE this year.

    Nevertheless, there were some trends and announcements that caught our eye. The first of these was the clear push into high brightness categories with all the key vendors emphasising this segment. In the case of Samsung, this manifested itself into an impressive full outdoor demonstration, an area that Futuresource believes is primed for growth in the next few years.

    The sheer scale and visibility of NPP LED makes it easy to forget that the LCD narrow bezel (NB) category is still the dominant video wall technology with 64% value share in 2015 and one that has enjoyed another round of development, with vendors launching extreme narrow bezel (eXNB) product to market. This creates a third segment, <3mm bezel to bezel and brings the category ever closer to seamless display. 

    We would be remiss if we didn’t also mention the array of stunning, organic light-emitting diode (OLED) technology from LG, in particular the double sided display. Whilst the current price points are extremely prohibitive, and likely to stay that way for some time given production issues, the displays are quite stunning and have the wow factor that exhibitors and attendees crave. 

    This is a very quick and high level overview of display technology at the show, please feel free to reach out directly for a more detailed discussion.

Taiwanese Giant Foxconn Acquire 66% Stake in the Interactive Whiteboard Manufacturer SMART Read more
Education Technology

    Now the doors to the American AV tradeshow Infocomm2016 have opened, the industry will be taking in the recent news of the acquisition of the interactive whiteboard manufacturer SMART by the world's largest electronics manufacturer Foxconn, which now owns a 66.67% stake in its business. This follows its recent purchase of Sharp Electronics a couple of months ago.

    Traditional Western based interactive whiteboard makers have come under severe pressure in recent years as market growth has slowed and users have increasingly invested in personal learning solutions such as computers, tablets and connectivity as opposed to ‘front of class’ tools. Early adopter markets being the US and UK have now slowed down with wider global uptake being slow in comparison. Whilst uptake in China is currently booming. China currently accounts for more than 50% of global market sales. The market is serviced by local providers so Western providers have been unable to effectively penetrate the leading global market.

    One of the commercial problems of traditional whiteboard technology is its longevity, with devices typically lasting upwards of 10 years, meaning a limited replacement market opportunity in comparison to many other hardware devices. In the rapid growth years of the early 2000s, SMART sold its whiteboards and software as one solution, with one upfront total fee.   This model worked well, until the major early adopter markets of the UK and US started to slow and SMART was unable to drive ongoing revenues from its loyal existing customer base. For a while complementary solutions to the whiteboard such as voting systems, visualisers and audio systems, offered substantial margin opportunities but these solutions then came under pressure from the multi-functional computing devices, especially tablets. SMART eventually sought to differentiate its software from the hardware offering with annual licenses for SMART Notebook but this move was arguably made too late, as users were not used to paying for display software.    

    SMART, despite its troubled history of late, undeniably has a strong brand in the education sector. This transaction with Foxconn provides access to significant resources, a plethora of partners, markets, technologies and finance that will enable SMART to put its troubles behind and prepare for significant growth. The implications of such an acquisition are huge when considering the various partners and technologies the firm already has access to beyond the world of professional AV.  Specifically, in the AV space, Foxconn already owns Sharp and InFocus.  The interactive display market is transitioning away from whiteboard technology to flat panel technology, 55% of educations sales in 2015 were flat panels.  Sharp owns a 10th generation panel production factory and a combination of Sharp’s flat panel production expertise and pricing competiveness with SMART software, brand, huge classroom installed base and route to market promises to be a strong combination. 

    The Corporate Market – Forecasted to be a 2.6 billion $ opportunity in 2020

    Whilst interactive display sales to the education sector are slowing, the corporate meeting room market remains a huge opportunity.  In North America alone there are 5.5 million meeting rooms and existing penetration is negligible.  To date, no provider has really been able to fully ‘crack’ this market, with the challenge of providing an interactive meeting tool to help drive collaboration that is simple enough for users to utilise infrequently without training. Teachers tend to use displays daily so are more likely to learn about usage then users in a typical corporate environment and this is proving a challenge.   Microsoft has announced and is now shipping the Surface Hub solution targeting this exact challenge and expectation is that this product will drive awareness and opportunities for interactive display usage in meeting rooms.

    The Futuresource team will continue to get feedback on this and other developments all of the major AV and ed tech shows around the world, feeding the information back into the ongoing industry research that goes into the 'Futuresource report portfolio'. 

High End Photography Market Remains Robust Despite Collapse of Entry-Level Read more
Consumer Electronics

    The steep declines in camera sales over recent years (30% y-o-y), due to the ill-effects of smartphone cannibalisation, are showing some signs of softening, which could suggest the market is set to ‘bottom out’ over the next few years to serve the needs of a segment of the population who appreciate the unique benefits of dedicated cameras including bigger sensors, better optics, accessories, etc. Our research also seems to suggest the population has benefitted from previously smartphone-only users ‘stepping-up’ to real photography. Ultimately, however, the population is much smaller than it once was, but more enthusiastic, spending more, on premium equipment.

    At the very top of the photography equipment market sales have remained robust while the wider market collapsed – now representing a much more important segment of the market. Segments which include the likes of premium (large sensor) Fixed Lens cameras, mid-pro Interchangeable Lens (IL) cameras, and standalone/aftermarket lenses represent a stable market size of around £270million retail sales, year-after-year.

    With camera replacement cycles lengthening, Pro Enthusiasts are more likely to invest in their ecosystem (lenses, accessories, etc.), which should result in a relatively buoyant lens trend compared to IL camera bodies moving forwards. In particular, developments within the Compact System Camera (CSC/Mirrorless) segment, such as full frame sensor and special zooms, should result in CSC lenses rising 12% in absolute value over the next four years.

    The long term outlook for high-end equipment is relatively stable in absolute terms, with value remaining broadly constant, and likely to represent a growing share of overall revenues, reaching almost two thirds by 2019/2020.

    While it is clear that digital cameras maintain key technical advantages over multifunctional camera-devices, in terms of bigger and superior sensors and optics, and manual control, smartphones are setting the bar in terms of smart UI’s, connectivity and mobile apps, which represents a growing usability delta between smartphones and digital cameras.

Rising Adoption of Digital Signage in Corporate Office Spaces Read more
Professional AV

    Futuresource Consulting has recently published its latest round of corporate market research providing insight and commentary into the evolving purchasing and use-models of AV solutions in corporate environments. The study is based on feedback from 500 organisations across Western Europe and the US and accesses trends in both the adoption of digital signage solutions in corporate office spaces and the changing requirements for AV solutions in the meeting room. 

    The corporate vertical continues to show a strong propensity for growth in the adoption of digital signage at a time where the wider market is beginning to show signs of maturity (in some segments) and emerging territories are posting declines in the face of worsening economic conditions. The corporate market offers a large addressable audience, existing communications infrastructure (which signage solutions can leverage) and the growing desire of companies to communicate with employees and partners in increasingly diverse ways.

    Annual volume growth for commercial Large Format Display (LFD) product (excluding videowall and interactive whiteboard product) reached just 6% globally in 2015, down from 10% the year before and 20% in 2013. Large chained installs in sectors like automotive, QSR and retail banking continue to prop-up rising volumes in larger Western markets but a growth ceiling is becoming an increasing concern for suppliers as penetration in these early adopter verticals rises. 

    Over 30% of organisations surveyed in our latest round of research are using screens outside of meeting spaces for the purpose of digital signage. Large organisations with headcounts of 500+ show the highest rates of adoption but it’s the SME market, below the top tier of enterprise, which provides the largest addressable opportunity in terms of scale. Requirements in this sector are typically heavily cost driven, often based on small networks running template driven signage, with the potential to overlay signage content on existing screens used to deliver broadcast content. From a supply side perspective, the last few years have seen increasing diversification of solutions as vendors seek to align products to individual verticals, opening up new customer bases. A key facet of this strategy has been the rising availability and declining cost of lower end solutions designed to service small network environments like those seen in SME office spaces. The rising penetration of SoC solutions in screen hardware, the decreasing cost of low end media players and the increasing availability of template based content management solutions have all made digital signage more accessible to corporate customers. Penetration in the segment is rising and this positive trend is highlighted by our survey with 14% of companies that do not currently operate digital signage in office spaces expecting to do so during the next two years.

    A primary driver for the adoption and expansion of digital signage networks in the corporate space is the increasing influence of IT managers and IT integrators on AV purchase decisions. This trend is happening at a time when the AV signal distribution market is making its first significant inroads into replacing conventional matrix switching products with IP based solutions. Residing on a company’s central network, these video distribution platforms sit alongside other network based communications tools, providing IT and communications managers with opportunities to create increasingly centralised and integrated solutions. 

    IP solutions account for a small proportion of the AV matrix switching market at present (<5%) but the cost of these solutions is falling as the cost of Ethernet switches comes down and video compression standards improve. These solutions can offer numerous benefits and significant cost saving potential for larger networks spread across corporate campuses. Perhaps most importantly for the signage market is the flexibility these solutions offer. Any screen in any location can receive any video stream on the network and adding additional screens is as simple as adding an additional Ethernet switch to existing infrastructure. Over 50% of companies we surveyed which currently use digital signage in their offices expect to expand that network within the next two years. The future adoption of IP based video switching solutions will aid network expansion and help maximise the utility of signage installs in office spaces.

DreamWorks Animation Acquisition will Boost Universal Studio's Genre Portfolio Read more
Media & Entertainment

    NBCUniversal, owned by cable giant Comcast, is buying DreamWorks Animation (DWA) for $3.8bn cash (total value of the transaction is $4.1bn including debt). The deal will significantly lift Universal’s capability in animation, which is consistently a key part of the children’s genre offering across all media.
    DreamWorks Animation was separated from DreamWorks Studios SKG (now DreamWorks Pictures) in 2004 and is still run By Jeffrey Katzenberg, who co-found DreamWorks in 1994 with Steven Spielberg and David Geffen. The company makes only two major feature films a year on average and is reliant on new releases being hits. Titles which did not meet expectations have resulted in big swings in financial performance over the years and 2014 losses forced the company to close its Northern California studio in 2015, with a loss of 500 jobs. The offer by Universal represents a good premium over market price but reflects a big upturn in revenue in 2015 (see chart).

    Major DWA franchises include Shrek, which has spawned four major movies, plus TV specials, spin-offs and a stage show, Madagascar (three movies with a fourth in production) and Kung Fu Panda. In addition to feature films, the company produces a stream of TV series and specials.

    Universal already has an animation group, Illumination Entertainment, which produced one of the big CGI hits of 2015, Minions, helping the studio reach #1 at the US box office, with filmed entertainment revenues up 46% to $7.3bn. Universal also produced Despicable Me, which now has a second sequel (3) in production. Assuming the DWA deal goes ahead, it will integrate into Universal Filmed Entertainment under Chris Meledandri, who runs Illumination Entertainment, but will retain the DreamWorks banner which has worldwide brand recognition. 20thC Fox has distribution rights for DWA movies until 2017, but it is likely these will revert to Universal when the agreement lapses.

    The DreamWorks Animation acquisition will lift Universal into the top 3 studios and will offer a stronger challenge to children’s content giant Disney, which also owns Pixar. Other studios produce animation, notably Fox Blue Sky Studios (Ice Age, Rio, Robots, The Peanuts Movie) and Sony Pictures Animation (Smurfs, Surf’s Up). Warner Animation traditionally focuses on children’s TV content but had a major recent hit with the Lego Movie, with a sequel in production. Universal will also gain leverage from DreamWorks franchises in its theme parks, resorts and merchandising.

Worldwide Projector Market Value Set to Grow Read more
Professional AV

    The mainstream projector market faces long-term declines. That's not news to most. However, one story that often gets overlooked is that despite this drop in volume, market value is expected to grow.

    Accelerated adoption of solid state illumination (SSI) projectors in 2017 will drive a rise in ASPs. SSI solutions are expected to maintain an upfront premium over lamp-based solutions moving forward due to reduced maintenance costs (no replacement lamp or filter cleaning fees) enabling a lower cost of ownership.

    Whilst high-bright projectors (above 5k lumens) will contribute to the majority of this value boost, SSI is expected to gain traction across all market segments – mainstream, home cinema and short throw. By 2020, Futuresource expects around 29% of sales to be solid state – whether that is laser phosphor, RGB LED, HLD LED or RGB laser, up from just 7% in 2015. This rapid uptake is expected to cause the market's value (which has been on a consecutive 'YoY' dive since 2014) to surge 10% over the next 5 years.

    The prospect of greater margins on the horizon is being hailed by the projector vendor community as they have been blighted with multiple challenges over the last few years. It seems that the period of FPDs boasting the advantage of offering resellers far greater premiums than projectors is now coming to an end. Whilst this will fail to stop FPDs from taking greater share in both corporate and education applications (for numerous reasons, including the perception that FPDs are 'future-proofing'), it will help to curb the rate of the decline in the overall projector market.

Never Mind the Audio, Feel the Smart Home Interactivity! Read more
Media & Entertainment

    At Google I/O last week, the company unveiled its response to Amazon Echo, Google Home, a compact wireless speaker with access to a range of music services including Google's own Play Music and GoogleCast, enabling multi-room audio. Android's Google Assistant and Google Now will provide far-field voice control for services interaction as well as smart home devices, including Nest, which Google bought for $3.2 billion in 2014. Home is another piece in the Google IoT ecosystem jigsaw, leveraging the huge share of Android in mobile devices, convergence with Chrome and the bridgehead of Nest and Open Thread. Google Home will be available later in 2016.

    How things have changed since the advent of MP3, streaming music services, mobile devices and the wireless speaker revolution! In the good old HiFi days, customers would sit in studios listening to speakers from a range of vendors before making their choice, while more discerning audiophiles were happy to shell out up to $5,000 USD or more to get an extra quality edge. Today, connectivity and interactive features are competing for buyers with audio quality, bringing new end-to-end players like Amazon and Google into an already crowded field, even Apple is thought to be planning a SIRI-enabled wireless speaker product to expand its Home Kit ecosystem. Meanwhile, traditional audio brands are trying to drive HRA (High Resolution Audio) to boost consumer interest in quality and defend their space. Will new features or gimmicks make a serious dent in the market? Only time will tell.

Amazon's Trail-Blazing Growth Continues Read more
Media & Entertainment

    Amazon broke the $100 billion sales barrier in 2015 and is continuing to show unrelenting growth into 2016, with Q1 revenue up 28% to $29.1 billion. In addition to organic expansion of its e-Commerce business through wider product range and geographical reach, services are growing at 60% and now account for over 25% of revenue. 40% of 2015 operating profits came from Amazon Web Services (AWS) which is growing at 64% and is likely to hit $12 billion revenue in 2016.

    Amazon's Media segment grew at just 3.5% CAGR until 2015, but still represents a mighty business, with sales of $23 billion, bigger than Apple. Book publishing remains core, driven by Amazon's 60% share of the e-book market, served by tablets and its own Kindle e-readers. To offset decline in packaged music and video, the company offers free streaming entertainment in 5 of Amazon's key markets to subscribers of Prime, its highly successful customer loyalty program, which now has over 40 million members.

    In consumer electronics, Amazon continues to spin out a succession of innovative products developed by Lab126, its R&D group based in Cupertino. These include Echo, a wireless speaker with Amazon's Alexa voice control which was the surprise hit of 2015, selling at least 2 million units, according to Futuresource estimates. Amazon also continues to roll out dedicated Kindle e-readers despite the huge growth of tablets, including new models which will be solar powered.

    In a recent Perspective report 'Amazon: a Global e-Commerce Powerhouse', Futuresource gets inside the success factors which have driven the company from an online bookseller in 1994 to the world's most valuable retailer today.


Google Throws Down the Gauntlet in the K-12 Education Market Read more
Education Technology

    At Google I/O, Google outlined plans to bring its Android Apps to Chromebooks. Whilst this news has been expected for some time, the formal announcement adds another intriguing layer of context to the ongoing OS 'Battle Royale' for the global education market.

    Chromebooks are the number one selling device in the US K-12 market, reaching over 50% share in 2015 (a dramatic increase from 2% in 2012). However, Windows continues to dominate globally with 43% share as 90% of all Chromebook sales to K-12 are in the US. Microsoft and Apple have sought to fight back against the Chromebook onslaught with a slew of new additions to their education offerings (Microsoft Classroom, School Data Sync, Apple iOS 9.3 new management features and the Classroom App) but this new announcement will add another important capability to Chromebooks, the touch based app ecosystem.

    The Android operating system currently has a negligible position, 2% of shipments in 2015. Most of its existing installed base is in emerging markets globally where Chromebooks do not sell in scale. This announcement is unlikely to change the competitive OS environment significantly in the short term. However, in the mid-long term it provides Chromebooks with an important competitive angle.

    Google's announcement follows the slow build-up of the '2 in 1' form factor from 'The Wintel' alliance who have been promoting it as the ideal long term solution for education. Combining the processing capabilities of a notebook with the tactile touch capabilities of a tablet it is ideal for education. Pricing of '2 in 1's' has been coming down rapidly with devices now regularly in the sub $400 USD range. This trend is expected to continue and the next 12 months will see a large number of device launches (for both Windows and Chromebooks), with price points sub $300 USD expected. '2 in 1s' accounted for 4% of global K-12 device demand in 2015, and are expected to rise to 15% by 2017. Whilst Microsoft and Google will compete hard in the '2 in 1' category, Apple currently has a less compelling offering. The iPad Pro is currently priced out of range for 'mainstream' K-12 usage with 73% of market demand in 2015 coming from devices sub $400 USD. Of course this could change over time as new versions are launched, and the older iPad prices are reduced. In addition, feedback suggests that convertible devices (those with 360° hinges) are more likely to gain traction than detachable devices, as schools don't like the management complexity of separate parts and the likelihood of loss/theft and damage.